Allen-Bradley ArmorKinetix System User Manual

This manual links to Kinetix 5700 System Fault Codes, publication 2198-RD003
for fault codes; download the spreadsheet now for offline access.
ArmorKinetix System
Catalog Numbers 2198-DSD016-ERS2, 2198-DSD016-ERS5, 2198-DSD024-ERS2, 2198-DSD024-ERS5,
2198-DSM016-ERS2-A075, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-A075, 2198-DSM016-ERS2-B075, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-B075,
2198-DSM016-ERS2-A100, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-A100, 2198-DSM016-ERS2-B100, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-B100,
2198-DSM016-ERS2-A115, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-A115, 2198-DSM016-ERS2-B115, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-B115,
2198-DSM016-ERS2-A130, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-A130, 2198-DSM016-ERS2-B130, 2198-DSM024-ERS2-B130,
2198-DSM016-ERS5-A075, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-A075, 2198-DSM016-ERS5-B075, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-B075,
2198-DSM016-ERS5-A100, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-A100, 2198-DSM016-ERS5-B100, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-B100,
2198-DSM016-ERS5-A115, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-A115, 2198-DSM016-ERS5-B115, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-B115,
2198-DSM016-ERS5-A130, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-A130, 2198-DSM016-ERS5-B130, 2198-DSM024-ERS5-B130,
2198-PIM070
User Manual
Original Instructions
ArmorKinetix System User Manual
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
The following icon may appear in the text of this document.
Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Table of Contents
Preface
Access Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Download Firmware, AOP, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 1
Start
About the ArmorKinetix System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Typical Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DC-bus Power Supply Input Power Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Motor Feedback Configurations for ArmorKinetix DSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Integrated Safety Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safe Stop and Safe Monitor Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Catalog Numbers - ArmorKinetix DSD Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Catalog Numbers - ArmorKinetix DSM Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Agency Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
System Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cable Length Restrictions and System Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PIM Module Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Distributed Servo Drive and Distributed Servo Motor Module Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . 32
Accessory Module Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DC-bus Power Supply Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
In-cabinet Electrical Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
HF Bond for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
HF Bond for Multiple Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Establish Noise Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cable Categories for ArmorKinetix Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
In-cabinet Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Determine Mounting Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Mount Capacitor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Zero-stack Tab and Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Drill-hole Patterns for In-cabinet Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Drill-hole Patterns by Using the System Mounting Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Mount the In-cabinet Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Install Shared-bus Connection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DC-bus Connection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
24V Input Power Connection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
On-machine Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Precautions for Mounting ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Drill Hole Patterns for ArmorKinetix DSD Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
3
Table of Contents
Mount the DSD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drill Hole Patterns for ArmorKinetix DSM Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mount the DSM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Connectors and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connectors Signal Descriptions (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Data and Feature Descriptions
24V DC Control Power Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DC Bus Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Digital Inputs Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Ethernet Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Hybrid Cable Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connector Signal Descriptions (DSD and DSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hybrid Connector (PIM to DSD or DSM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DSx Hybrid Connector (DSx to or from DSx). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DSD Module to Motor Connectors (motor power/feedback and feedback connectors) 61
Digital Input Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Control Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Digital Input Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ethernet Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DSM Brake Override Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DSM Brake Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Feedback Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Encoder Feedback Supported on the DSD Module Motor Power/Feedback
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Encoder Feedback Supported on the DSD Module Motor Feedback Connector . . . . . 66
Encoder Phasing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Absolute Position Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix
System
Basic Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Bypass a ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Determine Input Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DC-bus Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Ground the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ArmorKinetix PIM Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Wire the 24V Control Power Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Wire the Digital Inputs Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connect the Hybrid Cable and Make Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Connect Digital Inputs on ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Connect Cables and Terminators to DSx Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the
ArmorKinetix System
4
Power Interface Module (PIM) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setup Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Startup Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Set Network Parameters for the PIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Table of Contents
Set Network Parameters for the DSD and DSM Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Install the Add-on Profile for the Studio 5000 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configure the Logix 5000 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Add and Configure a Kinetix 5700 DC-bus Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Add and Configure the ArmorKinetix PIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Add and Configure the DSD or DSM Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configure Module Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configure the Power and Safety Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Add an Associated Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configure Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configure a Motion Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configure Axis Properties for the PIM Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Configure Axis Properties for ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configure Vertical Load Control Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configure Feedback-only Axis Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configure Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configure SPM Motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configure Induction-motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configure Motor Feedback Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Digital AqB (TTL) Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Digital AqB with UVW (TTL w/Hall) Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Sine/Cosine Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sine/Cosine with Hall Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Hiperface DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Understand Bus-sharing Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bus-sharing Group Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configure Bus-sharing Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Download the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Apply Power to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Test and Tune the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Test the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Tune the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix
System
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Interpret Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fault Code Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
SAFE FLT Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Logix 5000 Controller and Drive Module Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
PIM Module Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ArmorKinetix Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Remove and Replace PIM and
DSx Modules
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remove Power and All Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remove the PIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Replace the PIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Start and Configure the Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety
Features
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Distributed Servo Drive (DSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Distributed Servo Motor (DSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Important Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Stop Category Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Average Frequency of a Dangerous Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Compatible Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Safety Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Safe Torque-off Assembly Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
STO Fault Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Standard Data for Safe Torque Off Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Out-of-Box State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Restore Out-of-Box State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Understand Integrated Safety Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Replace an Integrated Safety Drive in a GuardLogix System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configure Always . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Motion Direct Commands in Motion Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Understand STO Bypass When Using Motion Direct Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Torque Permitted in a Multi-workstation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning Icon and Text in Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Functional Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
6
Interconnect Diagram Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Power Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Capacitor Module Status Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Contactor Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Passive Shunt Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Active Shunt Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ArmorKinetix Module and Rotary Motor Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
ArmorKinetix System and Linear Actuator Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
System Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Table of Contents
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus
Configurations
Shared DC-bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Shared DC-bus Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
General Sizing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
System Sizing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Select Drive/Motor Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Select the Power Supply and Define the DC-bus Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Calculate System and External-bus Capacitance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Calculate the Total Motor Power Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Calculate 24V DC Control Power Current Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
24V DC Voltage Drop Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
System Sizing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
System Sizing Application Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Appendix C
Maximum Motor Cable Lengths DC-bus Power Supply Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
for Kinetix 5700 Power Supplies
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Frequency Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Basic Volts/Hertz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Basic Volts/Hertz for Fan/Pump Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sensorless Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Current Limiting for Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
The Effects of Current Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Enable the Current Limiting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Set the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Stability Control for Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Enable the Stability Control Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Skip Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Multiple Skip Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Flux Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Flux Up Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Configure the Flux Up Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Current Regulator Loop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Motor Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Motor Analyzer Category Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Selection of Motor Thermal Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Generic Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Rotary Motor Fan Cooling Attribute Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Thermally Characterized Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Motion Polarity Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
SLAT Min Speed/Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SLAT Max Speed/Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SLAT Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configure the Axis for SLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Motion Drive Start (MDS) Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
7
Table of Contents
Motor Overload Retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Phase Loss Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Phase-loss Detection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Phase-loss Detection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Phase Loss Detection Current Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Velocity Droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Closed Loop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Velocity Droop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Commutation Self-sensing Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Commutation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Adaptive Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Virtual Torque Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Accelerometer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Slip-ring Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
24 Axes Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
48 Axes Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Preface
This manual provides detailed installation instructions for mounting and wiring your ArmorKinetix®
power interface modules (PIM), distributed servo drive modules (DSD), and distributed servo motor
modules (DSM). Also included is system configuration with the Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
application, integration of your drive modules with a Logix 5000™ controller, system startup, and
troubleshooting.
This manual is intended for engineers or technicians directly involved in the installation and wiring
of the ArmorKinetix modules, and programmers directly involved in the operation, field
maintenance, and integration of these modules with the EtherNet/IP™ communication module or
controller.
In this manual, when referring to a DSx module, the topic applies to either a
distributed servo drive (DSD) module or a distributed servo motor (DSM) module.
Access Fault Codes
For ArmorKinetix system fault code descriptions and possible solutions,
see Kinetix 5700 System Fault Codes, publication 2198-RD003; download
the spreadsheet for offline access.
Download Firmware, AOP,
EDS, and Other Files
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release
notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell
Automation. You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.
Table 1 - Additional Resources
Resource
Kinetix® Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD001
Kinetix Linear Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD002
Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives Specifications Technical
Data, publication KNX-TD003
Kinetix Rotary and Linear Motion Cable Specifications Technical Data,
publication KNX-TD004
Kinetix Servo Drive Performance Specifications per Ecodesign Regulation
(EU) 2019/1781 Technical Data, publication KNX-TD006
Kinetix 5700 System Fault Codes Reference Data,
publication 2198-RD003
Kinetix 5700 Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM001
ArmorKinetix Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM007
ArmorKinetix 2090 Cables and Connectors Installation Instructions,
publication 2090-IN053
Knowledgebase Technote ArmorKinetix DSD/DSM Frequently Asked Questions
1321 Power Conditioning Products Technical Data, publication 1321-TD001
System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual,
publication GMC-RM001
Servo Drive Installation Best Practices Application Technique,
publication MOTION-AT004
Description
Product specifications for Kinetix VPL, VPC, VPF, VPH, VPS, Kinetix MPL, MPM, MPF, MPS; Kinetix TL
and TLY, Kinetix RDB, Kinetix MMA, and Kinetix HPK rotary motors.
Provides product specifications for Kinetix MPAS and MPMA linear stages, Kinetix VPAR, MPAR,
and MPAI electric cylinders, Kinetix LDAT linear thrusters, and Kinetix LDC linear motors.
Provides product specifications for Kinetix Integrated Motion over the EtherNet/IP network and
EtherNet/IP networking servo drive families.
Product specifications for Kinetix 2090 motor and interface cables.
Provides energy efficiency performance data for Rockwell Automation Kinetix servo drives. This
data supports IE2 compliance of Kinetix servo drives per EU 2019/1781.
Provides the fault codes for Kinetix 5700 servo drives and ArmorKinetix system modules.
Provides a description of integrated stopping functions and safe monitoring functions with a
GuardLogix® controller and Kinetix 5700 servo drives.
Provides a description of integrated stopping functions and safe monitoring functions with a
GuardLogix® controller and ArmorKinetix modules.
Provides information for the ArmorKinetix 2090 cables.
Knowledgebase technote provinding additional information for ArmorKinetix module functions.
Provides information on typical use cases, specifications, terminations, and dimensions of 1321
line reactors.
Provides information, examples, and techniques designed to minimize system failures caused by
electrical noise.
Best practice examples to help reduce the number of potential noise or electromagnetic
interference (EMI) sources in your system and to make sure that the noise sensitive components
are not affected by the remaining noise.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
9
Table 1 - Additional Resources (Continued)
Resource
Kinetix 5700 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication KNX-RM010
Motor Nameplate Datasheet Entry for Custom Motor Applications Application
Technique, publication 2198-AT002
Vertical Load and Holding Brake Management Application Technique,
publication MOTION-AT003
Motion System Tuning Application Technique, publication MOTION-AT005
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User
Manual, publication MOTION-UM003
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual,
publication MOTION-RM003
GuardLogix® 5570 Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM022
GuardLogix 5580 Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM543
Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers User Manual, publication 1769-UM022
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controllers User Manual, publication 5069-UM001
GuardLogix 5570 and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controller Systems Safety
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM099
GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems Safety
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012
FactoryTalk® Motion Analyzer™ System Sizing and Selection Tool
website rok.auto/motion-analyzer
Description
System design guide to select the required (drive specific) drive module, power accessory,
feedback connector kit, and motor cable catalog numbers for your Kinetix 5700 drive system,
including ArmorKinetix modules.
Provides information on the use of nameplate data entry for custom induction motors and
permanent-magnet motors that are used in applications with Kinetix 5700 servo drives.
Provides information on vertical loads and how the servo motor holding-brake option can be
used to help keep a load from falling.
Provides information on tuning a Kinetix drive system.
Provides information on configuring and troubleshooting your ControlLogix® and CompactLogix™
EtherNet/IP network modules.
Provides information on the AXIS_CIP_DRIVE attributes and the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application Control Modes and Methods.
Provides information on how to install, configure, program, and use ControlLogix controllers and
GuardLogix controllers in Studio 5000 Logix Designer projects.
Provides information on how to install, configure, program, and use CompactLogix and Compact
GuardLogix controllers.
Provides information on how to achieve and maintain Safety Integrity Level (SIL) and
Performance Level (PL) safety application requirements for GuardLogix and Compact GuardLogix
controllers.
Comprehensive motion application sizing tool used for analysis, optimization, selection, and
validation of your Kinetix Motion Control system.
Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP devices to communicate on the EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual, ENET-UM006
network.
Describes basic Ethernet concepts, infrastructure components, and infrastructure features.
Ethernet Reference Manual, ENET-RM002
CIP Security with Rockwell Automation Products Application Technique,
Provides information on CIP Security, including which Rockwell Automation products support
publication SECURE-AT001
CIP Security.
Provides guidance on how to conduct security assessments, implement Rockwell Automation
products in a secure system, harden the control system, manage user access, and dispose of
System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual, SECURE-RM001
equipment.
Provides guidance on how to use ControlFLASH or ControlFLASH Plus software to upgrade drive
ControlFLASH™ User Manual, publication 1756-UM105
firmware. Refer to your product release notes to determine whether it supports firmware
ControlFLASH™ Plus Quick Start Guide, publication CFP-QS001
upgrades by using ControlFLASH or ControlFLASH Plus software.
to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and provides general
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State Designed
guidelines
for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in the form of
Control, publication SGI-1.1
individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state components.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
publication 1770-4.1
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
1
Start
Use this chapter to become familiar with the ArmorKinetix® system and obtain an overview of
installation configurations.
About the
ArmorKinetix System
On-machine drives include Distributed Servo Motor (DSM) and Distributed Servo Drive (DSD). Both
are single axis inverters and can be powered by a Diode Front End (DFE) module. The connection
between the in-cabinet system and the on-machine inverters is established by using the Power
Interface Module (PIM) that distributes DC power and communication signals by using a single cable
(hybrid cable). Each PIM module can support up to 24 axes. If more than 24 axes are needed, you
can use multiple PIM modules.
Table 2 - ArmorKinetix System Overview
Drive System
Component
Cat. No.
DC-bus
Power Supply
2198-Pxxx
ArmorKinetix Power
Interface Module (PIM) 2198-PIM070
ArmorKinetix System 2198-DSD0xx-ERS2
Single-axis Distributed 2198-DSD0xx-ERS5
Servo Drives (DSD)
ArmorKinetix System 2198-DSM0xx-ERS2
Single-axis Distributed 2198-DSM0xx-ERS5
Servo Motors (DSM)
Kinetix® 5700
Capacitor Module
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Kinetix 5700 Extension 2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
Module
Kinetix 5700 DC-bus
Conditioner Module
Shared-bus
Connector Kits
PIM Connector Kit
Kinetix 5700 System
Mounting Toolkit
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
Description
Converter power supply with 200V and 400V-class (three-phase) AC input. Provides output current in a range of
10.5…69.2 A. Systems typically consist of one module, however, up to three modules in parallel is possible. Parallel
modules increase available power for 2198 modules.
The PIM module provides the connection between the in-cabinet system and the on-machine inverter. This module
distributes DC power and communication signals to the DSD and DSM modules by using a single cable (hybrid cable).
Each PIM module can support up to 24 axes.
Single-axis inverters with current ratings up to 8 A rms. Drives feature TÜV Rheinland-certified Safe Torque Off function
with integrated safety connection options, PLe and SIL 3 safety ratings, and support for Hiperface DSL, and Hiperface
encoder feedback. The DSD modules also support Timed and Monitored SS1 drive-based stopping functions, and
support for controller based Safe Stop 1 and safe speed monitoring functions over the Ethernet network.
Single-axis motor/inverter with maximum continuous torque of 11.9 Nm and peak torque of 31.2 Nm with speeds up to
8000 rpm. The -ERS2 motor/inverters feature TÜV Rheinland-certified Safe Torque Off function with integrate safety
connection, PLe, and SIL 3 for Hiperface DSL feedback only. The modules also support Timed SS1 drive-based stopping
functions. The 2198-DSMxxx-ERS5 modules also support Timed and Monitored SS1 drive-based stopping functions, and
support for controller-based Safe Stop 1 and Safely-limited Speed functions.
Use for energy storage, external active-shunt connection, and to extend the DC-bus voltage to another inverter cluster.
Modules are zero-stacked with servo drives and use the shared-bus connection system to extend the external DC-bus
voltage in applications up to 104 A. Can parallel with itself or with another accessory module for up to 208 A with
required 2198-KITCON-CAPMOD2240 kit that includes flexible bus-bars.
The extension module, paired with a capacitor module or DC-bus conditioner module, is used to extend the DC-bus
voltage to another inverter cluster in systems with ≥104 A current and up to 208 A.
Decreases the voltage stress on insulation components in an inverter system and used to extend the DC-bus voltage to
another inverter cluster. Modules are zero-stacked with servo drives and use the shared-bus connection system to
extend the external DC-bus voltage in applications up to 104 A. Can parallel with itself or with another accessory module
for up to 208 A with required 2198-KITCON-DCBUSCOND kit that includes flexible bus-bars.
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
2198-xxxx-P-T
2198-BARCON-xxDCAC100
24V input wiring connectors, T-connectors, and bus-bars for most Kinetix 5700 drive modules that use the 24V sharedbus connection system (optional).
2198-BARCON-xxDC200
2198-KITCON-ENDCAP200
2198-KITCON-PIM070
DC-bus links (55, 85, 100, and 220 mm) and end caps for the DC-bus shared-bus connection system (required and
included with each respective drive module). DC-bus links (165, 275, and 440 mm) are optional and do not ship with any
modules.
Replacement connector kit.
2198-K5700-MOUNTKIT
Use to position the drive modules and identify drill-holes for mounting your Kinetix 5700 servo drive system.
Encoder Output Module 2198-ABQE
The Allen-Bradley® encoder output module is a DIN rail mounted EtherNet/IP™ network-based standalone module
capable of outputting encoder pulses to a customer-supplied peripheral device (cameras, for example, used in linescan vision systems).
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
11
Chapter 1
Start
Table 2 - ArmorKinetix System Overview (Continued)
Drive System
Component
Cat. No.
Description
1769
5069
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network in CompactLogix™ 5370, CompactLogix 5380, and CompactLogix 5480
controllers and Integrated Safety in Compact GuardLogix® 5370 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers. Linea, and
Device Level Ring (DLR) topology is supported.
Logix 5000® Controller
Platform
1756-L8xE module
1769-ERM module
5069-L3xxxERM module
Studio 5000®
Environment
Rotary Servo Motors
Linear Actuators
Linear Motors
Induction Motors
EtherNet/IP network communication modules for use with ControlLogix® 5570, ControlLogix 5580, GuardLogix 5570, and
GuardLogix 5580 controllers. Linear and Device Level Ring (DLR) topology is supported.
Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application, version 35.00 or later, with an Add-on Profile (AOP), provides support for
programming, commissioning, and maintaining the CompactLogix, ControlLogix, and GuardLogix controller families.
Download AOP files from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc.
• Compatible 400V-class motors include Kinetix VPL, VPF, VPH, and VPS servo motors.
• Compatible 200V-class motors include Kinetix VPL, VPF, and VPH servo motors.
Compatible 200V and 400V-class motors include Kinetix MPL, MPM, MPF, and MPS servo motors.
N/A
Kinetix VP motors
Kinetix MP motors
Kinetix VPAR and MPAR,
actuators
Kinetix LDAT
Kinetix LDC
N/A
Compatible actuators include 400V-class Kinetix VPAR and MPAR electric cylinders, and Kinetix LDAT linear thrusters.
Compatible motors include Kinetix LDC iron-core (200V and 400V-class) linear motors.
Induction motors with open-loop frequency control and closed-loop control are supported.
This cable connects the Power Interface Module (PIM) to either the ArmorKinetix Distributed Servo Motor (DSM) or the
Distributed Servo Drive (DSD).
2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx
Cables
2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx,
2090-CDHP1S-12AFJ
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
2090-CPWFLP7-14AFxx
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
2090-CFBFLS7-CDAFxx
This cable connects a DSx module to a DSx module (where DSx is either a DSM module or a DSD module).
2090-CDET
AC Line Filters
1585J-M8CBJM-x
2090-CDHT
2090-CDFT
2090-CDPT
2198-DBR20-F, 2198-DBR40-F,
2198-DBR90-F, 2198-DBR200-F
Line Reactors
1321-3Rxx-x
Connector Terminator
100-Cxxxxx
100-Dxxxxx
100-Exxxxx
24V DC Power Supply 1606-XLxxx
External Passive Shunt 2198-R014, 2198-R031,
Resistors
2198-R127, 2198-R004
This cable connects motor power to a Kinetix MPL motor and motor power/feedback to a Kinetix VPL motor.
This cable connects the DSD to induction motors.
This cable connects the Kinetix motor feedback to the distributed servo drive.
This cable connects a Kinetix or induction motor feedback for single or dual loop functionality to the DSD module.
The hybrid connector communication extension has only the communication/Ethernet pins populated on the M23 side,
and passes through to an M12 X-coded Ethernet connection on the other side.
Ethernet cables are available in standard lengths. Shielded cable is required to meet EMC specifications.
DSx hybrid connector output terminator.
DSD feedback connector terminator.
DSD power connector terminator.
2198 three-phase AC line filters are required to meet CE and UK and are available for use with DC-bus power supplies
and regenerative bus supplies.
The 1321 line reactors help keep equipment running longer by absorbing many of the power line disturbances that can
shut down your power supply.
AC Contactor
The AC three-phase contactor control string must be wired in series with the contactor-enable relay at the CED
connector to make sure that three-phase power is removed under various fault conditions to protect the power supply.
External Active Shunts N/A
1606 24V DC power supply for control circuitry, digital inputs, safety, and motor brake.
2198 external passive-shunt resistors for use when the DC-bus power supply internal shunt capability is exceeded. Not
for use with regenerative bus supplies.
External active shunts from Rockwell Automation Encompass™ partner, Powerohm Resistors, Inc. or Bonitron, Inc., are
available for connecting to 2198 DC-bus power supplies.
12
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 1
Typical Hardware
Configurations
Each ArmorKinetix PIM module supports up to 24 ArmorKinetix DSD and/or DSM modules. Total
cable length for the ArmorKinetix system [PIM, DSD (including motor connections), and DSM
modules] is 140 m (459 ft) maximum.
11
12
1
2
Start
6
6
6
14
3
3
3
11
6
6
Item Description
4
3
14
6
3
8
3
7
9
Kinetix VPL
motor shown.
13
4
3
Item Description
DSD to Induction Motor Power Cable (2090-CPWFLP7-14AFxx)
8 ArmorKinetix
1…4 m (3.28…13.12 ft)
DSD to Induction Motor Feedback or Stand-alone Feedback Cable
9 ArmorKinetix
(2090-CFBFLS7-CDAFxx) 1…4 m (3.28…13.12 ft)
DSD to Kinetix Motor Feedback Cable (2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx)
10 ArmorKinetix
1…4 m (3.28…13.12 ft)
Ethernet patchcord, 1 Gigabit with hybrid connector to connect to communication
11 extension 85 m (278 ft) max.
(1585D-M8UGDM, 1585D-M8TGDE, or 1585D-E8TGDE)
1
ArmorKinetix PIM Modules
2
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives
3
ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM Module
4
Kinetix VPL or Kinetix MPL Motor
5
ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx Hybrid Cable (2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx)
3…50 m (9.8…164 ft)
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx Hybrid Cable (2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx)
0.5…30 m (1.64…98.4 ft)
ArmorKinetix DSD to Kinetix Motor Power/Feedback Cable
(2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx) 1…4 m (3.28…13.12 ft)
7
Kinetix MPL
motor shown.
3
5
6
10
7
5
12
Managed Ethernet Switch
13
Induction Motor
14
Communication Extension Jumper Cable (2090-CDET)
Communication Configurations
The ArmorKinetix System supports linear and ring Ethernet topology by using ControlLogix,
GuardLogix, or CompactLogix controllers.
These examples feature the ControlLogix 5580 programmable automation controllers with support
for integrated motion and integrated safety over the EtherNet/IP network. Other Allen-Bradley
controllers are also compatible with the ArmorKinetix modules.
Refer to ControlLogix Communication Module Specifications Technical Data, publication
1756-TD003, for more information on ControlLogix 1756-EN2T, 1756-EN2TR, 1756-EN3TR, and
1756-EN4TR communication modules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
13
Chapter 1
Start
These example configurations use the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply.
Linear Topology
In this example, all devices are connected by using linear topology. The ArmorKinetix System
modules include dual-port connectivity, however, if any device becomes disconnected, all devices
downstream of that device lose communication. Devices without dual ports must include the 1783ETAP module or be connected at the end of the line.
Figure 1 - ArmorKinetix System Linear Communication Installation
ControlLogix Controller Programming Network
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET
OK
ControlLogix 5580 Controller
with 1756 EtherNet/IP Module
PIM Module
1585J-M8CBJM-OM15
0.15 m (6 in.) Ethernet cables
for drive-to-drive connections.
2
1
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
2198-ABQE
Encoder Output Module
1734-AENTR POINT I/O™
EtherNet/IP Adapter
MOD
NET
002
1734-AENTR
POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Status
Link 1
Activity/
Status
System
Power
Field
Power
OUTPUT-A
OUTPUT-B
Link 2
Activity/
Status
PanelView™ 5510
Display Terminal
ArmorKinetix
System
Line Scan
Cameras
L8
Communication Extension Jumper
Cable (2090-CDET) and an Ethernet
patchcord 10/100MB, X-code to Dcode (1585D-E8TGD4E-xx)
Kinetix VPL
motor
DSx Modules
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 1
Start
Device Level Ring Topology
In this example, the devices are connected by using ring topology. If only one device in the ring is
disconnected, the rest of the devices continue to communicate. For ring topology to work correctly,
a device level ring (DLR) supervisor is required (for example, the 1783 ETAP device). DLR is an ODVA
standard. For more information, refer to the EtherNet/IP Device Level Ring Application Technique,
publication ENET-AT007.
Devices without dual ports, for example the display terminal, require a 1783-ETAP module to
complete the network ring.
Figure 2 - ArmorKinetix System Ring Communication Installation
ControlLogix Controller Programming Network
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET
OK
ControlLogix 5580 Controller
with 1756 EtherNet/IP Module
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
2
1
1585J-M8CBJM-x Ethernet
(shielded) Cable
PanelView 5510
Display Terminal
1783-ETAP
Module
L8
002
1734-AENTR
POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Link 1
Activity/
Status
2198-ABQE
Encoder Output Module
Point Bus
Status
System
Power
Field
Power
MOD
NET
PIM Module
OUTPUT-A
1734-AENTR POINT I/O
EtherNet/IP Adapter
Link 2
Activity/
Status
OUTPUT-B
1
I/O-A
6
1
I/O-B
6
Line Scan
Cameras
Communication Extension Jumper
Cable (2090-CDET) and an Ethernet
patchcord 10/100MB, X-code to Dcode (1585D-E8TGD4E-xx)
1585J-M8CBJM-OM15
0.15 m (6 in.) Ethernet cable
for drive-to-drive connections.
ArmorKinetix
System
DSx Modules
Kinetix VPL
motor
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
15
Chapter 1
Start
DC-bus Power Supply Input Power Configurations
A single 2198-Pxxx DC-bus (converter) power supply can supply the ArmorKinetix System drive
system with 276…747V shared DC-bus power. For additional output power (kW) you can install two
or three 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies. You can also extend the DC-bus to additional inverter
clusters via accessory modules.
Typical DC-bus Power Supply Configuration Example
In this multi-axis example, AC input power is fed to the DC-bus (converter) power supply. One
single-axis (inverter) module, one dual-axis (inverter), and one PIM module support five axes of
motion. The PIM module connects to one DSD module, which is connects to a Kinetix VPL motor, and
a DSM module. The DC-bus power supply is mounted on the far left and the inverters are positioned
on the right, but the reverse mounting order (right to left) is also possible.
Digital inputs are wired to sensors and the control circuitry at the IOD connectors. The contactorenable relay protects the DC-bus power supply in the event of shutdown fault conditions.
Figure 3 - Typical DC-bus Power Supply Installation
2198 Shunt Module
(optional component)
ArmorKinetix System Servo Drive System
(top view)
SH
DC+
Shared DC-bus Power
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control, Digital Inputs,
and Motor Brake Power (customer-supplied)
1
9
8
16
1
9
8
16
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
Allen-Bradley
1
9
8
16
Shared 24V Control Power
(24V shared-bus connection system is optional)
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
1606-XL
Po w e r S u p p l y
Input
AC Input Power
DC-bus
Single-axis Dual-axis PIM Capacitor
Power Supply Inverter Inverters Module Module
ArmorKinetix System Servo Drive System
(front view)
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
DC BUS
Converter Digital Inputs
Magnetic Contactor (M1) Control String
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Digital Inputs
2
2
I/O
2198 shared-bus connection system for DC-bus
and 24V DC control power.
6
1
10
5
I/O-A
6
1
I/O-B
6
1
I/O-A
6
4
I/O
MODULE
STATUS
195…528V AC
Three-phase Input Power
5
UFB
UFB-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
UFB-B
10
D+
D-
MF-A
Line Disconnect
Device
10 5
MF-B
MF
MBRK
-
+
Circuit
Protection
Magnetic (M1)
Contactor
DSD Module connected to Kinetix VPL motor
2198-DBRxx-F
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
DSM Module
Chapter 1
Start
Multiple DC-Bus Power Supply Configuration Example
In this example, three DC-bus (converter) power supplies all receive AC input power and feed the
inverter modules for increased output power.
Contactor enable relays from each of the DC-bus power supplies are wired in series to protect the
DC-bus power supply in the event of shutdown fault conditions.
Figure 4 - Multiple DC-bus Power Supply Installation
2198 Shunt Module
(optional component)
SH
SH
SH
DC+
DC+
DC+
ArmorKinetix System Servo
Drive System (top view)
Shared DC-bus Power
1
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control Power
(customer-supplied)
1
9
Allen-Bradley
8
8
16
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
8
16
16
1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y
AC Input Power
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supplies
ArmorKinetix System Servo Drive System
(front view)
Line Disconnect
Device
Shared 24V Control Power
(24V shared-bus connection system
is optional)
9
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
Input
195…528V AC
Three-phase
Input Power
1
9
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
Magnetic Contactor
(M1) Control String
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
Single-axis Inverter
MOD
NET
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOD
NET
1
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
MOD
DC BUS
2198 shared-bus connection system
for DC-bus
and 24V DC control power.
2
2
1
4
I/O
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
1
4
Dual-axis PIM Capacitor
Inverters Module Module
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O
6
4
I/O
I/O
MODULE
STATUS
5
D+
D-
Circuit
Protection
10
D+
D-
MF-A
MF-B
-
MBRK
+
Magnetic (M1)
Contactor
W
V
DSD Module connected to Kinetix VPL mot
U
21mm2 (4 AWG-250 kcmil)
15-20 Nm (132-177 lbin)
2198-DBR200-F
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
Circuit
Protection
DSM Module
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus
1321-3R80-B
Line Reactors
(required components)
IMPORTANT
When two or three DC-bus power supplies are wired together in the same
drive cluster, they must all be catalog number 2198-P208.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
17
Chapter 1
Start
Extended DC-bus Configuration Example
In this example, two drive clusters in the same cabinet are connected by the same 276…747V DC
bus voltage. Kinetix 5700 accessory modules provide connection points for the DC-bus at the end
of cluster 1 and the beginning of cluster 2. The Kinetix 5700 servo drive system is capable of up to
208 A DC-bus current. Two accessory modules are needed when the DC-bus system current
exceeds 104 A. See Accessory Module Selection on page 32 for more information on the when
accessory modules are required.
Figure 5 - Extended DC-bus Installation
Extension Capacitor
Module Module
Kinetix System Extended Servo Drives
Cluster 2 (front view)
MOD
NET
MOD
DC BUS
MOD
NET
2
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
MF-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
6 1
MF-A
I/O-B
6 1
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
MF-B
2
1
I/O-A
I/O-B
6 1
10 5
UFB-A
6
1
10
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
MF-A
1
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
1
I/O-A
D+
D-
MF-B
MOD
NET
2
1
I/O-A
Shared DC-bus and
24V DC Control Power
MOD
NET
2
1
I/O-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MOD
NET
2
1
1
MODULE
STATUS
MOD
NET
2
1
DC-bus Extension
PIM Modules
Dual-axis Inverters
MF-A
I/O-A
I/O-B
6
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
6 1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
MF-A
MF-B
DC-bus Extension
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supplies
195…528V AC
Three-phase
Input Power
Line Disconnect
Device
2198 Shared-bus Connection
System
(24V shared-bus connection
system is optional)
Magnetic Contactor
(M1) Control String
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2198-DBR200-F
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
MOD
NET
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
I/O
I/O
PIM Capacitor Extension
Module
Module Module
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
1
1
MOD
DC BUS
2
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
I/O-A
6
I/O
MODULE
STATUS
5
UFB
10
DSM Module
Circuit
Protection
Magnetic (M1)
Contactor
Single-axis
Inverter
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
D+
D-
MF
Kinetix System Servo Drives
Cluster 1 (front view)
Circuit
Protection
1321-3R80-B
Line Reactors
(required components)
ATTENTION: Circuit protection can be
added after the power supply cluster to
help protect converters and inverters from
damage in the event of a DC-bus cable
short-circuit.
-
MBRK
+
DSD Module connected to Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus
IMPORTANT
18
When two or three DC-bus power supplies are wired together in the same
drive cluster, they must all be catalog number 2198-P208.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 1
Start
Motor Feedback Configurations for ArmorKinetix DSD
Feedback connections are made at the motor feedback (MF) connector on the DSD. These examples
illustrate how you can make these connections. To see motor power and brake connections, refer
to Chapter 5 on page 71.
Figure 6 - Feedback Configuration Example
ArmorKinetix DSD Motor
Feedback Connector
13
17
2
3
14
15
16
9
8
ArmorKinetix DSD to Kinetix VPL/MPL Power Cable
(2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx)
1
12
11
10
7
4
5
6
ArmorKinetix DSD to Kinetix Motor Feedback Cable
(2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx)
Kinetix MPL, MPM, MPF, MPS
Rotary Motors
(MPL-Bxxxx motor is shown)
Kinetix VPL, VPF, VPH, and
VPS, Rotary Motors
(VPL-Bxxxx motor is shown)
Green/Yellow
Blue
Black
Brown
ArmorKinetix DSD to Induction Motor Power Cable
(2090-CPWFLP7-14AFxx)
ArmorKinetix DSD to Induction Motor or Auxiliary (stand-alone) Feedback Cable
(2090-CFBFLS7-CDAFxx)
Induction Motor
Kinetix VPAR
Electric Cylinders
www.ab.com
IN USA
MADE
75500
X XXXX
A
LDC-M0
NO. XXXX
CAT. NO.
SERIAL
Kinetix LDC Linear
Motors
Kinetix LDAT Linear Thrusters
SERIES
Kinetix MPAR
Electric Cylinders
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
19
Chapter 1
Start
Integrated Safety Configurations
The GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix safety controller issues the safe torque-off (STO) or safe
stop (SS1) command over the EtherNet/IP network and the ArmorKinetix DSx module executes the
command.
Table 3 - Integrated Functional Safety Support
Integrated Safety Over the
EtherNet/IP™ Network
Drive-based stopping functions
Safety Function
ArmorKinetix DSD
Cat. No.
ArmorKinetix DSM
Cat. No.
Timed Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
2198-DSDxxx-ERS2
2198-DSDxxx-ERS5
2198-DSMxxx-ERS2
2198-DSMxxx-ERS5
2198-DSDxxx-ERS5
2198-DSMxxx-ERS5
2198-DSDxxx-ERS5
2198-DSMxxx-ERS5
2198-DSDxxx-ERS2
2198-DSMxxx-ERS2
Minimum Controller (1)
Required
Monitored Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
Controller-based stopping functions
• Monitored Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
• Safe Stop 2 (SS2)
Controller-based monitoring functions
• Safe Operational Stop (SOS)
• Safely Limited Speed (SLS)
• Safety Limited Position (SLP)
• Safe Direction (SDI)
Safety feedback function
Safety Feedback Interface (SFX)
Integrated STO mode
Safe Torque-off (STO)
• GuardLogix 5580
• CompactGuardLogix 5380
• GuardLogix 5570
• CompactGuardLogix 5370
(1) Where a ControlLogix or CompactLogix (non-safety) controller is specified, a GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix controller is backwards compatible. Also, GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix
5380 controllers are backwards compatible with GuardLogix 5570 and Compact GuardLogix 5370 controllers.
20
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 1
Start
In this example, a single GuardLogix safety controller makes the Motion and Safety connections.
IMPORTANT
If only one controller is used in an application with Motion and Safety
connections, it must be a GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix safety
controller. For more information, see the Integrated Functional Safety
Support table on page 20.
Figure 7 - Motion and Safety Configuration (single controller)
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controller,
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Safety Controller or
GuardLogix 5570 Controller,
GuardLogix 5580 Safety Controller
(GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller is shown)
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
with ArmorKinetix PIM Module (top view)
2
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Application
Module Definition
Configured with
Motion and Safety
Connection
1
1783-BMS
Stratix 5700
Switch
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
1734-AENTR
POINT Guard I/O™
EtherNet/IP Adapter
Safety
Device
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control, Digital Inputs,
and Motor Brake Power
(customer-supplied)
AC Input Power
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
with ArmorKinetix PIM (front view)
Allen-Bradley
1606-XL
Power S u p p l y
Input
Digital Inputs to Sensors and Control String
1
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
Kinetix VP
Servo Motors
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
DSM Module
21
Chapter 1
Start
In this example, a non-safety controller makes the Motion-only connection and a separate
GuardLogix safety controller makes the Safety-only connection.
IMPORTANT
If two controllers are used in an application with Motion Only and Safety Only
connections, the Safety Only connection must be a GuardLogix or Compact
GuardLogix safety controller and the Motion Only connection must be any
Logix 5000 controller. For more information, see the Integrated Functional
Safety Support table on page 20.
Figure 8 - Motion and Safety Configuration (multi-controller)
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
1783-BMS
Stratix 5700
Switch
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
2
1
Any Logix 5000 Controller
(ControlLogix 5570 controller is shown)
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
1734-AENTR
POINT Guard I/O
EtherNet/IP Adapter
Motion Program
Module Definition
Configured with
Motion Only
Connection
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
with ArmorKinetix PIM (top view)
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
2
1
Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controller,
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Safety Controller or
GuardLogix 5570 Controller,
GuardLogix 5580 Safety Controller
(GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller is shown)
Safety Program
Module Definition
Configured with
Safety Only
Connection
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control,
Digital Inputs,
and Motor Brake Power
(customer-supplied)
Safety
Device
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
with ArmorKinetix PIM (front view)
AC Input
Power
Digital Inputs to Sensors and Control String
Kinetix VP
Servo Motors
DSD Module
DSM Module
Kinetix VP
Servo Motors
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
1
Chapter 1
Start
Safe Stop and Safe Monitor Configurations
ArmorKinetix System modules are capable of safe stop and safe monitor functions via drive-based
and controller-based integrated safety over the EtherNet/IP network.
IMPORTANT
For applications with safe stop and safe monitor safety functions, the
GuardLogix 5580 or Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers must be used.
For more information, see the Integrated Functional Safety Support table on
page 20.
In this example, the SS1 stopping function is used in a motion and safety controller-based
configuration with dual-feedback monitoring.
Figure 9 - Safe Motion-monitoring Configuration
Compact GuardLogix 5380 or
GuardLogix 5580 Safety Controller
(GuardLogix 5580 Safety Controller is shown)
EtherNet/IP
1783-BMS
Stratix 5700
Switch
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
2
1
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
1734-AENTR
POINT Guard I/O
EtherNet/IP Adapter
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
ArmorKinetix System
with Integrated Safety Functions
Safety
Device
ArmorKinetix
PIM Module
MOD
NET
2
2
1
1
4
I/O
Position feedback is sent
separately to the drive for safety
and for motion control.
Controller-based Instruction Example
Secondary Feedback
842HR SIN/COS Encoder for Dual
Feedback Monitoring Applications
ArmorKinetix
DSD Module
Secondary Feedback to Feedback Connector
Primary Feedback to Motor Power/Feedback Connector
Primary Feedback
• Kinetix VPL/VPF/VPH) servo motors with W or -Q encoders
• Kinetix VPAR electric cylinders with
-W or -Q encoders
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
23
Chapter 1
Start
Catalog Number Explanation ArmorKinetix System drive module catalog numbers and performance descriptions.
Table 4 - ArmorKinetix System Drive Module Catalog Numbers
ArmorKinetix
System Modules
Cat. No.
DC-bus Power Supply 2198-P031
2198-P070
(195…528V AC rms,
three-phase input
2198-P141
power)
2198-P208
PIM Module
2198-PIM070
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A0751E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A0752E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A0753C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A0753E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A1001C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A1002C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1003C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1003E-xx1xAx
DSM, 200V-class
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A1152B-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1152E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1153A-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1153C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-A1303A-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1303B-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1304A-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-A1306A-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B0751M-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B0752M-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B0753F-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B0753M-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B1001M-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B1002M-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1003F-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1003T-xx1xAx
DSM, 400V-class
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B1152F-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1152T-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1153E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1153F-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B1303C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1303F-xx1xAx
2198-DSM016-ERSx-B1304C-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1304E-xx1xAx
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B1306C-xx1xAx
2198-DSD016-ERSx
DSD
2198-DSD024-ERSx
Continuous Output
Current to Bus
ADC rms
Module
Width
mm
10.5
25.5
46.9
69.2
24
55
85
55
79.5
89.4
98.3
113.7
Continuous Output
Power
240V Input 480V Input
kW
kW
3.5
8.5
15.5
23.0
8
0.38
0.63
0.59
0.67
0.51
1.03
0.87
1.31
0.98
1.41
0.93
1.32
0.94
1.37
1.55
1.44
—
—
79.5
—
89.4
—
98.3
—
113.7
—
79.5
1.8
2.75
(1) Peak duration is 100 ms on and 900 ms off.
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
7
17
31
46
16
—
—
—
—
0.54
0.81
0.65
0.78
1.02
1.86
1.65
1.77
1.40
2.16
1.75
2.20
1.83
2.68
1.75
2.71
2.25
3.6
5.5
Output Current
Rated Continuous
A 0…pk
Peak(1)
A 0…pk
—
—
—
—
—
2.90
4.80
4.01
5.50
3.31
6.24
5.95
9.12
5.94
10.10
5.83
8.11
5.81
8.78
8.72
9.72
2.70
4.81
3.75
5.64
3.37
6.12
5.79
8.62
5.93
10.41
5.83
7.86
5.89
8.78
6.67
8.26
9.72
7.5
11.3
—
9.12
17.61
18.60
21.50
10.38
20.33
20.20
27.40
21.19
30.80
21.33
29.36
31.00
29.50
29.87
29.70
9.12
18.90
18.90
21.09
10.38
20.33
20.20
23.94
21.19
29.70
21.33
30.16
18.04
29.50
22.07
28.65
29.70
22.6
33.8
Chapter 1
Start
Table 5 - Shared-bus Connector Kit Catalog Numbers for ArmorKinetix
Shared-bus Connector Kits
Cat. No.
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36 (1) (2)
2198T-W25K-P-IN (1) (2)
2198-H040-D-T
2198-H040-P-T
2198-H070-P-T
2198-S160-P-T
2198T-W25K-P-T
2198-S312-P-T
Drive Module
Cat. No.
2198-P031, 2198-P070, 2198-P141, 2198-P208
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198T-W25K-ER, 2198-RP263, 2198-RP312,
2198-S263-ERSx, 2198-S312-ERSx
2198-PIM070
2198-D006-ERSx, 2198-D012-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx, 2198-D032-ERSx
2198-CAPMOD-2240, 2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
2198-D057-ERSx, 2198-S086-ERSx, 2198-S130-ERSx
2198-S160-ERSx
2198T-W25K-ER
2198-S263-ERSx, 2198-S312-ERSx
Application
Description
24V DC input power to control bus
24V DC input wiring connector
Control power sharing
Control power T-connector
Control power sharing
Control power T-connector with bus bars, 55 mm
Control power sharing
Control power T-connector with bus bars, 85 mm
Control power sharing
Control power T-connector with bus bars, 100 mm
Control power sharing
Control power T-connector with bus bars, 220 mm
(1) The input wiring connector can be inserted into any drive module (mid-stream in the drive system) to begin a new 24V control bus when the maximum current value is reached. However, the input
connector must always extend the 24V DC-bus from left to right. The 2198T-W25K-P-IN male plug is physically larger than the male plug on 2198-TCON-24VDCIN36.
(2) For module amp ratings and connector wire size information, see 24V DC Control Power Input Connector on page 57, and CP Connector Plug Wiring Specifications table on page 76, respectively.
Catalog Numbers - ArmorKinetix DSD Modules
2198 - DSDxxx - ERSx
Safety Level
ERS2 = Network STO, Timed SS1
ERS5 = Network STO, Timed SS1, and Safe Speed Monitoring
Drive Module
016 = 16 A rms peak
024 = 24 A rms peak
Bulletin
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
25
Chapter 1
Start
Catalog Numbers - ArmorKinetix DSM Modules
2198 - DSMxxx - ERSx - B 075 1 A- C J 1 1 A A
Factory Options
A = Standard
S = Shaft seal
Mounting Flange
A = IEC metric, free mounting holes (type FF)
Brake
2 = No brake
4 = 24V DC Brake
Connector
1 = Single SpeedTec DIN connector, right angle, 325 deg rotatable)
Shaft Key
J = Shaft key
K = Smooth shaft
Feedback
C = 18-bit absolute single-turn digital encoder
P = 18-bit absolute multi-turn digital encoder (Hiperface DSL protocol)
W = 18-bit absolute multi-turn digital encoder (Hiperface DSL protocol) SIL 2 (PLd) rated, 9-bit secondary safety
channel (2)
T = 24-bit absolute multi-turn digital encoder (Hiperface DSL protocol) SIL 2 (PLd) rated, 13-bit secondary safety
channel (2)
Rated Speed - rpm
A = 1500, B = 2000, C = 2500, D = 3000,
E = 3500, F = 4500, M = 6000, T = 6750, U = 8000
Magnet Stack Length
1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 stacks
Frame Size
075 = 75 mm
100 = 100 mm
115 = 115 mm
130 = 130 mm
Voltage Class
A = 200V
B = 400V
Safety Level
ERS2 = Network STO, Timed SS1
ERS5 = Network STO, Timed SS1, and Safe Speed Monitoring
Drive Module
016 = 16 A rms peak
024 = 24 A rms peak
Bulletin
26
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 1
Agency Compliance
Start
If this product is installed within the European Union and has the CE mark, or within the United
Kingdom and has the UKCA mark, the following regulations apply.
ATTENTION: Meeting CE and UK requires a grounded system, and the method
of grounding the AC line filter and drive module must match. Failure to do this
renders the filter ineffective and can cause damage to the filter. For grounding
examples, refer to Grounded Power Configurations on page 72.
For more information on electrical noise reduction, refer to the System Design for Control of
Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
To meet CE and UK requirements, these requirements apply:
• Install an AC line filter (catalog number 2198-DBRxx-F) for input power with 50 mm (1.97 in.)
minimum clearance between the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply. Minimize the cable length
as much as possible.
• Bond DC-bus power supplies, PIM modules, inverter modules, capacitor modules, and line
filter grounding screws by using a braided ground strap as shown in Figure 44 on page 75.
• When using the 2198-P070 DC-bus power supply above 45 °C (113 °F) with stranded input
power wiring, conductors must be single-core 6 mm2 stranded copper with 90 °C minimum
rating.
• Use Kinetix 2090 single motor cables with Kinetix VP motors and actuators. Use Kinetix 2090
motor power/brake and feedback cables for other compatible Allen-Bradley motors and
actuators. Motor cable shield-clamp on the drive must be used.
• Combined motor power cable length for all axes on the same DC bus must not exceed:
- 1200 m (3937 ft) for 2198-P031, 2198-P070, 2198-P141, and 2198-P208, DC-bus power
supplies when paired with 2198-DBRxx-F line filters.
• PIM module to last DSx module must not exceed:
- 140 m (459 ft)
• DSD module to motor cables must not exceed:
- 4 m (13 ft).
• Install the ArmorKinetix System PIM module inside an approved enclosure.
• Segregate input power wiring from control wiring and motor cables.
Refer to Appendix A on page 169 for input power wiring and drive/motor interconnect diagrams.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
27
Chapter 1
Start
Notes:
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
2
Installation Guidelines
System Design Guidelines
Use the information in this section when planning to mount your system components on the panel.
For on-line product selection and system configuration tools, including AutoCAD (DXF) drawings of
the product, refer to rok.auto/systemtools.
Cable Length Restrictions and System Sizing
This section provides guidelines for sizing an ArmorKinetix® system. For accurate, detailed sizing,
use FactoryTalk® Motion Analyzer™ software (version 2.000 or later) rok.auto/motion-analyzer. For
more information and a sizing estimation method, refer to Size Multi-axis Shared-bus
Configurations on page 189.
When sizing your system, note the following:
• Maximum cable length between the PIM module and a DSx module is 50 m (164 ft).
• Maximum cable length between DSx modules is 30 m (98 ft).
• Maximum cable length (motor power and feedback) between a DSD module and a motor is 4
m (13 ft).
• Combined cable length for all ArmorKinetix modules that are connected to one PIM module
is 140 m (459 ft).
The following items limit the number of ArmorKinetix modules that can be used in a system.
1. The control power load, which consists of these load sources:
- Internal load (constant)
- Parking brake load
2. The continuous and intermittent load on the DC bus of all modules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
29
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
PIM Module Guidelines
Mounting
•
•
•
•
To comply with UL, CE, and UK requirements, the ArmorKinetix power interface module (PIM)
must be part of a Kinetix 5700 system that is enclosed in a grounded conductive enclosure
rated IP20 minimum protection as defined in EN/IEC 60529 such that it is not accessible to
an operator or unskilled person. The Kinetix 5700 system enclosure provides UL Type 1 and
IP66 protection.
The panel installed inside the enclosure for mounting the system components must be on a
flat, rigid, vertical surface that is not subjected to shock, vibration, moisture, oil mist, dust, or
corrosive vapors.
Size the enclosure so as not to exceed the maximum ambient temperature rating. Consider
heat dissipation specifications for all components.
Use high-frequency (HF) bonding techniques to connect the modules, enclosure, machine
frame, and motor housing, and to provide a low-impedance return path for high-frequency
(HF) energy and reduce electrical noise.
See the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001, to
better understand the concept of electrical noise reduction.
Fuses
The 2198-PIM070 module uses internal fuses (see Figure 10) for short-circuit protection of the DC
bus. The recommended fuse is Bussmann FWP-50A14Fa.
Figure 10 - PIM Fuse Location
Fuse Cover
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Enclosure Selection
Heat dissipation of the PIM module is shown in and Table 6. To size the enclosure you need heat
dissipation data from all equipment inside the enclosure (such as the Logix controller, PIM module,
and other Kinetix 5700 modules). Once the total amount of heat dissipation (in watts) is known, you
can calculate the minimum enclosure size.
Table 6 - Power Dissipation Specifications - Percent of PIM Module Control Power
Control Power Input
Input Voltage
DC
24V
Power Dissipation as % of PIM Module Control
Power Output Rating
Watts(1)
20%
40%
60%
80%
100%
10
15
19
24
29
Heat Dissipation Formulas (2)
Y = 23.5x + 5.3
(1) Power output rating of 100% is 4 A at 58V output (applicable when 3-phase is not present).
(2) x is percent of PIM module control power output rating: any value from 0.0…1.0.
Minimum Clearance
This section provides information to assist you in sizing your cabinet and positioning your
ArmorKinetix PIM module:
• Additional clearance is required for cables and wires or the shared-bus connection system
connected to the top of the drive.
• Additional clearance is required if other devices are installed above and/or below the drive
and have clearance requirements of their own.
• Additional clearance left and right of the drive is required when mounted adjacent to noise
sensitive equipment or clean wire ways.
• The recommended minimum cabinet depth is 300 mm (11.81 in.).
Clearance above module.
2198-PIM070
PIM
(front view)
Clearance left
and right of the
drive is not
required.
Drive
Cat. No.
Clearance
Above
mm (in.)
Clearance
Below
mm (in.)
2198-PIM070
40 (1.57)
40 (1.57)
See the Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives
Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD003, for
ArmorKinetix PIM module dimensions.
Clearance below module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
31
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Distributed Servo Drive and Distributed Servo Motor Module Guidelines
The DSx module can mount in any orientation without derating. DSx module installation must
comply with all local regulations and use of equipment and installation practices that promote
safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
All DSx modules include a mounting pilot for aligning the module on a machine. Recommended
mounting screws are stainless steel, size M5. Tighten the mounting screws to 6.4 N•m (57 lb•in).
ATTENTION: Unmounted motors, disconnected mechanical couplings, loose shaft
keys, and disconnected cables are dangerous if power is applied. Identify (tagout) disassembled equipment and restrict access to (lock-out) the electrical
power.
Before applying power to the motor, remove the shaft key and other mechanical
couplings that could be thrown from the shaft.
ATTENTION: Verify that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven
tension or flexing at the connector. Provide support at 3 m (10 ft) intervals
throughout the cable run.
Excessive and uneven lateral force at the cable connector can result in the
connector’s environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes.
BURN HAZARD: Outer surfaces of the DSD module can reach high temperatures,
80 °C (176 °F), during operation.
Outer surfaces of the DSM module can reach high temperatures, 125 °C (275 °F),
during motor operation.
Take precautions to prevent accidental contact with hot surfaces. Consider
module surface temperature when selecting motor mating connections and
cables.
Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in personal injury or
damage to equipment.
Additionally, consider the following items:
• Obtain the specified DSM thermal rating by mounting the module on a surface with heat
dissipation equivalent to a aluminum heatsink of the following size:
- For DSM modules of frame size 100…130: 304.8 x 304.8 x 12.7 mm (12 x 12 x 0.5 in.)
- For DSM modules of frame size 75: 254 x 254 x 6.25 mm (10 x 10 x 0.25 in.)
• Do not install the motor with DSD module or DSM module in an area with restricted airflow,
and keep other devices that produce heat away from the motor.
Accessory Module Selection
These are the requirements for accessory modules.
Table 7 - Introduction to ArmorKinetix Accessory Modules
Accessory Module
Cat. No.
Accessory Module
Description
2198T-W25K-P-T
Control power T-connector
2198-BARCON-55DC200
DC-bus link, 55 mm, 208 A
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
Extension Module
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
DC-bus Conditioner Module
Use the shared-bus connection system to extend AC input power, 24V control power, and DC-bus power from driveto-drive in shared-bus multi-axis configurations.
DC-bus link kits are used to extend DC-bus power from drive-to-drive in DC-bus multi-axis configurations. DC-bus
links are rated for 208 A, maximum bus-bar current.
Use for energy storage and to extend the DC-bus voltage to another inverter cluster. Modules are zero-stacked with
servo drives and use the shared-bus connection system to extend the external DC-bus voltage in applications up to
104 A. Can parallel with itself or with another accessory module for up to 208 A.
The extension module, paired with a capacitor module or DC-bus conditioner module, is used to extend the DC-bus
voltage to another inverter cluster in systems with ≥104 A current and up to 208 A.
Decreases the voltage stress on insulation components in an inverter system with long cable lengths and used to
extend the DC-bus voltage to another inverter cluster. Modules are zero-stacked with servo drives and use the
shared-bus connection system to extend the external DC-bus voltage in applications up to 104 A. Can parallel with
itself or with another accessory module for applications up to 208 A.
32
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
On the following pages (by power supply) are system configurations showing which accessory
modules are required. The examples account for single (power supply) clusters, extended clusters,
maximum system current, the input-power ground configuration, and total motor-cable length.
DC-bus Power Supply Systems
The following system configurations illustrate the minimum number of accessory modules
required.
Figure 11 - DC-bus Power Supply Example/Extended Cluster (104 A, max)
DC-Bus
Power Supply
Single-axis Power Interface
Inverters
Module
Capacitor
Module
Capacitor Module
Dual-axis
Inverters
PIM
2198-PIM070
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-PIM070
2198-PIM070
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
DC Bus
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
2198-Pxxx
DC Bus
Single-axis
Inverters
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
This example includes:
• 3 Secondary Bus groups
• 2 Drive clusters
Figure 12 - DC-bus Power Supply Example/Multiple Capacitor Modules
Single-axis Power Interface Capacitor Module
Inverters
Module
Capacitor
Module
IMPORTANT
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-PIM070
2198-PIM070
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
DC Bus
2198-Pxxx
This example includes:
• 2 Secondary Bus groups
• 1 Drive cluster
DC-Bus
Power Supply
In both of these examples, the Kinetix 5700 drive system with ArmorKinetix
PIM module includes two accessory modules per cluster. Flexible bus bars
are included with only the 2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO extension module. So, if
you have two capacitor modules, two DC-bus conditioner modules, or a
capacitor module and DC-bus conditioner module mounted side by side, you
must order the 2198-KITCON-CAPMOD2240 or 2198-KITCON-DCBUSCOND
connector set separately.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
33
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Figure 13 - Multiple DC-bus Power Supply Example/Extended Cluster (208 A, max)
DC-Bus
Power Supply
DC-Bus Power Interface Dual-axis
Power Supply
Module
Inverters
Capacitor
Module
Extension
Module
Capacitor
Module
Single-axis
Inverters
Dual-axis
Inverters
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
2198-Sxxx-ERSx
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
2198-PIM070
2198-PIM070
2198-P208
2198-P208
2198-CAPMOD-2240
DC Bus
DC Bus
2198-P208
Extension
Module
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
DC-Bus
Power Supply
This example includes:
• 2 Secondary Bus groups
• 2 Drive clusters
In-cabinet Electrical Noise
Reduction
IMPORTANT
The systems that are shown are typical. The maximum number of inverter
modules depends on the maximum system capacitance precharge
capability of the power supply. With multiple 2198-P208 modules, there is
more precharge capability. When there are two or three DC-bus power
supplies, they must be catalog number 2198-P208.
Refer to Appendix B on page 189 for more system sizing information.
IMPORTANT
The regenerative bus supply is not compatible with the ArmorKinetix
system.
See the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002, for information on best
practices that minimuze the possibility of noise-related failures as they apply specifically to
Kinetix 5700 and ArmorKinetix system installations. For more information on the concept of highfrequency (HF) bonding, the ground plane principle, and electrical noise reduction, refer to the
System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
HF Bond for Modules
Bonding is the practice of connecting metal chassis, assemblies, frames, shields, and enclosures to
reduce the effects of electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Unless specified, most paints are not conductive and act as insulators. To achieve a good bond
between the in-cabinet drive module and subpanel, surfaces need to be paint-free or plated.
Bonding metal surfaces creates a low-impedance return path for high-frequency energy.
IMPORTANT
To improve the bond between the in-cabinet module and subpanel,
construct your subpanel out of zinc plated (paint-free) steel.
Improper bonding of metal surfaces blocks the direct return path and allows high-frequency
energy to travel elsewhere in the cabinet. Excessive high-frequency energy can effect the
operation of other microprocessor controlled equipment.
These illustrations show details of recommended bonding practices for painted panels, enclosures,
and mounting brackets.
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Figure 14 - Recommended Bonding Practices for Painted Panels
Stud-mounting the Subpanel
to the Enclosure Back Wall
Stud-mounting a Ground Bus
or Chassis to the Subpanel
Subpanel
Back Wall of
Enclosure
Mounting Bracket or
Ground Bus
Subpanel
Star Washer
Nut
Welded Stud
Scrape Paint
Flat Washer
Welded Stud
Nut
Flat Washer
Use a wire brush to remove paint from
threads to maximize ground connection.
Use plated panels or scrape paint on
front of panel.
If the mounting bracket is coated with a
non-conductive material (anodized or
painted), scrape the material around the
mounting hole.
Star Washer
Bolt-mounting a Ground Bus or Chassis to the Back-panel
Subpanel
Bolt
Tapped Hole
Ground Bus or
Mounting Bracket
Nut
Star Washer
Scrape paint on both sides of
panel and use star washers.
Star Washer
Flat Washer
Nut
Flat Washer
Star Washer
If the mounting bracket is coated with a
non-conductive material (anodized or
painted), scrape the material around the
mounting hole.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
35
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
HF Bond for Multiple Subpanels
Bonding multiple subpanels creates a common low impedance exit path for the high-frequency
energy inside the cabinet. Subpanels that are not bonded together do not necessarily share a
common low impedance path. This difference in impedance can affect networks and other devices
that span multiple panels:
• Bond the top and bottom of each subpanel to the cabinet by using 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by
6.35 mm (0.25 in.) wire braid. As a rule, the wider and shorter the braid is, the better the
bond.
• Scrape the paint from around each fastener to maximize metal-to-metal contact.
Figure 15 - Multiple Subpanels and Cabinet Recommendation
Wire Braid
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by
6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
Cabinet ground bus
bonded to the subpanel.
Paint removed
from cabinet.
36
Wire Braid
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by
6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Establish Noise Zones
The Kinetix 5700 DC-bus system power can be supplied by the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply.
Observe these guidelines when routing cables used with the ArmorKinetix PIM module:
• The clean zone (C) is right of the drive system and includes the digital inputs wiring and
Ethernet cable (gray wireway).
Figure 16 - Noise Zones (DC-bus power supply)
Clean Wireway
Dirty Wireway
(1)
D
24V DC
Power Supply
Safety Cable
(hardwired drives only)
MOD
NET
D
Circuit
Protection
C
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System with ArmorKinetix PIM Module
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
VD
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Very Dirty Filter/AC Input
Connections Segregated
(not in wireway)
1
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
C
1
6 1
6
4
I/O
5
50 mm
(1.97 in.)
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
UFB-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
UFB-B
MF-A
MF-B
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
(1)
Module
Status
Contactor Enable
D
D
C
Route motor cables
in shielded cable.
Motor Cables (2)
Route registration and communication
signals in shielded cables.
(1) When space to the right of the module does not permit 150 mm (6.0 in.) segregation, use a grounded steel shield instead. For
examples, refer to the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
(2) When the 2198-H2DCK feedback converter kit or 2198-K57CK-D15M universal feedback kit is used, feedback cable routes in the
clean wireway.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
37
Chapter 2
Installation Guidelines
Cable Categories for ArmorKinetix Systems
These tables indicate the best zone for running cables and wires. The tables also show how the use
of ferrite sleeves and shielded cable can reduce the noise effects of dirty and very-dirty wires and
cables.
Table 8 - DC-bus Power Supply
Wire/Cable
Power Supply
Cat. No.
Connector
L1, L2, L3 (shielded cable)
L1, L2, L3 (unshielded cable)
DC-/DC+ (DC bus)
DC+/SH (passive shunt)
CONT EN– and CONT EN+ (M1 contactor)
24V DC
Dedicated digital inputs
2198-Pxxx
IPD
2198-Pxxx
2198-Pxxx
2198-Pxxx
2198-Pxxx
2198-Pxxx
Ethernet (shielded cable)
2198-Pxxx
DC
RC
CED
CP
IOD
PORT1
PORT2
Zone
Very Dirty
Dirty
Clean
—
X
—
X
—
—
Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
Method
Ferrite Sleeve
Shielded Cable
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
Table 9 - PIM Modules
Wire/Cable
Connector
DC-/DC+ (DC bus)
24V DC
Hybrid cable from PIM to DSx
Registration input
Dedicated digital inputs (other than registration inputs)
DC
CP
PC
Ethernet (shielded cable)
PORT1
PORT2
IOD
Very Dirty
—
—
—
—
—
Zone
Method
Dirty
Clean
Ferrite Sleeve
Shielded Cable
Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
X
—
X
X
—
—
—
—
X
—
X
Table 10 - Capacitor Module or DC-bus Conditioner Module
Wire/Cable
Connector
DC-/DC+ (DC bus)
DC-/DC+
24V DC
Module status
DC
M8 Stud
CP
MS
Zone
Very Dirty
Dirty
Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
—
X
—
X
—
X
Clean
Method
Ferrite Sleeve
Shielded Cable
—
—
—
—
—
—
Clean
Ferrite Sleeve
—
—
—
—
—
Table 11 - Extension Module
Wire/Cable
Connector
DC-/DC+ (DC bus)
DC-/DC+
DC
M8 Stud
38
Zone
Very Dirty
Dirty
Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
—
X
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Method
Shielded Cable
—
Chapter
3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
This chapter provides installation procedures for mounting your ArmorKinetix® PIM module to the
system panel and installing DC-bus links and 24V shared-bus connector kits to the module.
Installation information is also provided for mounting the ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM modules.
This procedure assumes that you have prepared your panel and understand how to bond your
system. For installation instructions regarding equipment and accessories not included here, refer
to the instructions that came with those products.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting
and wiring of the ArmorKinetix system before applying power. Once power is
applied, connector terminals can have voltage present even when not in use.
ATTENTION: Plan the installation of your system so that you can perform all
cutting, drilling, tapping, and welding with the system removed from the
enclosure. Because the system is of the open type construction, be careful to
keep metal debris from falling into it. Metal debris or other foreign matter can
become lodged in the circuitry and result in damage to the components.
In-cabinet Modules
The ArmorKinetix PIM, Kinetix® 5700 DFE module, and an optional capacitor module are mounted in
the enclosure.
Determine Mounting Order
Mount the DC-bus power supply on the far right or far left, whichever makes the best use of panel
space. See Figure 17 for an example.
IMPORTANT
The PIM module can be placed anywhere left or right from the power
supply. We recommend that you mount inverter modules according to
power rating (highest to lowest) from left to right (or right to left) starting
with the highest power rating.
Table 12 - ArmorKinetix System Single-axis Inverter Modules
Attribute
Continuous Power
Output, nom (200V)
Continuous Power
Output, nom (400V)
2198-PIM
2198-DSD016-ERSx
2198-DSD024-ERSx
8.0 kW
1.8 kW
2.7 kW
16.0 kW
3.5 kW
5.5 kW
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
39
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 17 - System Mounting Order Example (single DC-bus power supply)
2198-S086-ERSx
Single-axis Inverter
2198-D012-ERSx
Dual-axis Inverter
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
2198-D006-ERSx
Dual-axis Inverter
Shared-bus Connection Systems
(DC-bus and 24V DC)
2198-P141
DC-bus Power Supply
IMPORTANT
The maximum number of inverter modules depends on the maximum
system capacitance precharge capability of the power supplies and the
total system capacitance. When there are two or three DC-bus power
supplies, they must be catalog number 2198-P208.
Refer to Appendix B on page 189 for more system sizing information.
Figure 18 - System Mounting Order Example (multiple DC-bus power supplies)
2198-S086-ERSx
Single-axis Inverter
2198-D012-ERSx
Dual-axis Inverter
2198-D006-ERSx
Dual-axis Inverter
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supplies (1)
Shared-bus Connection Systems
(DC-bus and 24V DC)
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I/O
1
I/O
2
2
1
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
I/O
5
UFB
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
-
MBRK
+
(1) The DC-bus power supplies can be left or right of the inverters.
40
MOD
NET
4
4
4
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
MF-B
Chapter 3
IMPORTANT
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
The maximum number of in-cabinet inverter modules depends on the
maximum system capacitance precharge capability of the power supply
and the total system capacitance.
Refer to Appendix B on page 189 for more system sizing information.
Mount Capacitor Modules
Mount the 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module on the far right or far left of any system cluster,
depending on the input power configuration. A capacitor module is required in the following
situations:
• Required in each cluster of a multi-cluster system
• More than one capacitor module can be used in a cluster, if needed
IMPORTANT
Each additional capacitor module adds to the total system capacitance and
increased energy storage.
The 2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO extension module is always mounted next to a capacitor module or
DC-bus conditioner module and always positioned on the outside of the system cluster (either first
or last). The extension module can be paired with another accessory module and flexible bus-bars
if external DC-bus current is ≥104 A up to a maximum of 208 A.
IMPORTANT
When the extension module is mounted next to another accessory module,
they must be connected by flexible bus-bars.
Figure 19 - Flexible Bus Bar Example
External DC-bus
Wire Lug Connections
Flexible Bus-bars
DC-bus Link
Connections
DC-bus Links
1
2198-xxxx-ERSx
Inverters or
2198-PIM070
IMPORTANT
9
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
8
16
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
Extension Module
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
DC-bus Conditioner Module
In a multi-cluster system with a power supply rated ≥104 A, two accessory
modules connected by flexible bus-bars must be used to create a 208 A
extended cluster system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
41
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Zero-stack Tab and Cutout
Engaging the zero-stack tab and cutout from one drive module to another makes efficient use of
panel space, especially for high axis-count installations.
IMPORTANT
Engaging the zero-stack tab and cutout from module-to-module is
required for any input power configuration. This is done to make sure that
the DC-bus connectors are spaced properly to accept the shared-bus
connection system.
Figure 20 - Zero-stack Tab and Cutout Example
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
Kinetix 5700 Drive Modules
(front view)
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
For ArmorKinetix system sizing examples, refer to Appendix B on page 189.
Drill-hole Patterns for In-cabinet Modules
This section provides drill-hole patterns for Kinetix 5700 drive modules that are mounted in zerostack (shared-bus) configurations. Properly spaced drill-holes are essential for engaging the zerostack tab and cutout from module-to-module so that the DC-bus connectors are spaced properly
to accept the DC-bus links.
The DC-bus power supply can be mounted on the far right, far left, or anywhere in between.
However, the far left position is preferred to accommodate the 24V shared bus.
Also available to assist you in mounting PIM modules is the 2198-K5700-MOUNTKIT system
mounting toolkit.
Use Figure 21 to calculate the left-to-right hole pattern for Kinetix 5700 drive system configurations
that include the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply and PIM modules.
1. The first hole location is zero.
2. The second hole location is module width minus 55 mm (2.16 in.).
3. The next hole location is 55 mm (2.16 in.).
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for the remaining holes.
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 21 - DC-bus Power Supply Mounting Hole Patterns
27.5 mm
45.0 mm See Mounting Hole Pattern Calculations
First Mounting Hole
(typical) Upper and Lower
Mounting Hole
(all drive modules)
45.0 mm See Mounting Hole Pattern Calculations
30.0 mm See Mounting Hole Pattern Calculations
Ø 6.0 mm Typical
00.0 mm
Upper Mounting Holes
Module Top, reference
32.0 mm
Module Top, reference
55 mm
Wide Module
Applies to only
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IN
Extension Module
176 mm
Lower Mounting Hole
100 mm
Wide Module
100 mm
Wide Module
85 mm
Wide Module
55 mm
Wide Module
Applies to 2198-P031 and 2198-P070 Power Supplies
2198-D006-ERSx, 2198-D012-ERSx,
2198-D020-ERSx, and 2198-D032-ERSx, Inverters
2198-CAPMOD-2240 Capacitor Module
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312 DC-bus Conditioner Module
2198-PIM070 Power Interface Module
345 mm
Lower Mounting Hole
Applies to 2198-P141, 2198-P208 Power Supplies
2198-S086-ERSx and 2198-S130-ERSx Inverters,
and 2198-D057-ERSx Inverters
420 mm
Lower Mounting Hole
465 mm
Lower Mounting Hole
Ø 6.0 mm
Typical
Applies to only 2198T-W25K-ER
iTRAK Power Supply
Applies to only 2198-S160-ERSx
Single-axis Inverter
IMPORTANT
Hole spacing is measured in millimeters and not converted to inches to
avoid errors due to rounding.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
43
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Drill-hole Patterns by Using the System Mounting Toolkit
The mounting bar must be mounted horizontally on the system panel. The drill-hole guide inserts
behind the mounting bar and slides left and right. Holes and slots in the drill-hole guide let you
establish the location of each ArmorKinetix PIM module.
Figure 22 - Mounting Bar
100
100
Dimensions are in mm (in.)
Drill-hole Guide
M4 thread-forming fasteners,
1.7 N•m (15 lb•in)
Mounting Bar
3x Ø4.50 (0.18)
43.2 (1.70) Ref
10 (0.39)
2x 190 (7.48)
2x 10 (0.39)
400 (15.75)
For step-by-step instructions on how to use the system mounting toolkit, see the Kinetix 5700
System Mounting Toolkit Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN012.
Mount the In-cabinet Modules
This procedure assumes that you have prepared your panel and understand how to bond your
system. For installation instructions regarding Kinetix 5700 units, see publication 2198-UM002. For
other equipment and accessories, refer to the instructions that came with those products.
Follow these steps to mount your ArmorKinetix PIM modules to the panel.
1. Lay out the hole pattern for each module in the enclosure.
See Establish Noise Zones on page 37 for panel layout recommendations.
IMPORTANT
To improve the bond between the drive modules and subpanel,
construct your subpanel out of zinc plated (paint-free) steel.
2. Drill holes in the panel for mounting your drive system.
Refer to Drill-hole Patterns for In-cabinet Modules beginning on page 42.
3. Loosely attach the mounting hardware to the panel.
The recommended mounting hardware is M5 (#10-32) steel bolts. Observe bonding
techniques as described in HF Bond for Modules on page 34.
4. Attach the DC-bus supply (or supplies) or the regenerative bus supply to the cabinet panel.
1
Top Screws
(bottom screws not shown)
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
44
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Kinetix 5700 Drive System
with ArmorKinetix PIM.
2
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
5. Attach additional drive modules to the right or left of the previous module by using the same
method, but also making sure that the zero-stack tabs and cutouts are engaged.
Zero-stack mounting is required for all configurations. See the Zero-stack Tab and Cutout
Example on page 42.
6. Tighten all mounting fasteners.
Apply 4.0 N•m (35.4 lb•in) maximum torque to each fastener.
Install Shared-bus
Connection Systems
The shared-bus connection system is used to extend the DC-bus power and 24V control power
from one drive module to another.
IMPORTANT
The zero-stack tab and cutout must be engaged between adjacent drive
modules for the shared-bus connection system to fit properly.
DC-bus Connection System
The DC-bus connection system is required and comprised of these two components:
• DC-bus links that are inserted between drive modules to extend the DC-bus from one drive
module to another.
IMPORTANT
•
DC-bus links are included with inverter and accessory modules, so
when two or three 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies are connected
in parallel, order extra 2198-BARCON-85DC200 DC-bus links.
DC-bus end-caps that are inserted into the first and last drive modules to cover the exposed
DC-bus connector on both ends of the bus.
Figure 23 - DC-bus Connector Example
DC-bus Link, 85 mm
DC-bus Link, 100 mm
(seated)
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
End Caps (2)
DC-bus Link, 55 mm
Align the DC-bus link
lower pivots with the latches
and push downward until
they latch.
Upper Pivot
Lower Pivot
Kinetix 5700 Drive System
Latch
DC-bus power supply is mounted
leftmost followed by drive with
largest amp rating.
DC Link Latched (1)
PIM Module, 55 mm
DC-bus Power Supply
Single Axis Inverter, 85 mm
Single Axis Inverter, 100 mm
(1) DC-bus links latch on both sides when inserted into the DC-bus connectors. To remove the DC-bus link, depress both sets of upper
pivots to unlatch the lower pivots and hold the DC-bus link firmly while pulling upward.
24V Input Power Connection System
The optional 24V input power connection system always feeds 24V DC from left to right and is
comprised of three components:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
45
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
•
•
•
The 24V input wiring connector that plugs into the DC-bus power supply or first module
supplied by the 24V external power receives 24V DC input wiring.
24V DC T-connectors that plug into the drive modules downstream from the power supply
or first module supplied by the 24V external power where the 24V control power is shared.
Bus bars that connect between drive modules to extend the 24V control power from one
drive module to another.
Multiple 24V shared-bus input wiring connectors can be used in a high axis-count system. If the
40 A shared-bus current rating is exceeded, you can add another connector at any point in the
cluster. PIM modules use the 2198-TCON-24VDCIN36 input wiring connector and accept up to
10 mm2 (6 AWG) wire. The CP connectors that are included with each module accept up to 10 mm2
(12 AWG) or 6 mm2 (10 AWG), so the shared-bus input wiring connectors can provide the means to
use larger gauge conductors for reduced voltage drop on long wire runs.
Figure 24 - 24V Connector Example
Bus-bar
Connectors
24V Input Wiring
100 mm
Bus-bar
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
85 mm
Bus-bar
55 mm
Bus-bar
24V
T-connectors
24V Input Wiring
Connector
Kinetix 5700 Drive System
DC-bus power supply is mounted
leftmost followed by drive with
largest amp rating.
The three 24V input power components must assemble from left to right across the drive system.
1. Attach wiring to 24V input wiring connector.
2. Insert input wiring connector and T-connectors into the appropriate drive module
connectors.
3. Insert bus-bars to connect between wiring connector and T-connectors.
IMPORTANT
The input wiring connector can be inserted into any drive module (midstream in the drive system) to begin a new 24V control bus when the
maximum current value is reached. However, the input connector must
always extend the 24V DC-bus from left to right.
IMPORTANT
Mount the 24V power supply as close to the drive system as possible to
minimize voltage drop on the 24V input power wiring.
If the maximum current rating exceeds 40 A, the configurations requires more than one 24V input
wiring connector:
In this example, one 24V connection system spans (left to right) across the PIM module and dualaxis inverters only. In the other 24V input connection system, the 2198-S312-P-T control power Tconnector and bus-bar connects the bus supply and single-axis inverter only.
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 25 - Multiple 24V Input Wiring Connector Example
SH
SH
DC+
DC+
ArmorKinetix System Servo
Drive System (top view)
Shared DC-bus Power
First 24V Input
Wiring Connector
1
9
1
9
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
8
1
16
8
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
16
16
8
ArmorKinetix
PIM Dual-axis Inverters
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control Power
(customer-supplied)
Second 24V Input
Wiring Connector
9
SB+/NC
S1A
SCA
S2A
SBNC
NC
NC
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supplies
Single-axis Inverter
Allen-Bradley
1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
Input
AC Input Power
2
1
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
I/O-A
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
I/O-B
6 1
I/O
6
10
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
MF-B
-
MBRK
+
ArmorKinetix System Servo Drive System
(front view)
W
V
U
21mm2 (4 AWG-250 kcmil)
15-20 Nm (132-177 lbin)
On-machine Modules
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to open or modify the ArmorKinetix DSx module. This
manual describes modifications that you can perform in the field. Do not attempt
other changes. Only a qualified Allen-Bradley® employee can service a DSx
module.
Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in personal injury or
damage to equipment.
ATTENTION: Damage can occur to the bearings and the feedback device if a
sharp impact is applied to the shaft during installation of couplings and pulleys, or
to remove the shaft key. Damage to the feedback device can also result from
applying leverage from the faceplate to remove devices mounted on the shaft.
Do not strike the shaft, key, couplings, or pulleys with tools during installation or
removal. Use a wheel puller to apply pressure from the user end of the shaft to
remove any friction fit or stuck device from the shaft.
Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in damage to the DSx
module.
ATTENTION: Unmounted DSx modules, disconnected mechanical couplings, loose
shaft keys, and disconnected cables are dangerous, if power is applied.
Disassembled equipment should be appropriately identified (tagged-out) and
access to electrical power restricted (locked-out).
Before applying power, remove the shaft key and other mechanical couplings that
could be thrown from the shaft.
Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in personal injury or
damage to equipment.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
47
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Preferred fasteners are stainless steel. The installation must comply with all local regulations. The
installer also must use equipment and installation practices that promote electromagnetic
compatibility and safety.
Precautions for Mounting ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM Modules
ATTENTION: Arcing or unexpected motion can occur if cables are connected or
disconnected while power is applied to the DSx module. Before working on the
system, disconnect power and wait the full time interval indicated on the PIM
module warning label or verify the DC bus voltage at the PIM module measures
less than 60V DC.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of
life, and damage to the product will occur.
ATTENTION: Do not strike the shaft, couplings, or pulleys with tools during
installation or removal.
Damage can occur to the motor bearings and the feedback device if you apply a
sharp impact to the shaft during installation of couplings and pulleys, or a shaft
key.
Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in damage to the motor
and its components.
ATTENTION: The DSx module is not for direct connection to an AC power line.
DSx modules are designed for connection to a PIM module that controls the
application of power.
Failure to observe these safety precautions could result in damage to the motor
and equipment.
Drill Hole Patterns for ArmorKinetix DSD Modules
This diagram shows the location of the mounting holes on the DSD module and the connector space
allowance.
IMPORTANT
48
The mounting template is not to scale. Dimensions are in mm (in.).
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 26 - DSD Mounting Template
425.3 (16.7)
Hybrid Connector Space
Allowance
DSD Motor Connector and
Feedback Connection Space
Allowance
32.0 (1.3)
DSD Module
414.3 (16.3)
4x Ø 6.0 (0.24)
169.0 (6.7)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
49
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Mount the DSD Module
ArmorKinetix DSD module installation must comply with all local regulations and use of equipment
and installation practices that promote safety and electromagnetic compatibility:
• All DSD modules include a mounting pilot holes for aligning the module on a machine.
• Recommended mounting screws are stainless steel, size M5.
Tighten the mounting screws to 6.4 N•m (57 lb•in).
Mount the DSD module on any surface and in any orientation.
ATTENTION: Unmounted motors, disconnected mechanical couplings, loose shaft
keys, and disconnected cables are dangerous if power is applied. Identify (tagout) disassembled equipment and restrict access to (lock-out) the electrical
power.
Before applying power to the motor, remove the shaft key and other mechanical
couplings that could be thrown from the shaft.
ATTENTION: Verify that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven
tension or flexing at the connector. Provide support at 3 m (10 ft) intervals
throughout the cable run.
Excessive and uneven lateral force at the cable connector can result in the
connector’s environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes.
ATTENTION: Connectors are designed to be rotated into a fixed position during
motor installation, and remain in that position without further adjustment. Strictly
limit the applied forces and the number of times the connector is rotated to make
sure that connectors meet the specified IP ratings.
Apply force only to the connector and cable plug. Do not apply force to the cable
extending from the cable plug. No tools, for example pliers or vise-grips, should
be used to assist with the rotation of the connector.
Failure to observe safety precautions could result in damage to the DSD module
and its components.
1. Position the DSD module on the machine in any position.
2. Properly mount and align the DSD module using stainless steel bolts.
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Drill Hole Patterns for ArmorKinetix DSM Modules
This diagram shows the location and size of the mounting holes on the DSM module.
Figure 27 - DSM Dimensions, 75 mm Frame Size
S Diameter Holes on
M Diameter Bolt Circle
H
D
Pilot Diameter Tolerances
75 mm Frame:
Ø 59.993…60.012
(2.3619…2.3627)
W
LB
L-LB
L
Table 13 - DSM Dimensions Table, 75 mm Frame Size
Cat. No.
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0751 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0751 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0752 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0752 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0753 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x0753 with brake
L mm (in.)
244.8 (9.64)
275.4 (10.84)
269.8 (10.62)
300.4 (11.83)
294.8 (11.61)
325.4 (12.81)
LB mm (in.)
221.8 (8.73)
252.4 (9.94)
246.8 (9.72)
277.4 (10.92)
271.8 (10.70)
302.4 (11.91)
L-LB mm (in.)
H mm (in.)
W mm (in.)
D mm (in.)
M mm (in.)
S mm (in.)
23.0 (0.91)
121.9 (4.80)
79.5 (3.13)
11.0 (0.43)
75.0 (2.953)
5.95 (0.23)
Figure 28 - DSM Dimensions, 100 mm Frame Size
S Diameter Holes on
M Diameter Bolt Circle
H
D
L-LB
Pilot Diameter Tolerances
VPL-A/B100xx Motors:
Ø 79.993…80.012
(3.1493…3.1501)
LB
W
L
Table 14 - DSM Dimensions Table, 100 mm Frame Size
STACK SIZE
L mm (in.)
LB mm (in.)
L-LB mm
(in.)
H mm (in.)
W mm (in.)
D mm (in.)
M mm (in.)
S mm (in.)
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1001 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1001 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1002 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1002 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1003 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1003 with brake
269.7 (10.62)
304.2 (11.98)
295.1 (11.62)
329.6 (12.98)
320.5 (12.62)
355.0 (13.98)
229.7 (9.04)
264.2 (10.40)
255.1 (10.04)
289.6 (11.40)
280.5 (11.04)
315.0 (12.40)
40.0 (1.57)
126.4 (4.98)
89.4 (3.52)
16.0 (0.63)
100.0
(3.937)
7.2 (0.28)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
51
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 29 - DSM Dimensions, 115 mm Frame Size
S Diameter Holes on
M Diameter Bolt Circle
H
D
L-LB
Pilot Diameter Tolerances
VPL-A/B115xx Motors:
Ø 94.991…95.013
(3.7398…3.7407)
W
LB
L
Table 15 - DSM Dimensions Table, 115 mm Frame Size
STACK SIZE
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1152 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1152 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1153 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1153 with brake
L mm (in.)
291.5 (11.48)
340.0 (13.39)
316.9 (12.48)
365.4 (14.39)
LB mm (in.)
251.5 (9.90)
300.0 (11.81)
276.9 (10.90)
325.4 (12.81)
L-LB mm (in.)
H mm (in.)
W mm (in.)
D mm (in.)
M mm (in.)
S mm (in.)
40.0 (1.57)
137.1 (5.40)
98.3 (3.87)
19.0 (0.75)
115.0
(4.528)
10.2 (0.40)
Figure 30 - DSM Dimensions, 130 mm Frame Size
S Diameter Holes on
M Diameter Bolt Circle
H
D
Pilot Diameter Tolerances
VPL-A/B130xx Motors:
Ø 109.991…110.013
(4.3303…4.3312)
LB
L-LB
W
L
Table 16 - DSM Dimensions Table, 130 mm Frame Size
STACK SIZE
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1303 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1303 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1304 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1304 with brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1306 without brake
2198-DSMxxx-ERSx-x1306 with brake
52
L mm (in.)
330.2 (13.00)
378.7 (14.91)
355.6 (14.00)
404.1 (15.91)
406.4 (16.00)
454.9 (17.91)
LB mm (in.)
280.2 (11.03)
328.7 (12.94)
305.6 (12.03)
354.1 (13.94)
356.4 (14.03)
404.9 (15.94)
L-LB mm (in.)
H mm (in.)
W mm (in.)
D mm (in.)
M mm (in.)
S mm (in.)
50.0 (1.97)
153.1 (6.03)
113.7 (4.48)
24.0 (0.94)
130.0
(5.118)
10.2 (0.40)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Mount the DSM Module
Motor installation must comply with all local regulations and use of equipment and installation
practices that promote safety and electromagnetic compatibility:
• All DSM modules include a mounting pilot for aligning the DSM module on a machine.
• Preferred fasteners are stainless steel.
ATTENTION: Unmounted DSM modules, disconnected mechanical couplings,
loose shaft keys, and disconnected cables are dangerous if power is applied.
Identify (tag-out) disassembled equipment and restrict access to (lock-out) the
electrical power.
Before applying power to the DSM modules, remove the shaft key and other
mechanical couplings that could be thrown from the shaft.
ATTENTION: Verify that cables are installed and restrained to prevent uneven
tension or flexing at the connector. Provide support at 3 m (10 ft) intervals
throughout the cable run.
Excessive and uneven lateral force at the cable connector can result in the
connector environmental seal opening and closing as the cable flexes.
Change Connector Orientation
DSM modules use a connector style that integrates the power, and feedback signals within a single
connector. You can rotate the connector 325°. The rotatable connector housing lets you move the
connector into a position that best protects the connection from environmental contaminates and
provides easy access.
ATTENTION: Connectors are designed to be rotated into a fixed position during
motor installation, and remain in that position without further adjustment. Strictly
limit the applied forces and the number of times the connector is rotated to make
sure that connectors meet the International Protection (IP) rating as outlined in
the Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data,
publication KNX-TD003.
ATTENTION: Excessive force can damage the connector. Do not pull on the cable
and do not use tools, such as pliers or vise-grips, to rotate the connector. Use
your hands to rotate the connector.
1.
Mount and fully seat a mating cable on the DSM module connector.
This provides a larger area to grasp and extends the leverage force.
2. Grasp the mated connector and cable plug with your hands and slowly rotate the DSM
module connector into the new position.
3. Remove the cable plug after the connector is aligned.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
53
Chapter 3
Mount the ArmorKinetix System
Install the DSM
ATTENTION: Damage can occur to the DSM module bearings and the feedback
device if sharp impact is applied to the shaft during installation of couplings and
pulleys. Damage to the feedback device can result from applying leverage to the
DSM module mounting face when removing devices mounted on the shaft.
Do not strike the shaft, couplings, or pulleys with tools during installation or
removal. Use a wheel puller, to apply pressure from the user end of the shaft,
when attempting to remove any device from the shaft.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Leave enough space around the DSM module so it can dissipate heat and stay within its
specified operating temperature range.
Determine the radial and axial shaft load limitations of your DSM module.
See Load Force Ratings in the Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives
Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD003.
Install the DSM module with the connector positioned in your preferred orientation.
Mount and align the DSM module.
Attach the cable.
a. Carefully align the cable connector with the DSM module connector.
The flat surface on the top of the motor connector and the flat surfaces on the cable
connector must align for the cable connector to mate with the DSM module connector.
When there is no hybrid cable or no connection to Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application available, DSM modules with a brake may require the release of the
brake prior to rotating the shaft so the DSM module aligns with the machine
mounts. See DSM Brake Override Input Specifications on page 64 for more
information.
ATTENTION: Keyed connectors must be properly aligned and handtightened.
Do not use tools, or apply excessive force, when mating the cable to the
motor connector. If the connectors do not go together with light hand
force, realign and try again.
b. Hand-tighten the knurled collar one-quarter turn to fully seat the cable connector.
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and
Feature Descriptions
Connectors and Indicators
This chapter illustrates connectors and indicators for the ArmorKinetix® system components (PIM,
DSD, and DSM modules), including the DC-bus power supply, and accessory modules. Also included
in this chapter are connector pinouts and descriptions for ArmorKinetix system modules.
Use these illustrations to identify the connectors and indicators for the ArmorKinetix modules.
Figure 31 - ArmorKinetix Power Interface Module (PIM) Features and Indicators
4
6
4
MOD
NET
5
7
8
3
9
10
2
DC+
1
13
DC-
24V24V+
14
11
11
ArmorKinetix PIM, Bottom View
ArmorKinetix PIM, Top View
12
ArmorKinetix PIM, Front View
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Digital inputs connector
Ethernet (PORT1) RJ45 connector
Ethernet (PORT2) RJ45 connector
Zero-stack mounting tab/cutout
Module status indicator
Network status indicator
LCD display
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Item
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Description
Navigation pushbuttons
Link speed status indicators
Link/Activity status indicators
Hybrid Cable Power Connector
Ground terminal
DC bus (DC) connector
24V control input power (CP) connector
55
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Figure 32 - ArmorKinetix Distributed Servo Drive Module (DSD) Features and Indicators
3
2
4
7
8
9
10
1
11
5
6
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Motor power and feedback connector
Hybrid cable input connector
IP Address rotary switches
Digital Input connector
Hybrid cable output connector
Motor feedback connector
Item
7
8
9
10
11
Description
MOD - module status indicator
Axis status indicator
Network status indicator
Link 2 status indicator
Link 1 status indicator
Figure 33 - ArmorKinetix Distributed Servo Motor Module (DSM) Features and Indicators
2
3
1
5
6
7
8
9
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
56
Description
Hybrid cable input connector
IP Address rotary switches
Digital Input Connector
Hybrid cable output connector
MOD - module status indicator
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Item
6
7
8
9
Description
Axis status indicator
Network status indicator
Link 2 status indicator
Link 1 status indicator
Chapter 4
Connectors Signal
Descriptions (PIM)
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Use these descriptions to identify the connectors and indicators for the ArmorKinetix PIM modules.
24V DC Control Power Input Connector
The ArmorKinetix system requires 24V DC (21.6…26.4V) input power for control circuitry.
IMPORTANT
SELV or PELV rated power supplies must be used.
The National Electrical Code and local electrical codes take precedence
over the values and methods provided. Implementation of these codes is
the responsibility of the machine builder.
Table 17 - Control Power Current Specifications
Attribute
Control power DC input voltage
Control power DC input current
Value
24V DC ±10%
12 A max
Max Control power inrush current
13.2 A max (1)
Control power DC output voltage to DSM/DSD
58V (2)
4 A max
Yes
Control power DC output current to DSM/DSD
Control Power Output Short-circuit protection
(1) Values are with no capacitor modules. For Inrush current with capacitor modules, see PIM
Module 24V DC Power Supply Current Demand (Inrush), Table 74.
(2) The PIM module output is always 58V. At the end of 140 m (459 ft) of cable, output voltage is
40V.
DC Bus Connector
The 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply RC connector wires to an external passive shunt when the
internal shunt capacity is exceeded.
Table 18 - DC Bus Power Connector
DC Pin
Description
Bus bar
DC bus connections
Signal
DC–
DC+
Module
• DC-bus power supply
• Inverters
• Accessory modules
• iTRAK® power supply
Digital Inputs Connector Pinouts
The ArmorKinetix PIM module has four configurable digital inputs and four configurable functions to
choose from in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application.
Table 19 - PIM Module Digital Input Pinouts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pin Orientation for 10-pin Digital
Inputs (IOD) Connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
24V current sinking fast input No. 1
I/O common for customer-supplied 24V supply
24V current sinking fast input No. 2
I/O common for customer-supplied 24V supply
Chassis ground
24V current sinking fast input No. 3
I/O common for customer-supplied 24V supply
24V current sinking fast input No. 4
I/O common for customer-supplied 24V supply
Chassis ground
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Signal
IN1
COM
IN2
COM
SHLD
IN3
COM
IN4
COM
SHLD
57
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Table 20 - Configurable Functions
Default Configuration
Digital input1 = Unassigned
Digital input2 = Unassigned
Digital input3 = Unassigned
Digital input4 = Unassigned
Description
Unassigned
Bus Capacitor OK
Shunt Thermal Switch OK
Bus Conditioner OK
Ethernet Connector
The PORT1 and PORT2 (RJ45) Ethernet connectors provide communication with the Logix 5000®
controller.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Transmit+
Transmit–
Receive+
Reserved
Reserved
Receive–
Reserved
Reserved
Signal
TD+
TD–
RD+
–
–
RD–
–
–
Module
1
8
• Power Interface Module
Hybrid Cable Power Connector
Pin
1
2
Description
DC+
Ground
Signal
DC+
GND
Module
• Power Interface Module
3
58
DC-
DC-
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
1
2
3
Chapter 4
Connector Signal
Descriptions (DSD and DSM)
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Use these descriptions to identify the connectors for the ArmorKinetix DSx modules.
Hybrid Connector (PIM to DSD or DSM)
PIM Module End
DSx Module Input
E
D
C
DC Bus
Connector
RJ45
Connector
2
3
F
B
ArmorKinetix PIM Flying Lead End
A
G
H
1
2
1
PE
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
—
Ethernet 1
A
Ethernet 1
—
Ethernet 2
B
Ethernet 2
—
Ethernet 3
C
Ethernet 3
—
Ethernet 4
D
Ethernet 4
—
Ethernet 5
E
Ethernet 5
—
Ethernet 6
F
Ethernet 6
—
Ethernet 7
G
Ethernet 7
—
Ethernet 8
H
Ethernet 8
—
Not populated
9
Not populated
—
Not populated
10
Not populated
1
DC +
2
DC +
2
Ground
PE
Ground
3
DC -
1
DC -
RJ45 Connector
DC Bus Connector
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
59
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
DSx Hybrid Connector (DSx to or from DSx)
Input Connector Device End
Hybrid
Cable Input
D
E
F
Output Connector Cable Side
C
G
B
H
Hybrid Cable
Output
60
B
A
I
J
H
A
2
1
PE
PE
Pin
Signal Name
Signal Name
A
Ethernet 1
Ethernet 1
B
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 2
C
Ethernet 3
Ethernet 3
D
Ethernet 4
Ethernet 4
E
Ethernet 5
Ethernet 5
F
Ethernet 6
Ethernet 6
G
Ethernet 7
Ethernet 7
H
Ethernet 8
Ethernet 8
I
Brake 24V
Not populated
J
Brake return
Not populated
1
DC -
DC -
PE
Ground
Ground
2
DC +
DC +
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
F
G
1
2
E
D
C
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
DSD Module to Motor Connectors (motor power/feedback and feedback
connectors)
DSD to Motor Power/Feedback
DSD to Motor
Power/Feedback
4
DSD Motor Feedback Connector
3
11
17
10
2
GND
1
13
12
1
12
11
10
13
17
8
7
3
14
2
3
14
15
16
9
10
2
4
4
5
6
5
9
Motor
Feedback
7
8
8
9
16
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Pin Signal Name
1
Ground
1
SIN +
2
U
2
SIN -
3
V
3
COS +
4
W
4
COS -
7
DSL +
5
DATA +
8
DSL -
6
DATA -
9
Brake +
7
Reserved
10
Brake -
8
Reserved
9
EPWR 5V
10
ECOM (N/C)
11
EPWR 9V
12
ECOM
13
TS +
14
TS - (N/C)
15
S1
16
S2
17
S3
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
7
6
15
61
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Digital Input Connector
Digital input Connector
Digital Input
Connector
4
5
3
1
2
Pin
Signal Name
1
IN 1
2
IN 2
3
24V COM
4
IN 3
5
IN 4
Control Signal Specifications This section provides a description of the digital inputs, Ethernet communication, power and relay
specifications, encoder feedback specifications, and safe torque-off features.
Digital Input Functions
Digital inputs are available for the machine interface on the on the PIM module (Digital Inputs
Connector Pinouts on page 57) and on the DSx module (Digital Input Connector on page 62). There
are four possible input functions for the PIM module and nine possible input functions for the DSx
module. Digital inputs require a 24V DC @ 15 mA supply. These are sinking inputs that require a
sourcing device. A common connection is provided on the digital input connector for each of the
digital inputs.
IMPORTANT
62
To improve registration input EMC performance, refer to the System Design
for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Table 21 - Understand Digital Input Functions
Functions
Unassigned
Enable
Home
Registration 1
Registration 2
Positive Overtravel
Negative Overtravel
Shunt Thermal
Switch OK
Bus Capacitor OK
Bus Conditioner OK
2198-PIM
Description (1)
Unassigned
X
A 24V DC input is applied to this terminal as a condition to enable each module.
—
An active state indicates to a homing sequence that the referencing sensor has been seen. Typically, a transition of this
—
signal is used to establish a reference position for the machine axis.
—
An inactive-to-active transition (also known as a positive transition) or active-to-inactive transition (also known as a
negative transition) is used to latch position values for use in registration moves.
—
The positive/negative limit switch (normally closed contact) inputs for each axis require 24V DC (nominal).
When the 2198-R014, 2198-R031, or 2198-R127 external shunt resistor is wired to the DC-bus power supply, this input must
be configured in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to monitor the status of the external shunt module thermal
switch and assigned to Shunt thermal switch OK. This function does not apply to the 2198-R004 shunt resistor. You can
also use this input to monitor the status of an active shunt module in DC-bus power supply systems that are connected
via the capacitor module or extension module, or in regenerative bus supply systems that are connected via the RC
connector or an accessory module.
You can configure this input in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application and wire the module status (MS) output from
the 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module to indicate to the DC-bus power supply, regenerative bus supply, or inverters
that a major fault is present on the capacitor module.
You can configure this input in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application and wire the module status (MS) output from
the 2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312 DC-bus conditioner module to indicate to the DC-bus power supply, regenerative bus supply,
or inverters that a major fault is present on the DC-bus conditioner module.
2198-DSx-ERSx
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
(1) The function is always inactive unless assigned to a digital input in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. To configure your DC-bus power supply digital input for Shunt Thermal Switch OK or
Bus capacitor OK, see Configure the Kinetix 5700 Drive Modules in the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives UserManual, publication 2198-UM002.
Table 22 - Digital Input Specifications
Attribute
Value
2198-PIM
Digital input type
Optically isolated, active high, single-ended, current sinking (EN 61131-2 Type 1)
X
Input current (with 24V applied)
12 mA, typical
X
On-state input voltage
15…30V @ 15 mA, max
X
Off-state input voltage
-1.0…5.0V
X
Pulse reject filtering (applies to registration function only)
12.0 µs
–
Pulse reject filtering (debounce filter)
20 ms, nom
X
Applies to all other input functions, Home, for example.
Propagation delay (registration functions, inverters only)
0 (delay compensated)
–
Registration accuracy (inverters only)
±3 µs
–
Registration repeatability (inverters only)
700 ns
–
Windowed registration invalid-to-valid event delay (inverters 125 µs, min
–
only)
2198-DSx-ERSx
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Figure 34 - Digital Input Circuitry
IOD-1 or IOD-3
INx
INPUT
24V DC
COM
IOD-2
ArmorKinetix Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
63
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Ethernet Communication Specifications
The PORT1 and PORT2 (RJ45) Ethernet connectors on the PIM provide communication with the DSx
module and the Logix 5000 controller.
Attribute
PIM Value
DSx Value
Communication
10BASE-TX Full Duplex, 100BASE-TX Half/Full Duplex (1)
100/1000BASE-TX Half/Full Duplex
1.0 ms, min
1.0 ms, min
Cyclic update period
(2)
Embedded switch features
Auto MDI/MDIX crossover detection/correction
Port-to-port time synchronization variation
Cabling
Three-port, cut-through, time correction on IEEE-1588 packets, Three-port, cut-through, time correction on IEEE-1588 packets,
limited filtering, quality of service with four priority levels
limited filtering, quality of service with four priority levels
Yes
Yes
100 ns, max
100 ns, max
• CAT5E or CAT6, Shielded, 50 m (164 ft) max when not using • CAT5E or CAT6, Shielded, 30 m (98 ft) max when not using
hybrid cable
hybrid cable
(1) 10 MB half duplex not support for the PIM module.
(2) With CIP Security™ enabled on the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply, the cyclic update period cannot be faster than 4.0 ms.
DSM Brake Override Input Specifications
When there is no hybrid cable or no connection to Studio 5000 Logix Designer application available,
DSM modules with a brake may require the release of the brake prior to rotating the shaft so the
DSM module aligns with the machine mounts. The brake override connection is made on two
dedicated pins of the hybrid input connector. The hybrid cable has no connection on those pins.
The brake override may only be activated when the hybrid input cable is not connected. A brake
override is attached at the location where the hybrid input cable would normally be attached and
an external 24V power supply can be connected to these pins on the hybrid connector to release
the motor parking brake.
Figure 35 - Input Hybrid Cable - Brake Connection
24V
24V_R
Polarity of the two pins is not important, the brake override works regardless of the
connection.
Two connections are required for the motor/brake override input power. Connections are rated for
+24V and current as shown in the following table. An active signal releases the motor brake.
Table 23 - Brake Specification
Specification
Nominal brake voltage
Value
24V DC
Minimum voltage
21.6V DC
Maximum voltage
Maximum brake current
27.6V DC
450 mA
The brake option is a spring-set holding brake that releases when voltage is applied to the brake
coil in the motor.
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
DSM Brake Input Specifications
For a detailed information on vertical loads and how the servo motor holding-brake option can be
used to help keep a load from falling, see the Vertical Load and Holding Brake Management
Application Technique, publication MOTION-AT003.
Control of the solid-state relay to release the motor brake is configurable in the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer application (refer to Configure SPM Motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties on page 112).
An active signal releases the motor brake. Turn-on and turn-off delays are specified by the
MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay and MechanicalBrakeReleaseDelay settings.
IMPORTANT
Holding brakes that are available on Allen-Bradley® rotary motors are
designed to hold a motor shaft at 0 rpm for up to the rated brake-holding
torque, not to stop the rotation of the motor shaft, or be used as a safety
device.
You must command the servo drive to 0 rpm and engage the brake only
after verifying that the motor shaft is at 0 rpm.
These steps provide one method you can use to control a brake.
1. Connect the hybrid cable according to the appropriate interconnect diagram in Appendix A
beginning on page 169.
2. Enter the MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay and Mechanical BrakeReleaseDelay times in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Refer to Axis Properties>Parameter List. The delay times must be from the appropriate
motor family brake specifications table in the Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical
Data, publication KNX-TD001.
3. Use the drive stop-action default setting (Current Decel & Disable).
Refer to Axis Properties>Actions>Stop Action in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
4. Use the motion instruction Motion Axis Stop (MAS) to decelerate the servo motor to 0 rpm.
5. Use the motion instruction Motion Servo Off (MSF) to engage the brake and disable drive.
Feedback Specifications
The ArmorKinetix DSD module accepts motor feedback signals from Hiperface digital-servo-link
(DSL) encoders on the motor/power feedback (M23 type) connector and Hiperface, and incremental
encoders on the motor feedback (M17 type) connector.
IMPORTANT
Auto-configuration in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application of
intelligent absolute, high-resolution encoders, and incremental encoders is
possible with only Allen-Bradley motors.
The motor power/feedback and motor feedback connectors can be used in the following
applications:
• Motor feedback
• Auxiliary feedback-only axis
• Dual-loop control applications
Encoder Feedback Supported on the DSD Module Motor Power/
Feedback Connector
The ArmorKinetix system supports Kinetix VPL, VPF, VPH, and VPS servo motors with Hiperface
digital-servo-link (DSL) encoders by using the 2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx motor power/feedback cable
connected to the motor power/feedback (M23 type) connector on the DSD module.
Other Allen-Bradley motors and actuators with Hiperface single-turn or multi-turn high-resolution
absolute encoders are also accepted, but you must connect to the motor feedback (M17 type)
connector on the DSD module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
65
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Encoder Feedback Supported on the DSD Module Motor Feedback
Connector
The ArmorKinetix system also supports multiple types of feedback devices by using the 17-pin
motor feedback connector on the DSD module and sharing connector pins in many cases.
Table 24 - Motor Feedback (M17 Connector) General Specifications - ArmorKinetix DSD Module
Attribute
Motor and Auxiliary Feedback
• Hiperface Sine/Cosine
• Generic TTL Incremental (1)
• Generic Sine/Cosine Incremental (1)
Feedback device support
Power supply voltage (MTR_EPWR5V)
Power supply current (MTR_EPWR5V)
5.27…5.50V (2)
300 mA, max
Power supply voltage (MTR_EPWR9V)
Power supply current (MTR_EPWR9V)
8.30…9.90V (2)
150 mA, max
• Single-ended, under 500 Ω= no fault
• Single-ended, over 10 kΩ= fault
Thermostat
(1) These could be with or without HALL effects (UVW).
(2) These motor feedback voltage and current ratings are per axis.
Table 25 - Feedback General Specifications - ArmorKinetix DSM Module
Attribute
Feedback device support
Motor Feedback
• Hiperface digital-servo-link (DSL)
Table 26 - Motor Feedback Signals by Device Type
Wire
Hiperface SIN/COS
Sine/Cosine
Generic TTL Incremental Generic
Incremental
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DSD Module Motor
Feedback Connector
(M17 type)
SIN+
SINCOS+
COSDATA+
DATACLK+
CLK-
Black
White/Black
Red
White/Red
Green
White/Green
Brown
White/Brown
MTR_SIN
MTR_SINMTR_COS+
MTR_COSMTR_DATA+
MTR_DATAReserved
Reserved
MTR_AM
MTR_AMMTR_BM+
MTR_BMMTR_IM+
MTR_IM—
—
MTR_SIN
MTR_SINMTR_COS+
MTR_COSMTR_IM+
MTR_IM—
—
9
EPWR5V
Gray
10
ECOM
White/Gray
MTR_EPWR5V (1)
MTR_ECOM
MTR_EPWR5V (1)
MTR_ECOM
MTR_EPWR5V (1)
MTR_ECOM
11
EPWR9V
Orange
12
13
14
15
16
17
ECOM
TS+
TSS1 (c)
S2 (c)
S3 (c
(N/C)
White/Orange
Blue
WhiteBlue
Yellow
White/Yellow
MTR_EPWR9V (1)
(N/C)
MTR_TS+
(N/C)
—
—
—
MTR_EPWR9V (1)
(N/C)
MTR_TS+
(N/C)
S1
S2
S3
MTR_EPWR9V (1)
(N/C)
MTR_TS+
(N/C)
S1
S2
S3
Pin
(1) Determine which power supply your encoder requires and connect to only the specified supply. Do not make connections to both supplies.
66
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Table 27 - Hiperface Specifications
Attribute
Memory support
Hiperface data communication
Sine/cosine interpolation
Input frequency (AM/BM)
Input voltage (AM/BM)
Value
Not programmed, or programmed with Allen-Bradley motor data
9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity
4096 counts/sine period
250 kHz, max
0.6...1.2V, peak to peak, measured at the drive inputs
Line loss detection (AM/BM)
Average (sin2 + cos2) > constant
Two-stage coarse count pulse reject filter with rejected pulse tally
Position compare between incremental accumulator and serial data
performed every 50 ms or less
Noise filtering (AM and BM)
Incremental position verification
Table 28 - Generic TTL Incremental Specifications
Attribute
TTL incremental encoder support
Quadrature interpolation
Differential input voltage
(MTR_AM, MTR_BM, and MTR_IM)
DC current draw
(MTR_AM, MTR_BM, and MTR_IM)
Input signal frequency
(MTR_AM, MTR_BM, and MTR_IM)
Edge separation
(MTR_AM and MTR_BM)
Value
5V, differential A quad B
4 counts / square wave period
Commutation verification (1)
Commutation angle verification performed at the first Hall signal transition
and periodically verifies thereafter
Hall inputs
(MTR_S1, MTR_S2, and MTR_S3)
Single-ended, TTL, open collector, or none
5V DC, differential line driver (DLD) output compatible
30 mA, max
5.0 MHz, max
42 ns min, between any two edges
(1) These could be with or without HALL effects (UVW). Refer to Commutation Self-sensing Startup on page 233.
Table 29 - Generic Sine/Cosine Incremental Specifications
Attribute
Sine/Cosine interpolation
Input frequency
(MTR_SIN and MTR_COS)
Differential input voltage
(MTR_SIN and MTR_COS)
Value
2048 counts/sine wave period
250 kHz, max
Commutation verification (1)
Commutation angle verification performed at the first Hall signal transition
and periodically verifies thereafter
Hall inputs
(MTR_S1, MTR_S2, and MTR_S3)
Single-ended, TTL, open collector, or none
0.6…1.2V, p-p
(1) These could be with or without HALL effects (UVW). Refer to Commutation Self-sensing Startup on page 233.
Refer to Encoder Phasing Definitions on page 68 for encoder phasing alignment diagrams.
IMPORTANT
Unprogrammed Smart feedback devices (Hiperface Sin/Cos, Hiperface DSL)
are not supported. Unprogrammed as load or feedback-only feedback
types are supported, except unprogrammed Hiperface DSL encoders.
Contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative for
support options.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
67
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Encoder Phasing Definitions
For TTL encoders, the drive position increases when A leads B. Clockwise motor rotation is
assumed, when looking at the shaft.
Figure 36 - TTL Encoder Phasing
360°
90°
90°
90°
90°
A
/A
B
/B
Z
/Z
For Sin/Cos encoders (Hiperface), the drive position increases when Cosine (B) leads Sine (A).
Clockwise motor rotation is assumed, when looking at the shaft.
Figure 37 - Sine/Cosine Encoder Phasing
B
68
A
IMPORTANT
The Sine/Cosine encoder signal phasing is different than the TTL encoder
signal phasing.
IMPORTANT
When using an incremental Sine/Cosine feedback device, the drive
cannot synthesize a marker signal, so a physical marker signal is
required for the home-to-marker sequence (and the marker hookup
test) to complete.
When using absolute feedback devices (for example, Hiperface) the drive
synthesizes a marker signal because these devices don't have a marker
signal required for the home-to-marker sequence (and the marker
hookup test) to complete.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
The drive Motor Feedback (M17 connector) connector uses Hall signals to initialize the commutation
angle for permanent magnet motor commutation. The commutation self-sensing feature initializes
the commutation angle for motors that do not have the Hall effect sensors.
Figure 38 - Hall Encoder Phasing
V UN
V WN
V VN
S1
S2
S3
300
60
0
120
180
240
300
60
0
Absolute Position Feature
The absolute position feature tracks the position of the motor, within the multi-turn retention limits,
while the drive is powered off. The absolute position feature is available with only multi-turn
encoders.
Table 30 - Absolute Position Retention Limits
Cat. No.
Designator
Encoder Type
VPL-A/Bxxxxx-P
VPF-A/Bxxxxx-P
VPS-Bxxxxx-P
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-xxxxxx-P
VPL-A/Bxxxxx-W,
VPF-A/Bxxxxx-W
VPH-A/Bxxxxx-W
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x075xx-W
VPL-A/Bxxxxx-Q
VPF-A/Bxxxxx-Q
VPH-A/Bxxxxx-Q
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x1xxxx-T
MPL-A/Bxxxxx-M
MPM-A/Bxxxxx-M
MPF-A/Bxxxxx-M
MPS-A/Bxxxxx-M
-P
-W
Hiperface DSL
-Q
-T
-M
Hiperface
Hiperface (magnetic scale)
Rotary Motor
Cat. No.
Linear Actuator Cat. No.
Retention Limits
Turns (rotary)
mm (linear)
VPAR-A/Bxxxxx-P
4096 (±2048)
–
VPAR-Bxxxxx-W
4096 (±2048)
–
VPAR-Bxxxxx-Q
512 (±256)
–
VPAR-Bxxxxx-W
4096 (±2048)
MPAR-A/B3xxxx-M
2048 (±1024)
–
-V
MPL-A/Bxxxxx-V
MPAR-A/B1xxxx-V,
MPAR-A/B2xxxx-V
4096 (±2048)
–
-xDx
–
LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
–
960 (37.8)
Figure 39 - Absolute Position Limits (measured in turns)
4096 Turns
2048 Turns
1024 Turns
512 Turns
128 Turns
-2048
-1024
-512
-256
-128
-64
0
Position at Power Down
+64
+128
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
+256
+512
+1024
+2048
69
Chapter 4
ArmorKinetix Modules Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Notes:
70
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
This chapter provides procedures for wiring your ArmorKinetix® system components and making
cable connections.
PIM to DSx Hybrid Cable
MOD
NET
Power Interface
Module (PIM)
DSx to DSx Hybrid Cable
Distributed Servo
Motor (DSM)
Distributed Servo
Drive (DSD)
Basic Wiring Requirements
This section contains basic wiring information for the ArmorKinetix system power supplies, servo
drives, and accessories.
ATTENTION: Plan the installation of your system so that you can perform all
cutting, drilling, tapping, and welding with the system removed from the
enclosure. Because the system is of the open type construction, be careful to
keep metal debris from falling into it. Metal debris or other foreign matter can
become lodged in the circuitry and result in damage to components.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting and
wiring of the ArmorKinetix modules prior to applying power. Once power is
applied, connector terminals can have voltage present even when not in use.
IMPORTANT
This section contains common PWM servo system wiring configurations,
size, and practices that can be used in a majority of applications. National
Electrical Code, local electrical codes, special operating temperatures, duty
cycles, or system configurations take precedence over the values and
methods provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
71
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Bypass a ArmorKinetix DSD
or DSM Module
You can bypass a non-functioning module. The length of the cables that are connected between
modules cannot exceed the 30 m (98 ft) maximum distance.
Determine Input Power
Configurations
The ArmorKinetix system power supply can be either the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply.
DC-bus Power Supply
Before wiring input power to your 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply, you must determine the type of
input power within your facility. The modules are designed to operate in both grounded and
ungrounded environments.
IMPORTANT
For EN/IEC 61800-3 category C3 compliance, use the appropriate
2198-DBRxx-F line filter with a grounded WYE configuration. The use of a line
filter in an ungrounded, corner-grounded, or impedance-grounded
configuration can affect the line filter components and result in equipment
damage.
Grounded Power Configurations
The grounded (WYE) power configuration grounds your three-phase power at a neutral point. This
type of grounded power configuration is preferred.
Figure 40 - Grounded Power Configuration (WYE Secondary)
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
2198-Pxxx DC-bus Power Supply
(bottom view)
Transformer (WYE) Secondary
L3
Circuit
Protection
L3
Transformer
L2
L2
L1
Three-phase
Input VAC
2198-PIM070
Module (bottom
view)
L1
Phase Ground
Bonded Cabinet
Ground
M1
Contactor
Three-phase (1)
AC Line Filter
(required for CE and UK)
Connect to drive module
ground stud.
Ground Grid or
Power Distribution Ground
(1) When using 2198-DBRxx-F line filter, 2198-Pxxx power supply has the ground jumper installed. To configure ground jumpers, see
the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002. The PIM, DSD, or DSM modules do not have ground jumpers.
72
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 41 - Impedance-grounded Power Configuration (WYE secondary)
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
2198-Pxxx DC-bus Power Supply (1)
(bottom view)
Transformer (WYE) Secondary
2198-PIM070
Module
(bottom view)
M1
Contactor
L3
L3 L2 L1
Transformer
L2
Three-phase
Input VAC
L1
Phase Ground
Circuit
Protection
Connect to
drive module
ground stud.
Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Ground Grid or
Power Distribution Ground
(1) 2198-Pxxx power supply has the ground jumper removed. To configure ground jumpers, see the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User
Manual, publication 2198-UM002. The PIM, DSD, or DSM modules do not have ground jumpers.
Figure 42 - Corner-grounded Power Configuration (Delta secondary)
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
2198-Pxxx DC-bus Power Supply (1)
(bottom view)
M1
Contactor
Transformer (Delta) Secondary
L3
L2
L3 L2 L1
Transformer
2198-PIM070
Module
(bottom view)
Circuit
Protection
L1
Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Connect to drive module
ground stud.
Ground Grid or
Power Distribution Ground
(1) 2198-Pxxx power supply has the ground jumper removed. To configure ground jumpers, see the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User
Manual, publication 2198-UM002. The PIM, DSD, or DSM modules do not have ground jumpers.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples beginning on page 169 for input power interconnect diagrams.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
73
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Ungrounded Power Configurations
The ungrounded power configuration (Figure 43), corner-grounded (Figure 42), and impedancegrounded (Figure 41) power configurations do not provide a neutral ground point.
IMPORTANT
If you determine that you have ungrounded, corner-grounded, or
impedance-grounded power distribution in your facility, you must remove
the ground screw in each of your DC-bus power supplies, dual-axis
inverters (if present), and the ground jumper in each of your single-axis
inverters (if present).
The PIM modules, DSD modules, and DSM modules do not have these ground
jumpers.
Refer to Ground the System on page 75 for more information.
Figure 43 - Ungrounded Power Configuration
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
2198-Pxxx DC-bus Power Supply (1)
(bottom view)
Transformer
Chassis Ground
M1
Contactor
L3
L3 L2 L1
Three-phase
Input VAC
L2
L1
Bonded Cabinet
Ground
2198-PIM070
Module
(bottom view)
Circuit
Protection
Connect to
drive module
ground stud.
Ground Grid or
Power Distribution Ground
(1) 2198-Pxxx power supply has the ground jumper removed. To configure ground jumpers, see the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User
Manual, publication 2198-UM002. The PIM, DSD, or DSM modules do not have ground jumpers.
ATTENTION: Ungrounded and corner-grounded systems do not reference each
phase potential to a power distribution ground. This can result in an unknown
potential to earth ground. Drive-to-motor cable lengths are limited with these
AC power source types. See Appendix C, beginning on page 201, for more
information.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples beginning on page 169 for input power interconnect diagrams.
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 5
Ground the System
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
All equipment and components of a machine or process system should have a common earth
ground point connected to chassis. A grounded system provides a ground path for short circuit
protection. Grounding your modules and panels minimize shock hazard to personnel and damage
to equipment caused by short circuits, transient overvoltages, and accidental connection of
energized conductors to the equipment chassis.
ATTENTION: The National Electrical Code contains grounding requirements,
conventions, and definitions. Follow all applicable local codes and regulations to
safely ground your system
For CE and UK grounding requirements, refer to Agency Compliance on page 27.
ATTENTION: High voltage can build up on the shields of a hybrid cable, if the
shield is not grounded. Verify that there is a connection to ground for all shields in
the hybrid cable. Failure to observe these safety procedures could result in
personal injury or damage to equipment.
Ground the Kinetix 5700 power supplies, inverters, ArmorKinetix PIM, and accessory modules to a
bonded cabinet ground bus with a braided of at least 10 mm2 (0.0155 in2) in cross-sectional area.
Keep the braided ground strap as short as possible for optimum bonding.
Figure 44 - Connect the Ground Terminal
DC-bus
Single-axis
Power Supply Inverter
Dual-axis
Inverter
PIM
Module
Capacitor
Module
Kinetix 5700 Drive System
(typical system)
DC-bus Power Supply
(typical example)
ArmorKinetix PIM
-
MBRK
+
Braided Ground Straps
Provide at least 10 mm2 (0.0155 in2)
in cross-sectional area.
Keep straps as short as possible.
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Ground screw (green) 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in), max
Braided ground strap (customer supplied)
Ground grid or power distribution ground
Bonded cabinet ground bus (customer supplied)
Refer to the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual,
publication GMC-RM001, for more information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
75
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
ArmorKinetix PIM Wiring
The hybrid cables include connectors on both ends.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples on page 169 for interconnect diagrams.
IMPORTANT
The National Electrical Code and local electrical codes take precedence
over the values and methods provided.
Use these guidelines as a reference when wiring the power connectors on your ArmorKinetix
modules.
IMPORTANT
For connector locations of the ArmorKinetix System drive modules, refer to
DC Bus Connector on page 57.
IMPORTANT
To improve system performance, run wires and cables in the wireways as
established in Establish Noise Zones on page 37.
Insert the connector plug into the drive module connector.
Wire the 24V Control Power Input Connector
The 24V power (CP) connector requires 24V DC input for the control circuitry. The connector plug
ships with the module and shared-bus connector kits are purchased separately.
IMPORTANT
Mount the 24V power supply as close to the drive system as possible to
minimize voltage drop on the 24V input power wiring.
Figure 45 - CP Connector Wiring - Connector Plug
2198-PIM
Top View (DC-bus power supply is shown)
1
2
24V (CP) Connector Plug
24V
+
24V
Table 31 - CP Connector Plug Wiring Specifications
Drive Module
Cat. No.
CP Pin
Signal
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Strip Length
mm (in.)
Torque Value
N•m (lb•in)
2198-PIM070
CP-1
CP-2
24V+
24V-
0.5…4 (1)
(20…12)
7.0 (0.28)
0.22…0.25
(1.9…2.2)
(1) Use sufficient wire size to support the complete control power load, including the Kinetix 5700 drive modules, ArmorKinetix modules, and pass-through current for the attached motor modules.
The ArmorKinetix PIM uses the 2198-H040-D-T connector, see publication 2198-IN005 for more
information.
76
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 46 - CP Connector Wiring - Shared Bus
24V DC Input
Wiring Connector
V24 V+
24
Kinetix 5700 Drive
System (top view)
Wiring Connector for 2198-PIM070
Table 32 - CP Shared-bus Wiring Specifications
Drive Module (1) (2)
Cat. No.
CP Pin
Signal
Input Current, max
A rms, max.
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Strip Length
mm (in.)
Torque Value
N•m (lb•in)
2198-PIM070
CP-1
CP-2
24V+
24V-
12
1.6 (14)
11.0 (0.43)
1.7…1.8
(15.0…15.9)
(1) Catalog numbers 2198T-W25K-ER, 2198-RP263, 2198-RP312, 2198-S263-ERSx, and 2198-S312-ERSx, use a slightly larger input wiring connector than the other Kinetix 5700 drive modules.
(2) Bus-bars and T-connectors can be added only to the right of the 24V DC input wiring connector.
Wire the Digital Inputs Connector
The digital inputs connector applies to the ArmorKinetx PIM module and use spring tension to hold
wires in place.
Figure 47 - Digital Input Connector Wiring
ArmorKinetix PIM Front View
(2198-PIM070 is shown)
MOD
NET
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
10
10-pin Digital Inputs
Connector Plug
77
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Table 33 - Digital Inputs Connector Specifications
Drive Module Cat. Connector Pin
No.
2198-PIM
IOD-1
IOD-2
IOD-3
IOD-4
IOD-5
IOD-6
IOD-7
IOD-8
IOD-9
IOD-10
Signal
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Strip Length
mm (in.)
Torque Value
N•m (lb•in)
IN1
COM
IN2
COM
SHLD
IN3
COM
IN4
COM
SHLD
0.14…1.5
(26…16)
10.0 (0.39)
N/A (1)
(1) This connector uses spring tension to hold wires in place.
Connect the Hybrid Cable and Make Ethernet Connections
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect Digital Inputs on
ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM
Modules
Route the ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx Hybrid cable to the PIM module.
Connect the Ethernet RJ45 connector to the Ethernet port on the PIM module.
Connect the DC bus connector from the cable to the power connector on the PIM module.
Insert the connector plug into the DSx module connector.
There are four configurable inputs available.
3
5
4
1
2
3
DIgital Input
DSD Module
4
5
2
DIgital Input
1
DSM Module
Table 34 - Digital Input Information
No. of Pins
5-pin
5-pin
5-pin
Signal Name
Shield
1 - IN 1
2 - IN 2
3 - 24V COM
4 - IN 3
5 - IN 4
Unshielded
(Yellow)
Unshielded
(Black)
Shielded
Braided shield
Wire Size [AWG]
Cat. No. (1)
Straight Concave Right-angle Concave
889D-F5AC-2
889D-R5AC-2
889D-F5BC-2
889D-R5BC-2
889D-F5EC-2
889D-F5ECDM-2
889D-R5EC-2
889D-F5ECDE-2
22
22
22
(1) The 2 at the end of the catalog number is for 2 m (6.6 ft) cable length. Replace the 2 with 5 (5 m [16.4 ft]) or 10 (10 m[32.8 ft]) for
standard cable lengths.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 5
Connect Cables and
Terminators to DSx Modules
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Connect the motor power/feedback cable to the motor power/feedback connector (1) on the DSD
module. When not using a cable, use a connector terminator (2090-CDPT) to cover the connector.
Connect the motor feedback cable to the motor feedback connector (2) on the DSD module. When
not using a cable, use a connector terminator (2090-CDFT) to cover the connector.
Connect the ArmorKinetix hybrid cable to the hybrid connectors (3) on the DSx module When not
using a cable, use a connector terminator (2090-CDHT) to cover the connector.
2090-CDHT
3
2090-CDPT
2090-CDHT
1
3
2
2090-CDFT
DSx Module Connector
2198-DSD Motor Power/Feedback Connector
2198-DSD Feedback Connector
2198-DSD/DSM Hybrid Connector
2090-CDHT
—
—
x
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
2090-CDFT
—
x
—
2090-CDPT
x
—
—
79
Chapter 5
Connect the ArmorKinetix System
Notes:
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
This chapter provides procedures for configuring your ArmorKinetix® system with a Logix 5000®
controller by using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application.
Before you begin, make sure that you know the catalog number for each drive
module, the Logix module and /or controller, and the motor used in your motion
control application.
Power Interface Module
(PIM) Display
The ArmorKinetix Power Interface Module (PIM) has two status indicators and an LCD status display.
The indicators and display are used to monitor the system status, set network parameters, and
troubleshoot faults. Four navigation buttons, directly below the display, are used to select items
from a soft menu.
Figure 48 - ArmorKinetix PIM LCD Display and Status Indicators
PRECHARGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 58.0V
MOD–
NET–
Status Indicators (see page 139)
PRECHARGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 58.0V
Navigation Buttons
Soft Menu
This is the Home
•
screen.
The setup selections are tied to the Setup (left-side) buttons and the menu selections
are tied to the Menu (right-side) buttons.
PIM Module
PRECHARGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 0.3V
Each soft menu item is executed by pressing the
navigation button directly below the item, as shown
in this example.
MAIN MENU
MODULE INFO
DIAGNOSTICS
Setup
Menu
The soft menu provides a changing selection that corresponds to the current screen. Use the
navigation buttons to perform the following.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
81
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Press to go back. Pressing enough times results in the Home
screen.
Pressing either arrow moves the selection to the next (or previous) item. When changing values,
pressing the up arrow increments the highlighted value. Values rollover after reaching the end of
the list.
Press to select values to change, moving from right to left. Values rollover when reaching the
end of the list.
Press to select a menu item.
Press to return to the Home screen.
?
Press to display the fault help (possible solutions in troubleshooting tables). For ArmorKinetix
System fault code descriptions and possible solutions, see Kinetix 5700 System Fault Codes,
publication 2198-RD003.
Menu Screens
The menu screens provide information about the drives, motors, diagnostics, and the fault log.
Parameters cannot be updated in the menu screens. Press one of the menu buttons to access the
menu.
You can use the soft menu items and navigation buttons to view the information.
Table 35 - Navigating the ArmorKinetix PIM Menu
Menu/Sub Menu
Selections
Module Info
Attributes
Description
Example Values
Catalog number
2198-PIM070
Firmware revision
Hardware revision
FW REV: 14.1.xxx
HW REV: 1.1
Serial number
SERIAL#: xxxxxxxxxxx
CONV UTIL: 0.7%
Converter diagnostics
Diagnostics>
Converter
Diagnostics
Digital Inputs
Fault text
Fault Log
Fault details
For ArmorKinetix system fault code descriptions and possible solutions, see
ArmorKinetix System Fault Codes, publication 2198-RD004.
Fault help
DC BUS: 0.0V
IBUS: 0.0A
CONV UTIL: 0.0%
PWR OUT: 0.0kW
IN1: OFF
IN2: OFF
IN3: OFF
IN4: OFF
FLT S15 - CONVERTER OVERCURRENT
The measured converter current has exceeded the
factory set current limit.
Reduce bus current load, check wiring for shorts
Setup Screens
The setup screens provide the means of changing drive settings, for example, the IP address. Press
one of the setup buttons to access the setup screens.
You can use the soft menu items and navigation buttons to view the
information and make changes.
Press
to validate your changes:
• If the change is invalid, the value doesn’t change.
• If the change is valid, an asterisk appears next to the changed
attribute.
82
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
SETTINGS
NETWORK
DISPLAY
STATIC IP
IP ADDRESS*
SUBNET MASK
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
You must cycle control power to make network configuration changes
persistent. In this example, the IP address was changed. The change
takes affect and the asterisk disappears after control power is cycled.
Display configuration changes take effect immediately.
Table 36 - Navigating the PIM Settings Menu
Settings Menu Selections
Sub Menu Selections
Attributes
Default
Reset
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Network Config
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Flash Update
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Device Config
ENABLED
DISABLED
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
On
Off
30 sec … NEVER
(NEVER = no timeout period, the
backlight is always on)
-> DC BUS
CONV UTIL
CONV TEMP
PWR OUT
IBUS
-10…+10
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Protected Mode
->Static IP (1)
Network
DHCP
Backlight Timeout
Display
Cyclic Data Select (2)
Set Contrast
Web
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.000
192.168.001.001
-> 3 min (1)
0
DISABLED
Description
When Enabled (default), identity object or safety
resets are not possible when a controller
connection is open.
When Enabled (default), network configuration
changes are not possible when a controller
connection is open.
When Enabled (default), firmware updates are
not possible when a controller connection is
open.
When Enabled (default), only attribute writes are
possible when a controller connection is open.
Indicates current IP address
Indicates current subnet mask
Indicates current gateway
Turns DHCP on
Turns DHCP off
Sets backlight timeout period of the display
DC bus voltage
Converter utilization in % Rated
Converter temperature in °C
Output power in Watts
Output current in Amps
Contrast setting of the display
When Enabled, the drive's diagnostic webpage
is accessible.
(1) An arrow (->) appears in front of the chosen attribute indicating that this attribute is currently configured. This is also the factory default setting.
(2) The DC bus voltage is one of several cyclic data attributes. You can select any of the Cyclic Data Select attributes to be displayed on the Home screen.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
83
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Startup Sequence
On initial powerup, the drive performs a self test. Upon successful completion, the drive firmware
revision is displayed.
Kinetix 57
until Kinetix 5700 is spelled out…
Kinetix 5700
then…
SELF-TEST
FW REV: 3.1
75%
until the test is complete…
SELF-TEST
FW REV: 3.1
Next, the CIP axis state, the IP address, and the default
cyclic data attribute (in this example DC-bus voltage)
appears. In addition, the setup and menu soft keys are
displayed. This is the Home screen.
100%
PRECHARGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 58.0V
<-- Axis State
<-- IP Address
<-- Cyclic Data Attribute
In this example PRECHARGE is the axis state attribute. Table 37 lists the other axis states and their
descriptions.
Table 37 - CIP Axis States on the Home Screen
Axis State
STANDBY
CONNECTING
CONFIGURING
SYNCING
PRECHARGE
RUNNING
MAJOR FAULTED
START INHIBITED
SHUTDOWN
Set Network Parameters for
the PIM Module
Description
The drive is waiting to receive configuration information from the controller.
The drive is trying to establish communication with the EtherNet/IP controller.
The drive is receiving configuration information from the controller.
The drive is waiting for a successful Group Sync service.
The drive is ready for mains input power.
The drive is configured for No Control and is fully operational.
The drive is faulted due to an existing or past fault condition.
The drive has an active condition that inhibits it from being enabled.
The drive has been shut down.
You can include the drive in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application by adding it to a
configured EtherNet/IP module or controller under the I/O configuration tree. After setting network
parameters, you can view the drive status information in the Studio 5000® environment and use it
in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
You must program network parameters by using the LCD display.
1. From the LCD display, select SETUP>NETWORK and choose between STATIC IP and DHCP.
The default setting is STATIC IP.
2. If STATIC IP, then press
- IP address
- Gateway
- Subnet mask
to configure the following parameters:
Settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. IP addressing can also be changed through the Module
Configuration dialog box in RSLinx® software. Changes to the IP addressing take effect after power
is cycled. The module is factory programmed to static IP address of 192.168.1.1.
Refer to Setup Screens on page 82 for help setting the network parameters.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Set Network Parameters for
the DSD and DSM Modules
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Use the rotary switches on the module to set the IP address, 192.168.1.xxx, where you set the last
octet xxx. You can set the IP address when there is no power applied to the module. IP addressing
can also be changed through the Module Configuration dialog box in RSLinx software. Changes to
the IP addressing, protected mode enabled/disabled settings, and restoring factory defaults take
effect after power is cycled. The DSx module is factory programmed to ‘999’, which puts the module
in BOOTP/DHCP mode.
Rotary switches are housed under removable caps and are NOT accessible during normal
operation. Remove a cover to gain access. Use a screw driver to turn the switches to the
appropriate setting.
x1
x10
x100
Table 38 - EtherNet/IP Rotary Switch Settings
Switch Setting
000
001…254
888
900
999
All other values
Function
Disable Protected Mode. A power cycle after the switches are set to 000 disables Protected Mode.
Sets the last octet of the IP address to the value indicated (xxx in 192.168.1.xxx) on the module.
A power cycle after the switches are set to 888 restores all factory default settings. Before you use
this setting, read the Important statement after this table.
Enable Protected Mode. A power cycle after the switches are set to 900 enables Protected Mode.
When the system is in Protected Mode, the module does not allow any configuration changes, resets,
or firmware updates when a controller connection is open. Protected Mode is enabled by default.
Sets the IP address to a value determined by DHCP or an address that is stored in non-volatile
memory. IP addresses can be changed through the Module Configuration dialog box in RSLinx
software. ‘999’ is the default setting.
Reserved.
IMPORTANT
Install the Add-on Profile for
the Studio 5000
Environment
Before changing the EtherNet/IP address rotary switch settings to 888,
consider the following:
– Restoring the factory default settings clears all functional safety
configurations, resets safety ownership, and returns the motor module to the
out-of-box-state.
– Only authorized personnel should attempt to reset the safety ownership.
– When the motor module returns to the out-of-box state, Safe Torque Off (STO)
safety integrity is lost.
For help using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application as it applies to configuring the
ControlLogix® or CompactLogix™ controllers and the GuardLogix® 5580 safety controller and
Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller, refer to Additional Resources on page 9.
Each release of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application makes possible the configuration of
additional Allen-Bradley® motors, actuators, power supplies, and drive features not available in
previous versions.
Download Add-On profiles (AOP) from the Product Compatibility Download Center (PCDC) website: at
rok.auto/pcdc.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
85
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure the Logix 5000
Controller
These procedures assume that you have wired your ArmorKinetix System drive system. In this
example, the GuardLogix 5580 safety controller and Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller dialog
boxes are shown.
Follow these steps to configure the controller.
1. Apply power to your controller and open your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
2. From the Create menu, choose New Project.
The New Project dialog box appears.
IMPORTANT
If you are configuring a safety application, you must use a
GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix safety controller.
See Integrated Functional Safety Support on page 20 for a table of
minimum controller requirements.
In this example, the typical dialog boxes for ControlLogix and GuardLogix 5580 controllers and
CompactLogix 5380 controllers with embedded Ethernet are shown.
Follow these steps to configure your Logix 5000 controller.
1. Expand the Logix 5000 controller family and select your controller.
2. Type the file Name.
3. Click Next.
The New Project dialog box appears.
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. From the Revision dropdown menu, choose your software revision.
IMPORTANT
To configure ArmorKinetix systems, you must be using the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 35.00.00 or later
(with a user-installed Add-On Profile).
5. Click Finish.
The new controller appears in the Controller Organizer under the I/O Configuration folder.
Controller Organizer with Compact GuardLogix 5380
controller.
Controller Organizer with GuardLogix 5580 controller.
6. From the Edit menu, choose Controller Properties.
The Controller Properties dialog box appears.
7. Click the Date/Time tab.
8. Check Enable Time Synchronization.
The motion modules set their clocks to the module you assign as the Grandmaster.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
87
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
IMPORTANT
Check Enable Time Synchronization for all controllers that participate
in CIP Sync™. The overall CIP Sync network automatically promotes a
Grandmaster clock, unless the priority is set in Advanced.
9. Click OK.
Add and Configure a Kinetix
5700 DC-bus Power Supply
Add the DC-bus Power Supply to the Controller organizer, see the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User
Manual, publication 2198-UM002.
IMPORTANT
Add and Configure the
ArmorKinetix PIM Module
When adding the power supply to the controller organizer, on the Power
page, verify that the voltage and the Primary Bus sharing group match the
PIM module.
Follow these steps to configure the ArmorKinetix PIM module.
1. Below the controller you just created, right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.
The Select Module Type dialog box appears.
Enter 2198-PIM070 here to
further limit your search.
2. By using the filters, check Motion and Allen-Bradley, and select your 2198-PIM module as
appropriate for your hardware configuration.
3. Click Create.
The New Module dialog box appears.
88
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. Configure the new module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address option.
In this example, the Private Network address is selected.
c. Enter the address of your 2198-PIM070 module.
In this example, the last octet of the address is 1.
5. Click the Power category.
IMPORTANT
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application enforces shared-bus
configuration rules for Kinetix 5700 drives.
6. From the dropdown menus, choose the power options appropriate for your hardware
configuration.
Attribute
Menu
Description
Bus Configuration
Shared DC/DC (1)
Applies to PIM modules.
Primary Bus-sharing Group (2) • Group1
• Group2
Secondary Bus-sharing Group • Group3…
Voltage
• 200…240V AC
• 400…480V AC
Selects the Bus Sharing Group shared with the AC/DC converter suppling
DC voltage to the PIM power supply.
Selects the Bus Sharing Group shared with the DSx modules connected
to the PIM module power supply output.
Select 200V Class or 400V Class.
(1) Shared DC/DC bus configuration is the only option for the PIM module and the selection cannot be changed.
(2) For more information on bus-sharing groups, refer to Understand Bus-sharing Group Configuration on page 128. For more information on primary and
secondary bus-sharing groups, see Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment all modules physically
connected to the same shared-bus connection system must be part of
the same Bus Sharing Group in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application.
7. Click OK to close the New Module dialog box.
To configure the remaining PIM properties, you must close the New Module
dialog box and reopen it as the Module Properties dialog box.
8. Click Close to close the Select Module Type dialog box.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
89
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
9. To open the Module Properties dialog box, right-click the PIM module you just created in the
Controller Organizer and choose Properties.
10. Click the Digital Input category.
11. From the Digital Input dropdown menu choose from these options:
- Bus Capacitor OK
- Bus Conditioner OK
- Shunt Thermal Switch OK.
See Digital Input Functions on page 62 for option definitions.
12. Click the Associated Axes category.
90
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
13. Click New Axis.
The New Tag dialog box appears.
14. Type the axis Name.
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE is the default Data Type.
Class is Standard or Safety.
15. Click Create.
The axis (Axis_1 in this example) appears in the Controller Organizer under Motion Groups>
Ungrouped Axes and is assigned as Axis.
16. Click Apply.
17. Repeat step 1 through step 16 if you have more than one 2198-PIM070 module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
91
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Add and Configure the DSD
or DSM Module
This procedure applies to single-axis inverters with integrated safety connections. In this example,
a 2198-DSx-ERSx module is configured.
Follow these steps to configure the ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM module.
1. Below the controller you just created, right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.
The Select Module Type dialog box appears.
Enter 2198-DS here to
further limit your search.
2. By using the filters, check Motion and Allen-Bradley, and select your 2198-DSx module as
appropriate for your hardware configuration.
3. Click Create.
The New Module dialog box appears.
4. Add the DSD/DSM module to the controller organizer and click create.
The New Module dialog box appears.
92
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
5. Configure the new drive.
a. Type the drive Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address option.
c. Enter the address of your 2198-DSx-ERSx module.
d. Click Advanced if using network address translation with safety connection to add drive
module configured IP address.
The Safety Network Number (SNN) field populates automatically when the Connection
mode on the Module Definition dialog box includes an integrated Motion and Safety or
Safety-only connection. For a detailed explanation of the safety network number, refer to
the appropriate GuardLogix controller publication as defined in Additional Resources on
page 9.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
93
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Module Definition
Follow these steps to configure 2198-DSx-ERS2 and 2198-DSx-ERS5 modules.
1. To open Module Definition dialog box, click Change.
The Module Definition dialog box appears.
Depending on the Module Definition revision selection, alternate product features and
feedback types can be selected.
2. From the Safety Application dropdown menu, choose between Safety Off or Networked for
an integrated safety application (see Table 39 on page 94 for definitions).
Table 39 - Safety Application Definitions
Safety Application Mode
Safety Functions
Minimum Drive Module Required
Safety off
None
2198-DSx-ERS2 or -ERS5
Safe Torque-off (STO)
2198-DSx-ERS2 or -ERS5
Timed SS1
2198-DSx-ERS2 or -ERS5
• Timed SS1
• Monitored SS1
• Controller-based safety functions (2)
2198-DSx-ERS5
Networked (integrated)
Drive Module
(1)
Connection Options Minimum Controller Required
• ControlLogix 5570
• Motion Only
• CompactLogix 5370
• Motion and Safety
• Safety Only
• Safety Networked
(Integrated)
• Motion Only
• GuardLogix 5570
• Networked
• Compact GuardLogix 5370
(Integrated) and
select Safety Only
• Motion and Safety
• Safety Only
• Motion and Safety
• Safety Only
• GuardLogix 5580
• Compact GuardLogix 5380
(1) Where a ControlLogix or CompactLogix (non-safety) controller is specified, a GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix controller is backwards compatible. Also, GuardLogix 5580 and Compact
GuardLogix 5380 controllers are backwards compatible with GuardLogix 5570 and Compact GuardLogix 5370 controllers.
(2) See the Kinetix 5700 Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM001, for more information on these Drive Safety instructions.
3. From the Connection dropdown menu, choose the Connection
mode for your motion application (see Table 40 for
definitions).
When ‘Safety’ appears in the Connection mode, integrated safety is
implied.
94
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Table 40 - Module Connection Definitions
Connection Mode
Motion and Safety
Motion Only
Safety Options
• Integrated mode
• Integrated mode if there is a secondary
safety controller
Safety Only
• Integrated mode
Description
• Motion connections and Integrated Safety are managed by this controller.
• Motion connections are managed by this controller.
• Integrated Safety is managed by this controller.
• Motion connections are managed by another controller that has a Motion-only connection to the
drive.
4. From the Motion Safety x dropdown menu, choose the
integrated safety type (see Table 41 on page 95 for
definitions).
Motion Safety aligns with Axis 1 configured in Associated
Axes.
Dual Feedback Monitoring is only available on DSD modules, not on DSM modules.
Table 41 - Motion Safety Definitions
Motion Safety Mode
Safe Stop Only No Feedback
Single Feedback
Monitoring
Dual Feedback
Monitoring
Module Connection Description
Options
• Motion and Safety • 2198-DSx-ERS5: STO function and Timed SS1 Safe Stop functions are available.
• Safety Only
• 2198-DSx-ERS2 STO function and Timed SS1 Safe Stop functions are available.
• 2198-DSx-ERS5: STO function and Timed SS1 Safe Stop functions are available.
• 2198-DSD-ERS5: Primary feedback is used in the safety object for safe monitoring. The feedback can be a SIL rated Hiperface
• Motion and Safety
DSL encoder, for example, a VPL-B1003P-Q or W motor used in the Motor Power/Feedback connector. This can also be a Sine/
Cosine device, for example, an MPL-B310P-M motor used in the Motor Feedback connector. See the Kinetix 5700 Safe Monitor
• Safety Only
Functions Safety Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM001, to evaluate SIL levels possible with a single feedback device.
• 2198-DSx-ERS5: Drive-based Monitored SS1 and other controller-based monitoring functions.
• 2198-DSD-ERS5: STO function and Timed SS1 Safe Stop functions are available.
• Motion and Safety
• 2198-DSD-ERS5: Safety feedback which can be used for SS1 (monitored) safety function functionality.
• Safety Only
• 2198-DSD-ERS5: Safe dual channel feedback is available.
5. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.
6. Click Apply.
Configure the Power and Safety Categories
1.
Click the Power category.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
95
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
IMPORTANT
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application enforces shared-bus
configuration rules for Kinetix 5700 drives.
2. From the dropdown menus, choose the power options appropriate for your hardware
configuration.
Attribute
Voltage
Bus Configuration
Secondary Bus Sharing
Group (1)
Menu
• 200…240V AC
• 400…480V AC
Shared DC
• Group1
• Group2
• Group3…
Description
Select 200V Class or 400V Class.
Applies to 2198-DSx-ERSx modules.
Applies to any bus-sharing configuration.
(1) For more information on bus-sharing groups, refer to Understand Bus-sharing Group Configuration on page 128.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment all modules physically
connected to the same shared-bus connection system must be part of
the same Bus Sharing Group in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application.
3. Click OK to close the Module Properties dialog box.
4. Click Close to close the Select Module Type dialog box.
Your 2198-DSx-ERSx module appears in the
Controller Organizer under the Ethernet network
in the I/O Configuration folder.
5. Right-click the drive you just created in the
Controller Organizer and choose Properties.
The Module Properties dialog box appears.
To configure the remaining inverter properties, you must close the New Module dialog
box and reopen it as the Module Properties dialog box.
If
Then
Your application includes integrated safety
Go to step 6 on page 96.
Your application has no safety connections
Go to Add an Associated Axis on page 97.
6. Click the Safety category.
96
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
7. The connection between the owner and the 2198-DSx-ERSx module is based on the
following:
- Servo drive safety network number
- GuardLogix slot number
- GuardLogix safety network number
- Path from the GuardLogix controller to the 2198-DSx-ERSx drive
- Configuration signature
If any differences are detected, the connection between the GuardLogix controller and the
2198-DSx-ERSx module is lost, and the yellow yield icon appears in the controller project
tree after you download the program.
8. Click Advanced.
The Advanced Connection Reaction Time Limit Configuration dialog box appears.
Analyze each safety channel to determine the appropriate settings. The smallest Input RPI
allowed is 6 ms. Selecting small RPI values consumes network bandwidth and can cause
nuisance trips because other devices cannot get access to the network.
For more information about the Advanced Connection Reaction Time Limit Configuration,
refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for the appropriate user manual for your
GuardLogix or Compact GuardLogix controller.
9. Click OK to close the Advanced dialog box.
10. Click Apply to save the Safety category parameters.
Add an Associated Axis
After you’ve established your ArmorKinetix modules in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application,
the feedback options need to be defined for each axis. Each physical axis supports motor and
auxiliary feedback.
Table 42 - ArmorKinetix Feedback Axis Summary
Module
ArmorKinetix DSD
ArmorKinetix DSM
Inverter Cat. No.
2198-DSD-ERS2 or
2198-DSD-ERS5
2198-DSM-ERS2 or
2198-DSM-ERS5
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Motor Feedback
Auxiliary Feedback
1 (axis 1)
1 (axis 2)
1 (axis 1)
—
97
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Table 43 - Motor Feedback Compatibility
Module
Motor Feedback Device
Option
Feedback Type
Motor Feedback Connector
• Digital AqB
• Digital AqB with UVW
• Sine/Cosine
• Sine/Cosine with UVW
DSD
DSM
Description
Hiperface Sine/Cosine
Motor Power/Feedback
Connector
Hiperface DSL
DSL Feedback (internal
connection)
Hiperface DSL
Applies to Kinetix MPL (-H) rotary motors, Kinetix MPAS (direct-drive) linear
actuators, Kinetix LDAT (-xBx) linear thrusters, and Kinetix LDC linear
motors.
Incremental
High-resolution,
absolute, single-turn
and multi-turn
High-resolution,
absolute, single-turn
and multi-turn
High-resolution,
absolute, single-turn
and multi-turn
Applies to Kinetix MPL, MPM, MPF, MPS (-M/S or -V/E) rotary motors;
Kinetix MPAS (ballscrew), MPAR linear actuators; ; and Kinetix LDAT
(-xDx) linear thrusters by using the motor feedback cable.
VPx family (VPL, VPF, VPS, and VPH), 63…130mm Frames, Kinetix VPAR
electric cylinders.
Applies to ArmorKinetix DSM modules.
Follow these steps to configure the axes for your ArmorKinetix System.
1. Right-click the 2198-DSx-ERSx module you just created and choose Properties.
The Module Properties dialog box appears.
2. Select the Associated Axes category.
In this example, DSM modules support one axis and DSL feedback only. The DSD modules
support up to two axes and either Auxiliary or DSL feedback.
Motor Feedback Options
Description
DSL Feedback (M23 type
connector)
The DSD module motor power and feedback connector includes power and
DSL feedback when connected to a Kinetix VPx motor by using 2090CSBM1P7-14AFxx cables.
Motor Feedback (M17 type
connector)
The DSD module motor feedback connector includes other feedback types,
but not DSL, when connected to other motors by using 2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
cables.
3. From the Axis x dropdown menu, choose an axis to assign to that motor feedback or
auxiliary feedback device.
4. From the Feedback Device dropdown menu, choose either DSL Feedback or Auxiliary
Feedback to associate with each axis.
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
5. Click New Axis.
The New Tag dialog box appears.
6. Type the axis Name.
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE is the default Data Type.
7. Click Create.
The axis (Axis_1 in this example) appears in the Controller
Organizer under Motion Groups>
Ungrouped Axes and is assigned as Axis 1.
You can configure an axis as Feedback Only. Refer to Configure Feedback-only
Axis Properties on page 104 for more information.
Refer to Configure Motor Feedback Properties on page 123 for configuring motor
feedback, load feedback, and master feedback devices.
8. Click Apply.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
99
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Digital Inputs
1.
Click the Digital Input category.
2. From the Digital Input dropdown menus choose the functions appropriate for your
application.
See Digital Input Functions on page 62 for definitions of the functions.
3. Click OK.
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for each ArmorKinetix DSx module.
Configure a Motion Group
Follow these steps to configure the motion group.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Motion Groups and choose New Motion Group.
The New Tag dialog box appears.
2. Type the new motion group Name.
3. Click Create.
Your new motion group appears in the Controller Organizer under
the Motion Groups folder.
100
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. Right-click the new motion group and choose Properties.
The Motion Group Properties dialog box appears.
5. Click the Axis Assignment tab and move your axes (created earlier) from Unassigned to
Assigned.
6. Click the Attribute tab and edit the default values as appropriate for your application.
7. Click OK.
Your axes moves to the new motion group.
Configure Axis Properties
for the PIM Module
When an axis is associated to the ArmorKinetix PIM module, the Axis Configuration is set to DC/DC
Converter and the Feedback Configuration is set to No Feedback.
You can choose the Motion Group or create a New Group.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
101
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Axis Properties
for ArmorKinetix DSD and
DSM Modules
Follow these steps to configure Axis Properties for your 2198-DSx-ERSx module.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click the DSx module axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General dialog box appears.
3. From the Axis Configuration dropdown menu, choose your configuration.
This example is for the DSD module. The DSM module does not have Frequency Control.
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. From the Feedback Configuration dropdown menu, choose your configuration, if applicable.
5. From the Application Type dropdown menu, choose your type if applicable.
6. From the Loop Response dropdown menu choose Medium (default).
The default setting is appropriate for most applications.
Loop Response Setting
Impact
High
Under-damped voltage set-point step response (Z = 0.8)
Medium
Critically-damped voltage set-point step response (Z = 1.0)
Low
Over-damped voltage set-point step response (Z = 1.5)
7. Click Apply.
8. Review other categories for the axis and make changes as needed for your application.
9. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
103
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Vertical Load Control Axis Properties
The 2198-DSx-ERSx modules support the Vertical Load Control feature. A vertical load is an axis
that can move due to stored potential energy. Some examples include a robot arm, lift, or
compressed spring. When set to Enabled, rather than applying Stop Category 0 stopping actions in
response to most Major fault conditions, when possible, the drive brings the motor to a controlled
stop and engages the holding brake prior to disabling the power structure.
When Vertical Load Control is enabled and the drive supports Torque Proving and Brake Proving
functionality, the controller sets the associated Proving Configuration attribute default value to
enable.
IMPORTANT
Brake proving functionality is applicable only to drive control modes that are
capable of generating holding torque based on a feedback device.
Therefore, Brake Proving is not applicable to Frequency Control mode with
Sensorless Vector control method.
For more information on controlling vertical loads, see the Vertical Load and Holding Brake
Management Application Technique, publication MOTION-AT003.
Figure 49 - Configure Vertical Load Control
Configure Feedback-only Axis Properties
Follow these steps to configure feedback-only axis properties.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General dialog box appears.
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
3. From the Axis Configuration dropdown menu, choose Feedback Only.
4. From the Feedback Configuration dropdown menu, choose Master Feedback.
5. From the Module dropdown menu, choose the drive to associate with your Feedback Only
axis.
The Module Type and Power Structure fields populate with the chosen drive catalog
number.
6. Click Apply.
7. Configure module properties for your module for Master Feedback.
8. Select the Master Feedback Category.
The Master Feedback Device Specification appears.
9. From the Type dropdown menu, choose a feedback device type.
10. Review other categories in the Controller Organizer and make changes as needed for your
application.
11. Click OK.
See Feedback Specifications on page 65 for more information on auxiliary feedback signals and
Allen-Bradley auxiliary feedback encoders available for use.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
105
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties
Follow these steps to configure induction-motor axis properties for various frequency control
methods. Induction motors are only compatible with the ArmorKinetix DSD module and not the DSM
module.
General and Motor Categories
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General dialog box appears.
3. From the Axis Configuration dropdown menu, choose Frequency Control.
4. From the Feedback Configuration dropdown menu, choose No Feedback.
5. From the Module dropdown menu, choose the drive to associate with your Frequency
Control (induction motor) axis.
The Module Type and Power Structure fields populate with the chosen drive catalog
number.
6. Click Apply.
7. Select the Motor category.
106
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
8. From the Data Source dropdown menu, choose Nameplate Datasheet.
This is the default setting.
9. From the Motor Type dropdown menu, choose Rotary Induction.
10. From the motor nameplate or datasheet, enter the phase-to-phase values for your motor.
See Motor Category on page 213 for a motor performance datasheet example. Also, see
Motor Nameplate Datasheet Entry for Custom Motor Applications, publication 2198-AT002.
11. Click Apply.
Basic Volts/Hertz Method
1.
Configure the General category and Motor category as shown in General and Motor
Categories on page 106.
2. Select the Frequency Control category.
3. From the Frequency Control Method dropdown menu, select Basic Volts/Hertz.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
107
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. Enter the Basic Volts/Hertz attribute values appropriate for your application.
Default values are shown.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameter List category.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
7. From the Parameter Group dropdown menu, choose Frequency Control.
8. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, VelocityDroop, and CurrentVectorLimit attributes appropriate for
your application.
See the corresponding section in Appendix D, beginning on page 201, for information and
configuration examples regarding all of these topics.
9. Click OK.
Sensorless Vector Method
1.
Configure the General category and Motor category as shown in General and Motor
Categories on page 106.
2. Select the Frequency Control category.
3. From the Frequency Control Method dropdown menu, choose Sensorless Vector.
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. Enter the Basic Volts/Hertz values appropriate for your application.
Default values are shown.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameter List category.
7. The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
8. From the Parameter Group dropdown menu, choose Frequency Control.
9. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, VelocityDroop, MaximumFrequency, MaximumVoltage, and
CurrentVectorLimit attributes appropriate for your application.
See the corresponding section in Appendix D, beginning on page 201, for information and
configuration examples regarding all of these topics.
10. Click Apply.
11. Select the Motor>Model category.
Motor model attributes are automatically estimated from the Nameplate/Datasheet
parameters. For improved performance, motor tests can be run.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
109
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
12. Select the Motor>Analyzer category.
The Analyze Motor to Determine Motor Model dialog box opens.
13. Click one of the motor test tabs.
In this example, Calculate Model is chosen. See Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure on
page 215 for information about each of the tests.
14. Click Start.
15. Click Accept Test Results.
16. Click OK.
Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz Method
1.
Configure the General category and Motor category as shown in General and Motor
Categories on page 106.
2. Select the Frequency Control category.
3. From the Frequency Control Method dropdown menu, select Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz.
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
4. Enter the Basic Volts/Hertz attribute values appropriate for your application.
Default values are shown.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameter List category.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
7. From the Parameter Group dropdown menu, choose Frequency Control.
8. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, VelocityDroop, RunBoost, MaximumFrequency, MaximumVoltage
and CurrentVectorLimit attributes appropriate for your application.
See the corresponding section in Appendix D, beginning on page 201, for information and
configuration examples regarding all of these topics.
9. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
111
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure SPM Motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties
Follow these steps to configure surface permanent-magnet (SPM) motor closed-loop axis
properties. These steps apply to the DSD and DSM modules.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General and Associated Module dialog box appears.
3. From the General dropdown menus, change configuration settings as needed for your
application.
IMPORTANT
Frequency Control is not supported for permanent magnet motors.
4. From the Associated Module>Module dropdown menu, choose your ArmorKinetix DSD
module.
The catalog number populates the Module Type and Power Structure fields.
5. Click Apply.
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
6. Select the Motor category.
The Motor Device Specification dialog box appears.
7. From the Data Source dropdown menu, choose Catalog Number.
8. Click Change Catalog.
The Change Catalog Number dialog box appears.
9. Select the motor catalog number appropriate for your application.
To verify the motor catalog number, refer to the motor name plate.
10. Click OK to close the Change Catalog Number dialog box.
11. Click Apply.
Motor data specific to your motor appears in the Nameplate / Datasheet - Phase to Phase
parameters field.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
113
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
12. Select the Scaling category and edit the default values as appropriate for your application.
13. Click Apply, if you make changes.
14. Select the Load category and edit the default values as appropriate for your application.
15. Click Apply, if you make changes.
114
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
16. Select the Actions category.
The Actions to Take Upon Conditions dialog box appears.
From this dialog box you can program actions for the drive module to take. Refer to Logix
5000 Controller and Drive Module Behavior on page 142 for more information.
17. Select the Exceptions category.
The Action to Take Upon Exception Condition dialog box appears.
From this dialog box you can change the action for exceptions (faults). Refer to Logix 5000
Controller and Drive Module Behavior on page 142 for more information.
In the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, Disable replaced StopDrive as
the default Action.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
115
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
18. Select the Parameter List category.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
From this dialog box you can set brake engage and release delay times for servo motors.
The parameter names for the brake delay are MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay and
MechanicalBrakeReleaseDelay. For recommended motor brake delay times, refer to the
Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD001.
19. Click OK.
20. Repeat step 1 through step 19 for each servo motor axis.
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Induction-motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties
Follow these steps to configure induction-motor closed-loop control axis properties. These steps
apply to the ArmorKinetix DSD module only.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General and Associated Module dialog box appears.
3. From the General dropdown menus, change configuration settings as needed for your
application.
4. From the Associated Module>Module dropdown menu, choose your DSD module.
The catalog number populates the Module Type and Power Structure fields.
5. Click Apply.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
117
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
6. Select the Motor category.
The Motor Device Specification dialog box appears.
7. From the Data Source dropdown menu, choose Nameplate Datasheet.
This is the default setting.
IMPORTANT
Motor NV is not a supported data source in the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer application for axes configured as Induction-motor closedloop.
a. Select the Polarity category.
b. For Motor Polarity, click Inverted (default is Normal).
c. Click Apply and return to the Motor category.
8. From the Motor Type dropdown menu, choose Rotary Induction.
9. From the motor nameplate or datasheet, enter the phase-to-phase values for your motor.
See Motor Category on page 213 for a motor performance datasheet example. Also see
Motor Nameplate Datasheet Entry for Custom Motor Applications, publication 2198-AT002.
10. Click Apply.
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
11. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
12. From the Type dropdown menu, choose the feedback type appropriate for your application.
See Configure Motor Feedback Properties on page 123 for feedback configuration examples.
13. Click Apply.
14. Select the Scaling category and edit the default values as appropriate for your application.
15. Click Apply, if you make changes.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
119
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
16. Select the Actions category.
The Actions to Take Upon Conditions dialog box appears.
From this dialog box you can program actions for the drive module to take. Refer to Logix
5000 Controller and Drive Module Behavior on page 142 for more information.
17. Select the Exceptions category.
The Action to Take Upon Exception Condition dialog box appears.
From this dialog box you can change the action for exceptions (faults). Refer to Logix 5000
Controller and Drive Module Behavior on page 142 for more information.
In the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, Disable replaced StopDrive as
the default Action.
120
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
18. Select the Parameter List category.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
19. From the Parameter Group dropdown menu, choose Torque/Current Loop.
20. Set the FluxUp attributes appropriate for your application.
See the corresponding section in Appendix D, beginning on page 201, for information and
configuration examples regarding this topic.
IMPORTANT
The Automatic FluxUpControl setting is recommended for best
autotune results.
21. Click Apply.
22. Select the Load category and edit the default values as appropriate for your application.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
121
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
23. Click Apply, if you make changes.
24. Click OK.
25. Select the Motor>Model category.
Motor model attributes are automatically estimated from the Nameplate/Datasheet
parameters. For improved performance, motor tests can be run.
26. Select the Motor>Analyzer category.
The Analyze Motor to Determine Motor Model dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT
The Dynamic motor test cannot be run without a non-zero motor
inertia.
27. Click the tab corresponding to the Motor Test you want to run.
See Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure on page 215 for information about each of the
tests.
28. Click Start.
29. Click Accept Test Results.
30. Click Apply.
31. Select the Autotune category.
32. Repeat step 1 through step 31 for each induction motor axis.
122
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Motor Feedback Properties
This section provides more configuration detail for module properties and axis properties when
incremental feedback types are used in your application.
Depending on the Motion Safety selection you made when you configured the module definition
(see Add and Configure the DSD or DSM Module > Configure Module Definition on page 94) and the
choices you made when configuring the Associated Axes for your device (see Add an Associated
Axis on page 97)
In this section you configure the axis properties of your ArmorKinetix DSx module for the type of
feedback you intend use in your application.
IMPORTANT
The DSM module is only compatible with DSL feedback type.
Table 44 defines valid feedback assignments for each feedback type.
Table 44 - Valid Feedback Assignments
Permanent Magnet
Motors
Feedback Type
Hiperface DSL
Hiperface
Digital AqB
Digital AqB with UVW
Sine/Cosine
Sine/Cosine with UVW
Induction Motors
Feedback Only
High-resolution
single-turn and
multi-turn, absolute
Motor feedback
Load feedback
Master
feedback
Incremental
Digital AqB (TTL) Feedback
In this example, a motor feedback device is configured for Digital AqB feedback.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
3. Configure the device function and type.
In this example, Motor Feedback is the device function and Digital AqB is the feedback type.
4. Enter values for the Digital AqB specification fields.
The only valid value for Cycle Interpolation is 4.
5. From the Startup Method dropdown menu, choose Incremental.
6. Click Apply.
When the Device Function is Load-Side Feedback or Master Feedback,
configuration is identical to Motor Mounted Feedback.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
123
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Digital AqB with UVW (TTL w/Hall) Feedback
In this example, a motor feedback device is configured for Digital AqB with UVW feedback.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
3. Configure the device function and type.
In this example, Motor Feedback is the device function and Digital AqB with UVW is the
feedback type.
4. Enter values for the Digital AqB with UVW specification fields.
The only valid value for Cycle Interpolation is 4.
5. From the Startup Method dropdown menu, choose Incremental.
6. From the Alignment dropdown menu, choose Not Aligned.
7. Click Apply.
124
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Sine/Cosine Feedback
In this example, a motor feedback device is configured for Sine/Cosine feedback.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
3. Configure the device function and type.
In this example, Motor Feedback is the device function and Sine/Cosine is the feedback type.
4. Enter values for the Sine/Cosine specification fields.
The only valid values for Cycle Interpolation are powers of 2 from 4 through 65536.
5. From the Startup Method dropdown menu, choose Incremental.
6. Click Apply.
When the Device Function is Load-Side Feedback or Master Feedback,
configuration is identical to Motor Mounted Feedback.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
125
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Sine/Cosine with Hall Feedback
In this example, a motor feedback device is configured for Sine/Cosine with UVW feedback.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
3. Configure the device function and type.
In this example, Motor Feedback is the device function and Sine/Cosine with UVW is the
feedback type.
4. Enter values for the Sine/Cosine with UVW specification fields.
The only valid values for Cycle Interpolation are powers of 2 from 4 through 65536.
5. From the Startup Method dropdown menu, choose Incremental.
6. From the Alignment dropdown menu, choose Not Aligned.
7. Click OK.
Hiperface DSL
In this example, a motor feedback device is configured for Hiperface DSL feedback.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor Feedback category.
The Motor Feedback Device Specification dialog box appears.
126
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
3. Configure the device function and type.
In this example, Motor Feedback is the device function and Hiperface DSL is the feedback
type.
4. Enter values for the Hiperface DSL specification fields.
5. From the Startup Method dropdown menu, choose Absolute.
6. From the Alignment dropdown menu, choose Not Aligned.
7. Click OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
127
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Understand Bus-sharing
Group Configuration
When configuring Module Properties>Power category for each ArmorKinetix module, you can
breakout modules from one or more servo systems into multiple bus-sharing (power) groups.
Kinetix 5700 DC Bus supply and a PIM module let you configure a Primary bus-sharing group. The
PIM module also allows a Secondary bus-sharing group. A DSD module or a DSM module let you
configure only a Secondary group.
Figure 50 - Bus-sharing Group Configuration
Bus-sharing Group Example
In Figure 51, twelve axes are needed to support the motion application. All twelve axes are
configured in the same Motion group in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
However, the twelve axes of motion are also configured as two bus-sharing groups in Module
Properties>Power category. By creating two bus-sharing groups, a converter drive that faults in
Group 1 only disables Group 1 drives, and has no effect on the drive operation of Group 2 drive.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment all modules physically connected
to the same shared-bus connection system must be part of the same Bus
Sharing Group in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 51 - Bus-sharing Group Example
CompactLogix Controller Programming Network
Studio 5000 Logix
Designer Application
CompactLogix 5370 Controller
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
Group 1
24V Input Power
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
2
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
MOD
NET
1
2
1
I/O-A
1
6 1
I/O-B
Controller Organizer
MOD
NET
2
1
1
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
1
I/O-A
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
6 1
I/O-B
I/O-A
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
6 1
I/O-B
6
4
I/O
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
Bus Sharing Group 1
Axis_01
Axis_02
Axis_03
Axis_04
Axis_05
Axis_06
Axis_07
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
Module Properties>Power Category
MF-A
MF-B
Three-phase Input Power
Bus Sharing Group 2
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus (converter) Power Supply
Axis_08
Axis_09
Axis_10
Axis_11
Axis_12
2198-D006-ERS3
Dual-axis Inverters
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drive System
Group 2
24V Input Power
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
2
1
1
1
1
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
2
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
I/O
2198-PIM070
6
4
I/O
5
UFB
10
UFB
-
MBRK
+
-
MBRK
+
Three-phase Input Power
2198-P208
DC-bus (converter) Power Supply
2198-S086-ERS3
Single-axis Inverters
2198-DSD-ERSx with Kinetix VPL motor
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
129
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Configure Bus-sharing Groups
In both groups, the Bus Configuration for the converter drive is Shared AC/DC and the Bus
Configuration for the inverter drives is Shared DC.
Figure 52 - Group 1 DC-bus Power Supply (converter) Configuration
Figure 53 - Group 1 Dual-axis Inverter Configuration
Figure 54 - Group 2 DC-bus Power Supply (converter) Configuration
130
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Figure 55 - Group 2 Single-axis Inverter Configuration
Figure 56 - Group 2 PIM Module Configuration
Download the Program
After completing the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application and saving the file you must download
your program to the Logix 5000 processor.
Apply Power to the System
This procedure assumes that you have wired and configured your ArmorKinetix system and your
Logix 5000 controller.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting and
wiring of the 2198 servo drives prior to applying power. Once power is applied,
connector terminals can have voltage present even when not in use.
Follow these steps to apply power to the ArmorKinetix System system.
1. Disconnect the load to the motor.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment,
disconnect the load to the motor. Make sure each motor is free of all
linkages when initially applying power to the system.
2. Apply 24V DC control power.
The PIM module LCD display begins the startup sequence. Refer to Startup Sequence on
page 84. If the startup sequence does not begin, check the 24V control power connections.
3. When the startup sequence completes, verify the following:
a. DC-bus power supply NET status indicators are steady green.
b. DC-bus power supply MOD status indicators are flashing.
c. DC-bus power supply axis-state is PRECHARGE.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
131
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
If the DC-bus power supply does not reach the specified axis state and the two status
indicators are not as specified, refer to Status Indicators on page 139.
IMPORTANT
Apply control power before applying three-phase AC power. This
makes sure the shunt is enabled, which can prevent nuisance faults
or Bus Overvoltage faults.
4. Apply mains input power and monitor the DC BUS voltage on the LCD display.
If the DC BUS does not reach the expected voltage level, check the three-phase input power
connections.
It can take as long as 1.8 seconds after input power is applied before the
module can accept motion commands.
a. Verify that all NET and MOD status indicators are steady green.
b. Verify that the DC-bus power supply axis-state is RUNNING.
If the DC-bus power supply does not reach the specified axis state, refer to Fault Code
Overview on page 138.
132
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Test and Tune the Axes
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
This procedure assumes that you have configured your ArmorKinetix System drive, your
Logix 5000 controller, and applied power to the system.
IMPORTANT
Before proceeding with testing and tuning your axes, verify that the MOD
and NET status indicators are operating as described in Status Indicators on
page 139.
For help using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application as it applies to testing and tuning your
axes with ControlLogix EtherNet/IP modules or CompactLogix 5370 controllers, refer to Additional
Resources on page 9.
Also, see Motor Nameplate Datasheet Entry for Custom Motor Applications, publication 2198-AT002,
for detailed information on testing and tuning custom motors.
Test the Axes
Follow these steps to test the axes.
1. Verify the load was removed from each axis.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment, you
must remove the load from each axis as uncontrolled motion can occur
when an axis with an integral motor brake is released during the test.
2. In your Motion Group folder, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
The Axis Properties dialog box appears.
3. Select the Hookup Tests category.
4. In the Test Distance field, enter the desired test distance.
The Position Units are defined in Axis Properties>Scaling category.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
133
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Hookup Test
Definitions
Marker
Verifies marker detection capability as you manually rotate the motor shaft. The test
completes when the drive either detects the marker or when the motor moves the
distance specified in the Test Distance field. If the marker remains undetected and the
test completes successfully, it means the motor moved the full test distance. If the
marker remains undetected and the test fails, the motor did not move the full test
distance. Run this test after running the Motor Feedback and Motor and Feedback
tests.
Commutation
Verifies the commutation offset and commutation polarity of the motor. This test
applies to third-party or custom permanent-magnet motors equipped with (TTL with
Hall and Sine/Cosine with Hall) incremental encoders that are not available as a catalog
number in the Motion Database. See Commutation Test on page page 235.
Motor Feedback
Verifies feedback connections are wired correctly as you manually rotate the motor
shaft. The test completes when the drive determines that the motor moved the full
distance specified in the Test Distance field. Run this test before the Motor and
Feedback Test to verify that the feedback can be read properly.
Motor and
Feedback
Verifies motor power and feedback connections are wired correctly as the drive
commands the motor to rotate. Because the drive is rotating the motor, this test
requires full bus power to run. Run the Motor Feedback test before running this test to
verify that the feedback is being read correctly.
5. Click the desired test to verify connections.
6. Click Start.
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer - Motor and Feedback Test dialog box appears. The Test
State is Executing.
When the test completes successfully, the Test State changes from Executing to Passed.
7. Click OK.
This dialog box appears asking if the axis moved
in the forward direction.
8. Click Yes if you agree.
9. Click Accept Test Results.
10. If the test fails, this dialog box appears.
a. Click OK.
b. Verify the DC bus voltage.
c. Verify unit values entered in the Scaling category.
d. Verify the motor power and feedback wiring.
e. Return to step 5 and run the test again.
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Tune the Axes
With Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, the load observer and adaptive tuning (tuningless)
features are enabled by default, so configuration is not required for tuningless operation.
If additional tuning is required, see the Motion System Tuning Application Technique, publication
MOTION-AT005, for more information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
135
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the ArmorKinetix System
Notes:
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
This chapter provides troubleshooting tables and related information for your ArmorKinetix®
system.
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when troubleshooting your ArmorKinetix system.
ATTENTION: Capacitors on the DC bus can retain hazardous voltages after
input power has been removed. Before working on the drive module, measure
the DC bus voltage to verify it has reached a safe level or wait the full time
interval as indicated in the warning on the front of the module. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override the module fault circuits. You
must determine the cause of a fault and correct it before you attempt to
operate the system. Failure to correct the fault could result in personal injury
and/or damage to equipment as a result of uncontrolled machine operation.
ATTENTION: Provide an earth ground for test equipment (oscilloscope) used in
troubleshooting. Failure to ground the test equipment could result in personal
injury.
Interpret Status Indicators
Refer to these troubleshooting tables to identify faults, potential causes, and the appropriate
actions to resolve the fault. If the fault persists after attempting to troubleshoot the system, please
contact your Rockwell Automation sales representative for further assistance.
Display Interface
The PIM LCD display provides fault messages and troubleshooting information
by using the soft menu items and navigation buttons.
Under the Main Menu, select FAULT LOG by using the up/down arrows.
MAIN MENU
DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT LOG
Press to display the list of active fault codes.
Press again to display the fault details (the problem in troubleshooting tables).
?
Press to display the fault help (possible solutions in troubleshooting tables).
Refer to Power Interface Module (PIM) Display on page 81 for more information on navigating the
LCD display menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
137
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Fault Code Overview
The fault code tables are designed to help you determine the source of the fault or exception. When
a fault condition is detected, the drive module performs the appropriate fault action, the fault is
displayed, and the fault is added to a persistent fault log (along with diagnostics data). The earlier
faults have priority to be displayed.
The drive module removes the fault text from the display when a Fault Reset service is sent from
the controller and the fault is no longer active. If a fault condition is still active following a Fault
Reset service, the fault is again posted to the display and written to the fault log.
However, there can be a delay before the fault is posted again. In a Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
application, this delay results as the AxisFault tag on the drive axis being cleared until the fault is
posted again. During this delay, the AxisState tag continues to indicate that the axis is faulted. Use
the AxisState tag on the axis object only to determine if an axis is faulted.
Although software overtravel fault codes do not exist, software overtravel detection for the
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis type is determined in the Logix 5000® controller. For more information, see
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP™ Network Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM003.
The PIM, DSD, and DSM modules maintain a fault log of the last 128 faults. The fault log includes time
stamps and is stored in persistent memory. However, the fault log cannot be cleared on the
module. The DSD and DSM modules default to web enable so you can use an internet browser on
the same subnet to access the fault log.
Table 45 - Fault Code Summary
Fault Code Type (1) (2)
Description
FLT Sxx
Standard runtime axis exceptions. The exception can apply to an individual axis or to all
axes.
Manufacturer-specific runtime axis exception. The exception can apply to an individual
axis or to all axes.
FLT Mxx
INIT FLT Sxx
INIT FLT Mxx
NODE FLTxx
NODE ALARM xx
Exceptions that prevent normal operation and occur during the initialization process.
Exceptions that can prevent normal operation of the drive module and apply to the entire
module and affect all axes.
Exceptions that can prevent normal operation of the drive module, but do not result in any
action other than reporting the alarm to the controller.
INHIBIT Sxx
INHIBIT Mxx
ALARM Sxx
ALARM Mxx
Conditions that prevent normal operation and indicate the drive module is prevented from
being enabled.
SAFE FLTxx (3)
Exception generated by a fault condition detected in the safety function. See SAFE FLT
Fault Codes on page 139 for more information.
An underlying exception condition that does not result in any action other than reporting
the alarm to the controller.
(1) Sxx refers to Standard exceptions.
(2) Mxx refers to Manufacturer-specific exceptions.
(3) For troubleshooting 2198-xxxx-ERS5 inverter SAFE FLT fault codes, refer to the ArmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety
Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM007.
Fault codes triggered by conditions that fall outside factory set limits are identified by
FL at the end of the display message.
For example, FLT S07 – MTR OVERLOAD FL. Factory limits are set in the firmware and
are not changeable.
Fault codes triggered by conditions that fall outside user set limits are identified by UL
at the end of the display message.
For example, FLT S08 – MTR OVERLOAD UL. Some UL limits are changeable in the
parameter list. You can change UL limits with Explicit MSG. We do not recommend
altering UL limits without technical analysis or discussion with OEM machine builder.
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Fault Codes
For ArmorKinetix module fault code descriptions and possible solutions,
see Kinetix 5700 System Fault Codes, publication 2198-RD003;
download the spreadsheet for offline access.
SAFE FLT Fault Codes
For troubleshooting 2198-DSx-ERS2 module and 2198-DSx-ERS5 module SAFE FLT fault codes, see
the ArmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM007.
Status Indicators
These status indicators apply to the ArmorKinetix PIM and DSx modules. The module status and
network status indicators are just above the LCD status display.
IMPORTANT
ArmorKinetix PIM Modules
Status indicators are not reliable for safety functions. Use them only for
general diagnostics during commissioning or troubleshooting. Do not
attempt to use status indicators to determine operational status.
Table 46 - Module Status Indicator
Module Status
Network Status
ArmorKinetix DSx Modules
Condition
Steady Off
Steady Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Steady Red
Flashing Green/Red
Module Status
Axis Status
Network Status
Link 2
Link 1
Status
No power applied to the drive.
Drive is operational. No faults or failures.
Standby (drive not configured) and Precharge (drive is configured).
Major recoverable fault. The drive detected a recoverable fault, for example, an incorrect or
inconsistent configuration.
Major fault. The drive detected a non-recoverable fault.
Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup. Once self-test is complete, Flashing
Green/Red condition continues if drive is waiting for:
• Safety configuration when in Integrated STO mode
• Safety inputs when in Hardwired STO mode
Table 47 - Axis Status - DSx Module
Identity Object State
Module Status LED
Nonexistent - Power Off
Device Self-testing
Off
Flashing Red/Green
Standby
Flashing Green
Operational
Solid Green
Major Recoverable Fault
Flashing Red
Major Unrecoverable Fault Solid Red
Motion Device Axis
Object State
Off
Self-test
Initialization - Bus not Up
Initialization - Bus Up
Shutdown - Bus not Up
Shutdown - Bus Up
Pre-charge - Bus not Up
Start Inhibit
Stopped
Stopping
Starting
Running
Testing
Aborting
Major Faulted
Aborting
Major Faulted
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Axis Status LED
Off
Flashing Red/Green
Off
Flashing Green
Off
Flashing Amber
Off
Flashing Amber
Flashing Green
Solid Green
Solid Green
Solid Green
Solid Green
Flashing Red
Flashing Red
Solid Red
Solid Red
139
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Table 48 - Network Status Indicator (Link 1 and Link 2) - DSx Module
Condition
Steady Off
Flashing Green
Steady Green
Flashing Red
Steady Red
Ethernet RJ45 Connectors PIM Module
Flashing Green/Red
Status
No power applied to the drive or IP address is not configured.
No Motion or Safety connection is established, but drive has obtained an IP address.
Motion or Safety connection is established and no timeout has occurred. Normal operation.
Connection timeout. One or more of the connections, for which this drive is the target, has
timed out.
Duplicate IP address. IP address specified is already in use.
Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup. Once self-test is complete, Flashing
Green/Red condition continues if drive is processing a safety device ID proposal.
Table 49 - Ethernet Link/Activity Status Indicator - PIM Module
Link/Activity
Status Indicators
General Troubleshooting
Condition
Steady Off
Steady On
Blinking
Status
No link
Link established but no activity
Network activity
These conditions do not always result in a fault code, but can require troubleshooting to improve
servo drive performance.
Table 50 - General Troubleshooting
Condition
Axis or system is unstable.
You cannot obtain the motor
acceleration/deceleration that
you want.
140
Potential Cause
Possible Resolution
The position feedback device is incorrect or open.
Check wiring.
Unintentionally in Torque mode.
Check to see what primary operation mode was programmed.
Motor tuning limits are set too high.
Run Tune in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Position loop gain or position controller accel/decel rate is improperly Run Tune in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
set.
Improper grounding or shielding techniques are causing noise to be
transmitted into the position feedback or velocity command lines,
Check wiring and ground.
causing erratic axis movement.
Motor Select limit is incorrectly set (servo motor is not matched to axis • Check setups.
module).
• Run Tune in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
• Notch filter or output filter can be required (refer to Axis Properties
dialog box, Compliance tab in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application).
Mechanical resonance.
• Enable adaptive tuning. See Adaptive Tuning on page 239 for more
notch filter information.
Torque Limit limits are set too low.
Verify that torque limits are set properly.
Select the correct motor and run Tune in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Incorrect motor selected in configuration.
application again.
• Check motor size versus application need.
The system inertia is excessive.
• Review servo system sizing.
The system friction torque is excessive.
Check motor size versus application need.
• Check motor size versus application need.
Available current is insufficient to supply the correct accel/decel rate.
• Review servo system sizing.
Acceleration limit is incorrect.
Verify limit settings and correct them, as necessary.
Velocity Limit limits are incorrect.
Verify limit settings and correct them, as necessary.
The motor is operating in the field-weakening range of operation.
Reduce the commanded acceleration or deceleration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Table 50 - General Troubleshooting (Continued)
Condition
Potential Cause
The axis cannot be enabled until stopping time has expired.
The motor wiring is open.
The motor cable shield connection is improper.
Motor does not respond to a
command.
The motor has malfunctioned.
The coupling between motor and machine has broken (for example,
the motor moves, but the load/machine does not).
Primary operation mode is set incorrectly.
Velocity or torque limits are set incorrectly.
Brake connector not wired
Recommended grounding per installation instructions have not been
followed.
Presence of noise on command
or motor feedback signal wires. Line frequency can be present.
No rotation
Motor overheating
Abnormal noise
Erratic operation - Motor locks
into position, runs without
control or with reduced torque.
AC Contactor won't close
Possible Resolution
Disable the axis, wait the configured stopping time, and enable the axis.
Check the wiring.
• Check feedback connections.
• Check cable shield connections.
Repair or replace the motor.
Check and correct the mechanics.
Check to see what primary operation mode was programmed.
Check and properly set the limits.
Check brake wiring
• Verify grounding.
• Route wire away from noise sources.
• Refer to System Design for Control of Electrical Noise, publication
GMC-RM001.
• Verify grounding.
• Route wire away from noise sources.
Variable frequency can be velocity feedback ripple or a disturbance • Decouple the motor for verification.
caused by gear teeth or ballscrew, and so forth. The frequency can be
a multiple of the motor power transmission components or ballscrew • Check and improve mechanical performance, for example, the
gearbox or ballscrew mechanism.
speeds resulting in velocity disturbance.
The motor connections are loose or open.
Check motor wiring and connections.
Foreign matter is lodged in the motor.
Remove foreign matter.
The motor load is excessive.
Verify the servo system sizing.
The bearings are worn.
Return the motor for repair.
• Check brake wiring and function.
The motor brake is engaged (if supplied).
• Return the motor for repair.
The motor is not connect to the load.
Check coupling.
The duty cycle is excessive.
Change the command profile to reduce accel/decel or increase time.
The rotor is partially demagnetized causing excessive motor current. Return the motor for repair.
Motor tuning limits are set too high.
Run Tune in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
• Remove the loose parts.
Loose parts are present in the motor.
• Return motor for repair.
• Replace motor.
Through bolts or coupling is loose.
Tighten bolts.
The bearings are worn.
Return motor for repair.
Notch
filter can be required (refer to Axis Properties dialog box,
Mechanical resonance.
Compliance tab in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application).
Motor power phases U and V, U and W, or V and W reversed.
Check and correct motor power wiring.
Stuck in configuring.
Check for messages on quick view pane of the controller organizer in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Plug in the contactor enable.
Replace contactor.
Contactor enable unplugged on DFE module.
AC contactor coil failure.
These conditions do not always result in a fault code, but can require troubleshooting to improve
bus supply performance.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
141
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Table 51 - PIM Module Troubleshooting
Condition
Absence of (or fluctuations on)
the PIM module output voltage
under control power only (No
58V)
Potential Cause
Possible Solution
DC Control input Voltage to the PIM module is out of range of operation. PIM module Input Voltage should be within the range of 21.6…26.4V.
The 24V supply current capability is not enough to supply the PIM
Size the 24V supply properly.
module load.
Do not exceed the maximum allowed external bus capacitance. See
External bus capacitance exceeds the maximum limit.
Calculate System and External-bus Capacitance on page 191.
One or both PIM module DC Bus fuses are open.
Replace fuses.
Do not connect more than 24 axes to one PIM module. See Calculate 24V
PIM module Load current exceeds the limits.
DC Control Power Current Demand on page 193.
Logix 5000 Controller and
Drive Module Behavior
By using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, you can configure how the ArmorKinetix
system responds when a module fault/exception occurs.
The INIT FLT xxx faults are always generated after powerup, but before the drive is
enabled, so the stopping behavior does not apply.
NODE ALARM xxx faults do not apply because they do not trigger stopping behavior.
For troubleshooting SAFE FLT fault codes, refer to Chapter 9 on page 268 (integrated
safety).
The DC-bus power supplies and servo drives support fault actions for Ignore, Alarm, Minor Fault,
and Major Fault as defined in Table 52. The drives also support five configurable stopping actions
as defined in Table 56.
Table 52 - ArmorKinetix Module Exception Action Definitions
Exception Action
Ignore
Alarm
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Definition
The drive module completely ignores the exception condition. For some exceptions that are
fundamental to the operation of the planner, Ignore is not an available option.
The drive module sets the associated bit in the Motion Alarm Status word, but does not otherwise
affect axis behavior. Like Ignore, if the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Alarm is not an
available option. When an exception action is set to Alarm, the Alarm goes away by itself when
the exceptional condition has cleared.
The drive module latches the exception condition, but the drive does not execute any exception
action.
The drive module latches the exception condition and executes the configured exception action.
You can configure exception behavior in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application from the Axis
Properties dialog box, Actions category. These controller exception actions are mapped to the drive
exception actions.
Table 53 - Studio 5000 Logix Designer Exception Action Definitions
Exception Action
Ignore
Alarm
Fault Status Only
Stop Planner
Disable
Shutdown
142
Definition
The controller completely ignores the exception condition. For some exceptions that are fundamental to the operation of the planner, Ignore is not
an available option.
The controller sets the associated bit in the Motion Alarm Status word, but does not otherwise affect axis behavior. Like Ignore, if the exception is so
fundamental to the drive, Alarm is not an available option. When an exception action is set to Alarm, the Alarm goes away by itself when the
exceptional condition has cleared.
Like Alarm, Fault Status Only instructs the controller to set the associated bit in the Motion Fault Status word, but does not otherwise affect axis
behavior. However, unlike Alarm an explicit Fault Reset is required to clear the fault once the exceptional condition has cleared. Like Ignore and
Alarm, if the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Fault Status Only is not an available option.
The controller sets the associated bit in the Motion Fault Status word and instructs the Motion Planner to perform a controlled stop of all planned
motion at the configured maximum deceleration rate. An explicit Fault Reset is required to clear the fault once the exceptional condition has
cleared. If the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Stop Planner is not an available option.
When the exception occurs, the associated bit in the Fault Status word is set and the axis comes to a stop by using the stopping action defined by
the drive for the particular exception that occurred. In the event of a fault, there is no controller-based configuration to specify what the stopping
action is. The stopping action is device dependent.
Shutdown forces the axis into the Shutdown state, abruptly stops the motion planner, disables any gearing or camming operation that specifies this
axis as a master axis, and immediately disables the associated power structure of the drive. If configured to do so by the Shutdown Action
attribute, the drive device may also open a contactor to drop DC Bus power to the power structure of the drive. An explicit Shutdown Reset is
required to restore the drive to an operational state.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
PIM Module Behavior
Stopping action for exception fault codes does not apply to the PIM module. The Disable exception
action for a PIM module means the module enters into a Major Fault state. The Shutdown exception
action exhibits the same behavior as Disable, except the PIM module enters into Shutdown as the
final state and requires a Shutdown Reset to recover.
Fault actions are shown in Table 54 and Table 55.
Figure 57 - Studio 5000 Logix Designer Axis Properties - Exceptions Tab
y
Table 54 - PIM Module Behavior, FLT Sxx Fault Codes
Exception Fault Code
Exception Text
FLT S15 CONVERTER OVERCURRENT
FLT S27 – BUS REG OVERTEMP FL (1)
FLT S32 – BUS CAPACITOR MODULE
FAILURE
FLT S35 BUS OVERVOLTAGE FL
FLT S38 – BUS POWER FUSE BLOWN
FAULT
Fault Action
Ignore
Alarm
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Converter Overcurrent Fault
Bus Regulator Overtemperature Factory Limit
Fault
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
X
Bus Capacitor Module Failure
X
X
X
X
Bus Overvoltage Factory Limit
—
—
—
X
Bus Power Fuse Blown Fault
—
—
—
X
Best Available
Stopping Action
(applies to major faults)
The PIM module does not
perform stopping actions.
(1) Supported when shunt thermal switch is connected to the power supply digital input and configured in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Table 55 - PIM Module Behavior, FLT Mxx Fault Codes
Exception Fault Code
Exception Text
FLT M26 – RUNTIME ERROR
Runtime Error
Fault Action
Ignore
Alarm
Minor Fault
Major Fault
—
—
—
X
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Best Available
Stopping Action
(applies to major faults)
The PIM module does not
perform stopping actions.
143
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
ArmorKinetix Behavior
For the ArmorKinetix modules, only selected exceptions are configurable. In the drive behavior
tables, the controlling attribute is given for programmable fault actions.
Table 56 - Configurable Stopping Actions
Stopping Action
Description
Ramped Decel & Hold (1)
Most control
Current Decel & Hold
Most control
Ramped Decel & Disable (1)
Current Decel & Disable
Less control
Disable & Coast (2)
Least control
Less control
The best available stopping action is the one that maintains the
most control over the motor. However, not all faults support
every stopping action.
(1) Ramped Decel is available only when General>Axis Configuration is set to Velocity Loop or Frequency Control.
(2) When configured for Frequency Control (induction motors only), select Decel & Disable only when the Current Limiting feature is
enabled. For more information on this feature, see Current Limiting for Frequency Control on page 208.
Actions define the drive behavior in response to specific conditions. The Actions category includes
Standard Actions and Safety Actions.
Table 57 - Actions Definitions
Action Category
Action Name
Action Trigger Condition
Disable (MSF) Stopping Action
Standard
Connection Loss Stopping Action
Motor Overload Action
Inverter Overload Action
Safe Torque Off Action
Safety
Safe Stopping Action
Available Actions
• Ramped Decel & Hold
• Current Decel & Hold
Execution of an MSF motion instruction.
• Ramped Decel & Disable
• Current Decel & Disable
• Disable & Coast
• Ramped Decel & Disable
Loss of the motion connection (for example, inhibiting the module or a network • Current Decel & Disable
cable disconnect).
• Disable & Coast
• Current Foldback
Receiving MTR OVERLOAD fault.
• None
• Current Foldback
Receiving INV OVERLOAD fault.
• None
• Ramped Decel & Disable
Transition from logic 0 to 1 of the SafeTorqueOffActiveStatus axis tag, which
• Current Decel & Disable
indicates a safe torque-off action was commanded (STO). (1)
• Disable & Coast
Transition from logic 0 to 1 of the SS1ActiveStatus or SS2ActiveStatus axis tag
• Ramped Decel (3)
(2)
which indicates a safe stopping action was commanded (SS1, SS2).
• Current Decel
(1) This action is executed only if the axis tag transitions due to a requested STO, not if it was triggered by another safe-stop function (SS1, for example).
(2) See Knowledgebase Technote: Kinetix 5700 ERS4 Drive based SS1 monitored - Stopping method for more information.
(3) Applies to only Velocity Control mode.
Standard Actions
When a control connection update fault (NODE FLT 01) occurs or a controller connection loss fault
(NODE FLT 06) occurs, that other node faults can occur first, which triggers a fault action of Current
Decel & Disable. Without knowing if NODE FLT 01 or NODE FLT 06 will occur first on a connection loss
fault, we recommend that you do not change the default connection loss setting of Current Decel &
Disable.
Use DLR ring topology (see Ring Topology on page 15) for applications where the
possibility of connection loss must be minimized.
Safety Actions
The Action Source dropdown menus include Connected Drive mode and Running Controller mode.
When configured for Connected Drive (default), the drive initiates the stopping sequence according
to the selected stopping action. However, the drive must have an open connection to the motion
controller for the configured stopping action to occur.
144
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
When configured for Running Controller and the controller is in Run mode, the stopping sequence is
controlled by your application program in the motion controller. This provides flexibility based on
your application and requires that your program provide the desired action in response to the
safety function active status. If no logic is created, no stopping action occurs. If the motion
controller is in Program mode (not actively running the application program), the drive ignores the
Action Source and initiates the configured stopping sequence according to the corresponding
Action selected in the dropdown menu.
Figure 58 - Studio 5000 Logix Designer Axis Properties - Actions Category
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
145
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Behavior and Exception Fault Codes
Table 58…Table 60 provide module behavior and the exception fault codes.
Table 58 - Drive Behavior, FLT Sxx Fault Codes
Permanent Induction
Magnet
Motor
Motor
Exception Fault Code
Exception Text
FLT S04 – MTR OVERSPEED UL
Motor Overspeed User Limit Fault
X
X
FLT S05 – MTR OVERTEMP FL
Motor Overtemperature Factory Limit Fault (If
#589 vertical load control)
Motor Overtemperature Factory Limit Fault (If not
#589 vertical load control)
X
X
FLT S07 – MTR OVERLOAD FL
Motor Thermal Overload Factory Limit Fault
X
FLT S08 – MTR OVERLOAD UL
Motor Thermal OverLoad User Limit Fault
Fault Action
Ignore Alarm Minor
Fault
Major
Fault
Best Available
Stopping Action
(applies to major
faults)
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
–
–
–
–
Current Decel/Disable
–
–
–
–
Disable/Coast
X
–
–
–
X
Ramped Decel (1)/
Disable
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
–
–
–
X
X
FLT S13 – INV OVERLOAD FL
Inverter Overtemperature Factory Limit Fault (If
#589 vertical load control)
Inverter Overtemperature Factory Limit Fault (If
not #589 vertical load control)
Inverter Thermal Overload Factory Limit Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Current Decel/Disable
FLT S14 – INV OVERLOAD UL
Inverter Thermal Overload User Limit Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S22 – AC POWER LOSS
Converter AC Power Loss Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/
Disable
FLT S32 – BUS CAPACITOR MODULE
FAILURE
FLT S33 – BUS UNDERVOLT FL
Bus Capacitor Module Failure
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
Bus Undervoltage Factory Limit Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Disable/Coast
FLT S34 – BUS UNDERVOLT UL
Bus Undervoltage User Limit Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
FLT S35 – BUS OVERVOLT FL
Bus Overvoltage Factory Limit Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
Disable/Coast
FLT S37 – BUS POWER LOSS
Bus Power Loss
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/
Disable
FLT S40 – BUS POWER SHARING
FAULT
Bus Power Sharing Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/
Disable
FLT S44 – FDBK LOSS UL (2)
Feedback Signal Loss UL
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S46 – FDBK COMM UL (2)
Motor Feedback Data Loss User Limit Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S49 – BRAKE SLIP FLT
Brake Slip Exception
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S50 – POS HW OTRAVEL
Hardware Overtravel - Positive
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S51 – NEG HW OTRAVEL
Hardware Overtravel - Negative
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
X
X
X
X
X
X
FLT S11 – INV OVERTEMP FL
FLT S54 – POSN ERROR (2)
FLT S55 – VEL ERROR (2)
Excessive Position Error Fault
(If #589 vertical load control)
Excessive Position Error Fault
(If not #589 vertical load control)
Excessive Velocity Error Fault
(If #589 vertical load control)
Excessive Velocity Error Fault
(If not #589 vertical load control)
Current Decel/Disable
X
–
–
–
Disable/Coast
Current Decel/Disable
Disable/Coast
Current Decel/Disable
X
X
X
X
X
X
Disable/Coast
FLT S56 – OVERTORQUE LIMIT (2)
Overtorque Limit Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S57 – UNDERTORQUE LIMIT (2)
Undertorque Limit Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Hold
FLT S61 – ENABLE INPUT
Enable Input Deactivated
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ramped Decel (1)/
Disable
(1) Available only in Velocity Control mode. Available stopping action is Current Decel in Position Control mode.
(2) Does not apply to induction motors in frequency control mode.
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Table 59 - Drive Behavior, FLT Mxx Fault Codes
Permanent Induction
Magnet
Motor
Motor
Fault Action
Best Available
Stopping Action DSD/
DSM (1)
(applies to major
faults)
Exception Fault Code
Exception Text
FLT M02 – MOTOR VOLTAGE (2)
FLT M05 – FDBK BATTERY LOSS
FLT M06 – FDBK BATTERY LOW
FLT M07 – FEEDBACK
INCREMENTAL
COUNT ERROR FAULT
FLT M26 – RUNTIME ERROR
Motor Voltage Mismatch Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Disable/Coast
Feedback Battery Loss Fault
Feedback Battery Low Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
–
X
–
X
X
X
Disable/Coast
Disable/Coast
Feedback Incremental Count
Error Fault
X
X
X
X
X
X
Disable/Coast
Runtime Error
Safety Module Communication
Error
X
X
–
–
–
X
Disable/Coast
X
X
–
–
–
X
Disable/Coast
Major
Fault
Best Available
Stopping Action
(applies to major
faults)
FLT M28 – SAFETY COMM (3)
Ignore Alarm Minor
Fault
Major
Fault
(1) The PIM module does not have Stopping Action.
(2) Does not apply to induction motors in frequency control mode.
(3) Applies to drives in Integrated STO mode.
Table 60 - Drive Behavior, NODE FLT Fault Codes
Permanent Induction
Magnet
Motor
Motor
Fault Action
Exception Fault Code
Exception Text
NODE FLT 01 – LATE CTRL UPDATE
Control Connection Update Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Disable
NODE FLT 05 – CLOCK SKEW FLT
Clock Skew Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Ramped Decel (1)/Disable
Ignore Alarm Minor
Fault
NODE FLT 06 – LOST CTRL CONN
Lost Controller Connection Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Programmable per (2)
Connection Loss Stopping
Action (see Table 57 on
page 144).
NODE FLT 07 – CLOCK SYNC
Clock Sync Fault
X
X
–
–
–
X
Ramped Decel(1)/Disable
(1) Available only in Velocity Control mode. Available stopping action is Current Decel in Position Control mode.
(2) Do not change the default stopping action.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
147
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the ArmorKinetix System
Notes:
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
8
Remove and Replace PIM and DSx Modules
This chapter provides remove and replace procedures for ArmorKinetix® system modules.
ATTENTION: This drive contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts
and assemblies. You are required to follow static-control precautions when you
install, test, service, or repair this assembly. If you do not follow ESD control
procedures, components can be damaged. If you are not familiar with static
control procedures, refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage, publication
8000-4.5.2, or any other applicable ESD awareness handbook.
Before You Begin
When each in-cabinet drive module is installed, network settings are configured from the setup
screens. Before removing the module, revisit the Network menu and make note of the static IP or
DHCP settings. Refer to Set Network Parameters for the PIM Module on page 84 to access those
settings.
IMPORTANT
If you intend to use the same Studio 5000 Logix Designer application after
replacing your module, the new module must be the same catalog number
as the old module.
IMPORTANT
If replacing a drive module that was configured for integrated safety, see
Understand Integrated Safety Drive Replacement on page 161.
You also need these tools available before you begin removal and replacement procedures:
• Screwdrivers (to loosen/remove screws)
• Voltmeter (to make sure that no voltage exists on drive connectors)
Remove Power and All
Connections
Follow these steps to remove power from all power supplies and drives in the system. See
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002, to remove power from the drives,
and DC Bus.
1. Verify that all control and input power has been removed from the system.
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard or personal injury, make sure that
all power has been removed before proceeding. This system can have
multiple sources of power. More than one disconnect switch can be
required to de-energize the system.
2. Wait 5 minutes for the DC bus to discharge completely before proceeding.
SHOCK HAZARD: This product contains stored energy devices. To avoid
the hazard of electrical shock, verify that voltage on capacitors has been
discharged before attempting to service, repair, or remove this unit. Do not
attempt the procedures in this document unless you are qualified to do so
and are familiar with solid-state control equipment and the safety
procedures in publication NFPA 70E.
3. Using a voltmeter, verify that the DC-bus voltage has discharged.
4. Label and remove all wiring connectors from the module that you are removing.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
149
Chapter 8
Remove and Replace PIM and DSx Modules
To identify each connector, refer to DC Bus Connector on page 57.
5. Unplug the DC-bus links and end caps from on top of the power supply, inverters, PIM
module, and accessory modules you are removing.
6. Unplug the shared-bus 24V input wiring connector, T-connectors, and bus-bars from on top
of the PIM module that you are removing (if applicable).
7. For 2198-DSx-ERSx modules, unplug the hybrid cables, motor power and feedback cable,
and digital input cable.
8. For ArmorKinetix PIM modules, unplug the DC Power Connector and the Ethernet network
connector.
9. Remove the ground screw or lug nut and braided ground strap.
PIM Module
Ground Screw or Lug Nut
Braided Ground Strap
Remove the PIM Module
You can remove DC-bus power supplies, PIM modules, or accessory modules from the panel in any
configuration by using the same procedure.
IMPORTANT
This procedure applies to any ArmorKinetix PIM module in any configuration.
Follow these steps to remove ArmorKinetix PIM modules from the panel.
1. Loosen the top and bottom screws of the module you are removing.
Modules with 55 mm width have one top and bottom screw.
2. For the ArmorKinetix PIM modules, grasp the top and bottom of the module with both hands
and pull the module straight out and away from the panel, clearing the zero-stack mounting
tabs and cutouts.
2
Top Screws
(bottom screws not shown)
1
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 8
Remove and Replace PIM and DSx Modules
Replace the PIM Module
To replace the PIM module, reverse the steps that are shown above or refer to Mount the In-cabinet
Modules on page 44.
Table 61 - Drive Module Torque Values
Kinetix 5700 Drive Module
Cat. No.
All Kinetix 5700 and ArmorKinetix modules
2198-Pxxx
Start and Configure the
Drive Module
Fasteners
Module mounting screws
Module ground lug
Input power connector screws
Torque Value
N•m (lb•in)
4.0 (35.4)
0.8 (7.1)
Follow these steps to configure the replacement module.
IMPORTANT
If you intend to use the same Studio 5000 Logix Designer application after
replacing your drive module, the new module must be the same catalog
number as the old module.
IMPORTANT
If a servo drive was previously configured by a safety controller, reset the
drive to the Out of Box state. Refer to Out-of-Box State on page 159.
1.
Reapply power to the drive system.
Refer to Apply Power to the System on page 131 for the procedure.
2. Configure the network settings for the module.
For example, if your old module was configured as Static IP, you must set the IP address,
gateway, and subnet mask in the new module identical to the old module.
Refer to Set Network Parameters for the PIM Module on page 84 to access those settings.
3. Download the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to the controller.
4. Verify that the drive system is working properly.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
151
Chapter 8
Remove and Replace PIM and DSx Modules
Notes:
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter
9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Use this chapter to become familiar with the safe torque-off functionality built into ArmorKinetix®
system.
Overview
This chapter covers integrated STO and SS1 timed on 2198-DSx-ERS2 and safe monitor functions on
2198-DSx-ERS5, see the ArmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM007. The ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM have both ERS2 and ERS5
implementations.
The 2198-DSx-ERS2 supports:
• Integrated STO
• Timed Safe Stop (SS1-t)
The 2198-DSx-ERS5 supports:
• Integrated STO
• Timed Safe Stop (SS1-t)
• Monitored Safe Stop (SS1-r)
•
Safe Stop (SS2)(1)
•
Safe Operational Stop (SOS)(1)
•
Safely-limited Speed (SLS)(1)
•
Safe Direction (SDI)(1)
In Integrated STO mode, the GuardLogix® safety controller issues the STO command over the
EtherNet/IP™ network and the 2198-DSx-ERS2 and 2198-DSx-ERS5 inverters execute the STO
command.
For integrated Monitored SS1 and Timed SS1 stopping function operations, see the ArmorKinetix
System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM007.
Table 62 - ArmorKinetix Functional Safety Mode Support
Safety Mode
Integrated STO mode
Monitored SS1 stopping function
Timed SS1 stopping function
DSD or DSM Module
Cat. No.
2198-DSx-ERS2
2198-DSx-ERS5
2198-DSx-ERS5
2198-DSx-ERS2
2198-DSx-ERS5
(1) These functions are available through the safety controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
153
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Certification
For product certifications currently available from Rockwell Automation, go
to rok.auto/certifications.
Distributed Servo Drive (DSD)
The TÜV Rheinland group has approved 2198-DSD modules with integrated safe torque-off for use
in safety-related applications up to SIL CL3, according to EN/IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 61508, and
EN/IEC 62061; up to Performance Level PLe and Category 3, according to EN/ISO 13849-1; when
used as described in the ArmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM007.
Distributed Servo Motor (DSM)
For STO and SS1:
The TÜV Rheinland group has approved 2198-DSM modules with integrated safe torque-off for use
in safety-related applications up to SIL CL3, according to EN/IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 61508, and
EN/IEC 62061; up to Performance Level PLe and Category 3, according to EN/ISO 13849-1; when
used as described in the AmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM007.
For Monitoring Function:
The TÜV Rheinland group has approved 2198-DSM modules with integrated safe torque-off for use
in safety-related applications up to SIL CL2, according to EN/IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 61508, and
EN/IEC 62061; up to Performance Level PLd and Category 3, according to EN/ISO 13849-1; when
used as described in the ArmorKinetix System Safe Monitor Functions Safety Reference Manual,
publication 2198-RM007.
Important Safety Considerations
The system user is responsible for the following:
• Validation of any sensors or actuators connected to the system
• Completing a machine-level risk assessment
• Certification of the machine to the desired EN/ISO 13849-1 performance level or
EN/IEC 62061 SIL level
• Project management and proof testing in accordance with EN/ISO 13849-1
Stop Category Definition
Stop Category 0 as defined in EN/IEC 60204-1 or safe torque-off as defined by EN/IEC 61800-5-2 is
achieved with immediate removal of motion producing power to the actuator.
IMPORTANT
In the event of a malfunction, the most likely stop category is
Stop Category 0. When designing the machine application, timing and
distance must be considered for a coast to stop. For more information
regarding stop categories, refer to EN/IEC 60204-1.
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
For safety-related control systems, Performance Level (PL), according to EN/ISO 13849-1, and SIL
levels, according to IEC 61508 and EN/IEC 62061, include a rating of the systems ability to perform
its safety functions. All of the safety-related components of the control system must be included in
both a risk assessment and the determination of the achieved levels.
154
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Refer to the EN/ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, and EN/IEC 62061 standards for complete information on
requirements for PL and SIL determination.
Average Frequency of a Dangerous Failure
Safety-related systems are classified as operating in a High-demand/continuous mode. The SIL
value for a High-demand/continuous mode safety-related system is directly related to the
probability of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH).
PFH calculation is based on the equations from IEC 61508 and show worst-case values. Table 63
and Table 64 provide data for a 20-year proof test interval and demonstrates the worst-case effect
of various configuration changes on the data.
IMPORTANT
Determination of safety parameters is based on the assumptions that the
system operates in High-demand mode and that the safety function is
requested at least once every three months.
Table 63 - PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval - DSD Modules
Attribute
PFH (1e-9) (under worst case conditions)
HFT (hardware fault tolerance) (1)
Proof test (years)
MTTFd (Mean Time to Failure) years
DC avg (Diagnostic Coverage) %
Category
PL (Performance Level)
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)
SFF (Safe Failure Fraction) %
2198-DSD-ERS2
Single-axis Inverters
3.38
2198-DSD-ERS5
Single-axis Inverters
3.38
1
1
20
128
90
3
e - for support of the safety stopping functions
d - for support of monitoring functions
3 - for support of the stopping functions
2 - for support of monitoring functions
95
20
128
90
3
e - for support of the safety stopping functions
up to 3
95
(1) A hardware fault tolerance of N means that N+1 is the minimum number of faults that can cause a loss of the safety function as defined by IEC 61508-2.
The DSM module is equipped with a Hiperface DSL functional safety-rated feedback sensor, which
is designed to maintain the functional safety rating of the feedback sensor attached.
Table 64 - PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval - DSM Module Encoder Reliability Data
Attribute
Probability of a Dangerous
Failure per Hour (PFH)
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x075xx-W
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x1xxxx-T
350.0 x 10 -9 at 115 °C (239 °F) ambient temperature
370.0 x 10 -9 at 115 °C (239 °F) ambient temperature
Compatible Safety Controllers
A GuardLogix 5580 or Compact GuardLogix 5380 safety controller is required for integrated safety
control of the ArmorKinetix safe torque-off function.
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application, version 35.00.00 or later, provides support for
programming, commissioning, and maintaining Logix 5000® safety controllers with ArmorKinetix
systems.
The safety connection can originate from either of these controller configurations:
• Single safety controller that provides both safety and motion control
• Safety controller that controls only the safety, with a separate ControlLogix® 5570,
ControlLogix 5580, CompactLogix™ 5370, or CompactLogix 5380 controller that controls
motion
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
155
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Table 65 - Studio 5000 Logix Designer Requirements
Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Application
Version 35.00.00 or later
ArmorKinetix Modules
Cat. No.
2198-DSx-ERS2
2198-DSx-ERS5
Safety Application Requirements
Safety application requirements include evaluating probability of failure rates (PFH), system
reaction time settings, and functional validation tests that fulfill SIL 3 criteria. Refer to Average
Frequency of a Dangerous Failure on page 155 for more PFH information.
Creating, recording, and verifying the safety signature is also a required part of the safety
application development process. Safety signatures are created by the safety controller. The safety
signature consists of an identification number, date, and time that uniquely identifies the safety
portion of a project. This includes all safety logic, data, and safety I/O configuration.
For safety system requirements, including information on the safety network number (SNN),
verifying the safety signature, and functional verification tests refer to the appropriate GuardLogix
controller publication as defined in Additional Resources on page 9.
IMPORTANT
Description of Operation
You must read, understand, and fulfill the requirements detailed in the
GuardLogix controller systems safety reference manual prior to
operating a safety system that uses a GuardLogix controller and
ArmorKinetix DSD and DSM modules.
The safe torque-off (STO) feature provides a method, with sufficiently low probability of failure, to
force the power-transistor control signals to a disabled state. When the command to execute the
STO function is received from the GuardLogix controller, all of the drive output-power transistors
are released from the ON-state. This results in a condition where the drive IGBT disables and the
motor coasts. Disabling the power transistor output does not provide isolation of the electrical
output that is required for some applications.
These conditions must be met for integrated control of the STO function:
• The module must be configured for Safety Only or Motion and Safety connections
The ArmorKinetix system STO function response time is less than 10 ms. Response time for the
drive is the delay between the time the drive receives the CIP Safety™ packet with an STO request
and the time when motion producing power is removed from the motor.
Table 66 - Safe Torque-off Network Specifications
Attribute
STO function response time
Safety connection RPI, min
2198-DSx-ERS2
10 ms, max
6 ms
2198-DSx-ERS5
Input assembly connections (1)
3 (Drv:SI)
1 (Drv:SI)
Output assembly connections (1)
Integrated safety open request support
1 (Drv:SO)
Type 1 and Type 2 requests
(1) Motion and Safety and Safety Only connections with the inverter uses 1 input assembly connection and 1 output assembly
connection.
Safe Torque-off Assembly Tags
In Integrated safe torque-off (STO) mode, a GuardLogix 5580 or Compact GuardLogix 5380 safety
controller commands the ArmorKinetix system safe torque-off function through the appropriate
tag in the safety output assembly.
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
The SO.Command tags are sent from the GuardLogix safety output assembly to the ArmorKinetix
system safety output assembly to control the safe torque-off function.
The SI.Status tags are sent from the ArmorKinetix DSx module to the GuardLogix safety input
assembly and indicate the ArmorKinetix system safety control status.
The SI.ConnectionStatus tags indicate the safety input connection status.
Table 67 lists the Integrated STO safety tags added to the controller tags when an ArmorKinetix DSx
module is added to a GuardLogix I/O Configuration and the connection is configured for Motion and
Safety or Safety Only. The full list can be found in the Kinetix 5700 Safe Monitor Functions Safety
Reference Manual, publication 2198-RM001.
The attribute values listed are the Assembly Object attribute values.
Table 67 - DSx Inverter Integrated STO Specifications
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Tag
Name
SI.ConnectionStatus (1) (2)
SI.RunMode
SI.ConnectionFault
Attribute
[bit]
Description
DINT
[0]
[1]
SI.Status (1) (3)
BOOL
BOOL
Combinations of the RunMode and
ConnectionFaulted states
SINT
SI.TorqueDisabled
[0]
BOOL
SI.SafetyFault
SI.RestartRequired
[6]
[7]
BOOL
BOOL
SO.Command (1) (4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Type
0 = Torque Permitted
1 = Torque Disabled
1 = STO fault present
1 = Restart is required
SINT
SO.STOOutput
[0]
BOOL
SO.ResetRequest
[7]
BOOL
0 = Disable Permit
1 = Permit Torque
0 --> 1 = Reset STO fault
Bits not listed are always zero.
ConnectionStatus is determined by the Safety Validator in the GuardLogix controller.
Status is sent from the drive to the controller using integrated safety protocol.
Commands are sent from the controller to the drive using integrated safety protocol.
IMPORTANT
Only the data listed in Table 67 is communicated with SIL 3 integrity.
In these examples, the appropriate STO bit permits torque when the bit is high.
Figure 59 - STO Function with Safe Stop Only-No Feedback (Logix Designer, version 35 or later)
STO Fault Reset
To clear the STO Fault condition, a transition from logic 0 to 1 of the SO.ResetRequest tag is required
after the SO.STOOutput tag has transitioned from logic 0 to 1 (see Table 67 on page 157 for changes
in STO tag names).
If the ArmorKinetix DSx module safety controller detects a fault, the input assembly tag
SI.SafetyFault is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
157
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
To reset Axis.SafetyFault, an MAFR command must be issued.
IMPORTANT
Transition of the SO.STOOutput tag to logic 1 must always be executed
prior to transition of the SO.ResetRequest tag to logic 1.
IMPORTANT
All ArmorKinetix inverter axes enter the faulted state if any STO function
fault is detected. Refer to Understand Integrated Safety Drive
Replacement on page 161 for integrated safety troubleshooting.
Refer to Figure 60 for an understanding of the ArmorKinetix system STO state restart functionality.
Figure 60 - Reset Safe Torque-off Fault Diagram
Drv:SO.STOOutput
Safety Fault Occurs
Disable Torque
Permit Torque
Drv:SO.ResetRequest
Drv:SI.TorqueDisabled
Torque Permited
Torque Disabled
Drv:SI.SafetyFault
No Fault
Drv:SI.ResetRequired
Reset Not Required
Reset Required
No Fault
Faulted (cleared by MAFR)
Start Permitted
Start Inhibitted
No Fault
Faulted
Axis.SafetyFault
Axis.SafeTorqueOffActiveInhibit
Axis.SafetyFaultStatus
Axis.SafetyResetRequestStatus
S0.ResetRequest
Axis.SafetyResetRequiredStatus
Reset Not Required
Reset Required
Axis.SafeTorqueOffActiveStatus
Permit Torque
Disable Torque
Axis.SafeTorqueDisabledStatus
Torque Permited
Torque Disabled
Axis.SafeTorqueOffFault
No Fault
Standard Data for Safe Torque Off Status
This section describes the safety related status data that is available to the motion controller.
IMPORTANT
The status data described in this section is STANDARD data (not SAFETY
data) and cannot be used as part of a safety function.
When an ArmorKinetix module is added to a Logix Designer application I/O tree and a motion axis
(AXIS_CIP_DRIVE) is created and associated with it, axis tags are added to the controller tags.
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
This table lists the safety related STANDARD tags that are added when a new AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis is
defined.
Table 68 - Safety Related Axis Tags
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Tag Name
AxisFaults
ModuleFaults
GuardStatus
GuardFault
CIPAxisFaultsRA
SafetyModuleCommunicationErrorFault
CIPAxisAlarmsRA
SafetyModuleCommunicationErrorAlarm
CIPInitializationFaultsRA
InvalidSafetyFirmwareFault
CIPStartInhibits
SafeTorqueOffActiveInhibit
CIPStartInhibitsRA
AxisSafetyState
Attribute [bit]
34
163
980
981
903
[28]
904
[28]
910
[14]
676
[5]
912
760
Type
DINT
DINT
DINT
DINT
DINT
BOOL
DINT
BOOL
DINT
BOOL
DINT
BOOL
DINT
DINT
AxisSafetyStatus (1)
761
DINT
SafetyFaultStatus
SafetyResetRequestStatus
SafetyResetRequiredStatus
SafeTorqueOffActiveStatus
SafeTorqueDisabledStatus
SafetyOutputConnectionClosedStatus
SafetyOutputConnectionIdleStatus
AxisSafetyFaults
SafetyCoreFault
SafetyTorqueOffFault
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[30]
[31]
763
[1]
[3]
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
DINT
BOOL
BOOL
Description
Loss of communication to safety control
Loss of communication to safety control
Invalid safety control firmware
Torque disabled - Integrated
Safety supervisor state
Status of SI.SafetyFault
Status of SO.ResetRequest
Status of SI.ResetRequired
Status of SO.STOOutput
Status of SI.TorqueDisabled
1 if all output connections are closed
1 if safety controller is in program mode
Loss of communications to safety control
Status of SI.SafetyFault
(1) Bits not shown are always zero.
Out-of-Box State
The 2198-DSx-ERSx modules ship in the out-of-box state.
ATTENTION: In the out-of-box state, motion producing power is allowed by the
safe torque-off (STO) function unless an integrated safety connection
configuration has been applied to the drive at least once.
In the out-of-box state, you can configure 2198-DSx-ERSx modules:
• Without a GuardLogix 5580 safety controller for a non-safety application.
• With a GuardLogix 5580 safety controller when the Connection type is configured for Motion
Only.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
159
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Restore Out-of-Box State
After the integrated safety connection configuration is applied to the 2198-DSx-ERSx modules at
least once, you can restore the drive to the out-of-box state.
IMPORTANT
This procedure is only valid when online with the controller and no Safety
Lock or Safety Signature is applies to the controller.
To restore the module to out-of-box state, see Set Network Parameters for
the DSD and DSM Modules on page 85.
Follow these steps to restore your 2198-DSx-ERSx module to the out-of-box state.
1. Right-click the 2198-DSx-ERSx module you
created and choose Properties.
2. Click the Connection tab.
The Connection tab appears.
3. Check Inhibit Module.
4. Click Apply and click the Safety tab.
The Safety tab appears.
160
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
5. In the Configuration Ownership field, click Reset Ownership.
IMPORTANT
Only authorized personnel should attempt Reset Ownership.
If any active connection is detected, the reset is rejected.
6. Cycle drive power.
The drive is in the out-of-box state.
Understand Integrated
Safety Drive Replacement
IMPORTANT
If power to the drive is not cycled after step 5, the drive does not
transition to the out-of-box state and maintains STO function.
IMPORTANT
When the drive returns to the out-of-box state, STO safety
integrity is lost.
GuardLogix controllers retain I/O device configuration on-board and are able to download the
configuration to the replacement device.
IMPORTANT
If a 2198-DSx-ERSx module was used previously, clear the existing
configuration before installing it on a safety network by resetting the
drive to its out-of-box condition. To see how this is done, refer to Restore
Out-of-Box State on page 160.
Replacing a 2198-DSx-ERSx module that sits on an integrated safety network is more complicated
than replacing standard devices because of the safety network number (SNN).
The device number and SNN make up the safety device’s DeviceID. Safety devices require this
more complex identifier to make sure that duplicate device numbers do not compromise
communication between the correct safety devices. The SNN is also used to provide integrity on
the initial download to the 2198-DSx-ERSx module.
When the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is online, the Safety tab of the Module Properties
dialog box displays the current configuration ownership. When the opened project owns the
configuration, Local is displayed.
Communication error is displayed if the module read fails. Refer to Replace an Integrated Safety
Drive in a GuardLogix System on page 162 for integrated safety drive replacement information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
161
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Replace an Integrated
Safety Drive in a GuardLogix
System
When you replace an integrated safety drive, the replacement device must be configured properly
and the replacement drives operation be user-verified.
ATTENTION: During drive replacement or functional test, the safety of the
system must not rely on any portion of the affected drive.
Two options for safety drive replacement are available on the Safety tab of the Controller
Properties dialog box in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application:
• Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists
• Configure Always
Figure 61 - Safety Drive Replacement Options
Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists
This setting instructs the GuardLogix controller to automatically configure a safety drive only when
the safety task does not have a safety task signature, and the replacement drive is in an out-of-box
condition, meaning that a safety network number does not exist in the safety drive.
If the safety task has a safety task signature, the GuardLogix controller automatically configures
the replacement CIP Safety I/O device only if the following is true:
• The device already has the correct safety network number.
• The device electronic keying is correct.
• The node or IP address is correct.
For detailed information, see the ControlLogix 5580 and GuardLogix 5580 Controllers User Manual,
publication 1756-UM543 or CompactLogix 5380 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controllers User
Manual, publication 5069-UM001.
162
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Configure Always
When the Configure Always feature is enabled, the controller automatically checks for and
connects to a replacement drive that meets all of the following requirements:
• The controller has configuration data for a compatible drive at that network address
• The drive has an SNN that matches the configuration
ATTENTION: Enable the Configure Always feature only if the entire integrated
safety control system is not being relied on to maintain SIL 3 behavior during the
replacement and functional testing of an ArmorKinetix system.
If other parts of the integrated safety control system are being relied upon to
maintain SIL 3, make sure that the controller’s Configure Always feature is
disabled.
It is your responsibility to implement a process to make sure proper safety
functionality is maintained during device replacement.
ATTENTION: Do not place any devices in the out-of-box condition on any
integrated safety network when the Configure Always feature is enabled, except
while following the device replacement procedure in the GuardLogix user
manual appropriate for your Logix 5000 controller:
• GuardLogix 5580 Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM543
• Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controllers User Manual, publication
5069-UM001
Motion Direct Commands in
Motion Control Systems
You can use the Motion Direct Command (MDC) feature to initiate motion while the controller is in
Program mode, independent of application code that is executed in Run mode. These commands
let you do a variety of functions, for example, move an axis, jog an axis, or home an axis.
A typical use might involve a machine integrator testing different parts of the motion system while
the machine is being commissioned or a maintenance engineer, under certain restricted scenarios
in accordance with safe machine operating procedures, wanting to move an axis (like a conveyor)
to clear a jam before resuming normal operation.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment, follow these
rules regarding Run mode and Program mode.
• Only authorized, trained personnel with knowledge of safe machine operation
should be allowed to use Motion Direct Commands
• Additional supervisory methods, like removing the controller key switch, should
be used to maintain the safety integrity of the system after returning the safety
controller to RUN mode
Understand STO Bypass When Using Motion Direct Commands
If a Safety-only connection between the GuardLogix safety controller and the 2198-DSx-ERSx
module was established at least once after the drive was received from the factory, the drive does
not allow motion while the safety controller is in Program mode by default.
This is because the safety task is not executed while the GuardLogix safety controller is in Program
mode. This applies to applications running in a single-safety controller (with Motion and Safety
connections). When an integrated safety drive has a Motion connection to a standard controller and
a separate Safety connection to a dual-safety controller, the standard controller can transition to
Program mode while the safety controller stays in Run mode and continues to execute the safety
task.
However, 2198-DSx-ERSx systems are designed with a bypass feature for the STO function in
single-safety controller configurations. You can use the MDC feature to allow motion while following
all the necessary and prescribed steps per machine safety operating procedures.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
163
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
ATTENTION: Consider the consequences of allowing motion through the use of
MDC when the controller is in Program mode. You must acknowledge warning
messages in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application that warn of the drive
bypassing the STO function and unintended motion can occur. The integrated
safety drive does not respond to the request of STO function if MDC mode is
entered.
ATTENTION: It is your responsibility to maintain machine safety integrity while
executing motion direct commands. One alternative is to provide ladder logic
for Machine Maintenance mode that leaves the controller in Run mode with
safety functions executing.
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application Warning Messages
When the controller is in Run mode, executing safety functions, the 2198-DSx-ERSx drive follows the
commands that it receives from the safety controller. Safety state = Running,
Axis state = Stopped/Running, as shown in Figure 62.
Figure 62 - Safety State Indications When Controller is in Run Mode (safety task executing)
When the controller transitions to Program mode, the integrated safety drive is in the safe state
(torque not permitted). Safety state = Not Running, Axis state = Start Inhibited, as shown in
Figure 63).
164
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Figure 63 - Safety State Indications After Controller Transitions to Program Mode
When you issue a motion direct command to an axis to produce torque in Program mode, for
example MSO or MDS, with the safety connection present to the drive, a warning message is
presented before the motion direct command is executed, as shown in Figure 64.
Figure 64 - STO Bypass Prompt When the Safety Controller is in Program Mode
The warning in Figure 64 is displayed the first time a motion direct command is issued.
After you acknowledge the warning message by clicking Yes, torque is permitted by the drive and a
warning message is indicated in the software as shown in Figure 65. Safety state = Not Running
(torque permitted), Axis state = Stopped/Running, Persistent Warning = Safe Torque Off Bypassed.
IMPORTANT
Switch the controller to Run mode to exit Motion Direct Command mode
with STO function bypassed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
165
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Figure 65 - Safety State Indications After Controller Transitions to Program Mode (MDC executing)
IMPORTANT
The persistent warning message text ‘Safe Torque Off bypassed’ appears
when a motion direct command is executed.
Warning message persists even after the dialog is closed and reopened
as long as the integrated safety drive is in STO Bypass mode.
The persistent warning message is removed only after the integrated
safety drive is restored to the Safe state.
Torque Permitted in a Multi-workstation Environment
The warning in Figure 66 is displayed to notify a second user working in a multi-workstation
environment that the first user has placed the integrated safety drive in the STO state and that the
current action is about to bypass the STO state and permit torque.
Figure 66 - STO Bypass Prompt When MDC is Issued in Multi-workstation Environment
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Warning Icon and Text in Axis Properties
In addition to the other warnings that require your acknowledgment, the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer application also provides warning icons and persistent warning messages in other Axis
Properties dialog boxes when the integrated safety drive is in STO Bypass mode.
Figure 67 - Axis and Safe State Indications on the Hookup Services Dialog Box
Figure 68 - Axis and Safe State Indications on Motion Direct Commands Dialog Box
Figure 69 - Axis and Safe State Indications on the Motion Console Dialog Box
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
167
Chapter 9
ArmorKinetix System Safety Features
Functional Safety Considerations
ATTENTION: Before maintenance work can be performed in Program mode,
the developer of the application must consider the implications of allowing
motion through motion direct commands and should consider developing logic
for run-time maintenance operations to meet the requirements of machine
safety operating procedures.
ATTENTION: Motion is allowed when motion direct commands are used in
Program mode and STO function is not available.
Motion direct commands issued when the controller is in Program mode causes
the drive to bypass the STO Active condition.
It is your responsibility to implement additional preventive measures to
maintain safety integrity of the machinery during execution of motion direct
commands in Program mode.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury and damage to equipment in the event of
unauthorized access or unexpected motion during authorized access, return
the controller to RUN mode and remove the key before leaving the machine
unattended.
168
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix
A
Interconnect Diagrams
Interconnect Diagram Notes
This appendix provides wiring examples and system block diagrams for your ArmorKinetix®
system components. These notes apply to the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application wiring
examples on the following pages.
Table 69 - Interconnect Diagram Notes
Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Information
For power wiring specifications, refer to ArmorKinetix PIM Wiring on page 76.
For fuse replacement see Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD003.
AC (EMC) line filter is required for CE and UK compliance. Mount the line filter with 50 mm (1.97 in.) minimum clearance between the drive and filter. If routing in wireway is
unavoidable, use shielded cable with shields grounded to the drive chassis and filter case. For AC line filter specifications, refer to Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100
Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD003. 2198-DBRxx-F line filters are preferred.
Cable shield clamp must be used to meet CE and UK requirements with Kinetix 2090 power cables 2 AWG and smaller.
2198-Dxxx -ERSx dual-axis inverters include separate digital inputs, DSL feedback, universal feedback, motor power, and motor brake wiring plugs for each axis.
Digital inputs are available for the machine interface on the on the PIM module, see page 57, and on the DSx modules, see page 62.
PE ground connection bonded to the panel must be used to meet CE and UK requirements. See Ground the System on page 75.
For M1 contactor selection and specifications, refer to Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD003.
Internal shunt wired to the RC connector is default configuration. Remove internal shunt wires to attach external shunt wires.
Default configuration for ground screws or jumper is for grounded power at customer site. For impedance-grounded power configurations, remove the screws/jumper.
Refer to Determine Input Power Configurations on page 72 for more information.
ATTENTION: Implementation of control circuits and risk assessment is the responsibility of the machine builder.
Reference international standards EN/IEC 62061 and EN/ISO 13849-1 estimation and safety performance categories.
ATTENTION: An AC three-phase mains contactor must be wired in series between the branch circuit protection and the
Kinetix 5700 system power supply. In addition, the AC three-phase contactor control string must be wired in series with
the contactor-enable relay at the CED connector. The recommended minimum wire size for wiring the circuitry to the
contactor-enable connector is 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG).
For motor cable specifications, refer to Kinetix Rotary and Linear Motion Cable Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004.
Brake connector pins are labeled plus (+) and minus (-) or F and G respectively. Power connector pins are labeled U, V, W, and
(GND) or A, B, C, and
(D)
respectively.
Kinetix LDAT linear thrusters do not have a brake option, so only the 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAAxx or 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAFxx motor power cables apply.
Kinetix MPAS-Bxxxxx-VxxSxA (ballscrew) linear stages use the 9V supply. MPAS-Bxxxxx-ALMx2C (direct-drive) linear stages use the 5V supply.
Kinetix MPL-A/B15xx-H…MPL-A/B45xx-H, MPL-A15xx-V/E…MPL-A2xx-V/E, MPL-A3xx-S/M…MPL-A45xx-S/M, MPM-A115xx…MPM-A130xx, MPF-A3xx…MPF-A45xx, MPS-Axxx,
MPAS-Bxxx (direct drive), and encoders use the +5V DC supply.
Kinetix MPL-B15xx-V/E…MPL-B2xx-V/E, MPL-B3xx-S/M…MPL-B6xx-S/M, MPL-A5xx, MPM-Bxx, MPM-A165xx…MPM-A215xx, MPF-Bxx, MPF-A5xx, MPS-Bxxx, MPAR-Bxxx, and
MPAS-Bxxx (ballscrew) encoders use the +9V DC supply.
The 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module is used in applications with up to 104 A maximum external DC-bus current. You can add the 2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
DC-bus conditioner module to the left or right of the capacitor module when the external DC-bus current exceeds 104 A, up to a maximum of 208 A.
See ArmorKinetix 2090 Cables and Connectors, publication 2090-IN053, for information on cables to use when connecting ArmorKinetix PIM, DSD, and DSM modules.
Power Wiring Examples
You must supply input power components. The three-phase line filter is wired downstream of the
circuit protection devices. Each drive module includes the appropriate DC-bus link and connector
set. The 24V supply can be jumpered from drive-to-drive by using discrete wires or the shared-bus
connection system.
In this example, the ArmorKinetix DSx modules and optional accessory modules are downstream of
a single 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply and the 2198-PIM070 power interface module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
169
170
M1*
CR1*
CR1*
STOP*
CR1*
START*
Grounding Screw/Jumpers
Note 10
Customer
Supplied
+24V DC
Power Supply*
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus*
195...528V AC rms
Three-phase Input
Note 1,2
Refer to Attention statement (Note 11).
24V AC/DC
50/60 Hz
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus*
2198-DBRxx-F
Three-phase
AC Line Filter
Note 3
Three-phase Input
(IPD) Connector
CONT EN-
L3 L2 L1
Contactor Enable
(CED) Connector
Digital Inputs
Connections
Note 6
CONT EN+
SHLD
IN2
COM
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
Note 20
DC Bus
Connector DC-
SHLD
IN4
COM
COM
DC+
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
IN2
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
DC Bus
(DC) Connectors
COM
IN1
+24
IN1
24V_COM
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector
+24
DC-
24V_COM
DC+
DC-
Internal Shunt
Note 9
Shunt Power
(RC) Connector
DC+
SH
DC+
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
IN1
IN4
IN3
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Feedback
Connector
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
U V W
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector
IN4
IN3
IN2
DC-
DC+
COM
Note 20
IN2
IN1
DC-
DC+
COM
DC-
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
DC+
Note 20
MBRK Note 20
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DC-
DC+
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 70 - DC-bus Power Supply (single converter) Configuration
DSL-
DSL+
MBRK -
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
M1*
CR1*
CR1*
STOP*
CR1*
START*
Circuit
M1
Protection* Contactor
Note 2
Note 8
2198-DBR200-F
Three-phase
AC Line Filter
Note 3
Circuit Protection*
Note 2
L3 L2 L1
Three-phase Input
(IPD) Connector
CONT EN-
CONT EN+
L3 L2 L1
2198-H070-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
CONT EN-
CONT EN+
L3 L2 L1
Contactor Enable
(CED) Connector
Note 12
Digital Inputs
Connections
SHLD Note 6
IN2
COM
IN1
Three-phase Input
(IPD) Connector
2198-H070-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
Digital Inputs
Connections
SHLD Note 6
IN2
COM
IN1
+24
24V_COM
+24
2198-H070-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
IN2
DC Bus
Connector DCNote 20
DC Bus
Connector DCNote 20
SHLD
COM
DC+
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
SHLD
DC+
IN1
COM
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
DC Bus
(DC) Connectors
IN4
COM
+24
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
IN4
COM
COM
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
IN2
COM
IN1
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
Note 20
Note 20
IN4
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Feedback
Connector
U V W
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN3
COM
IN1
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
U V W
IN2
DC-
DC+
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Feedback
Connector
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
IN4
COM
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
DC-
DC-
IN1
DC+
DC+
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
IN4
IN3
COM
COM
IN3
IN1
DC-
DC+
IN2
Note 20
Note 20
IN1
DC-
DC+
IN2
DC-
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
DC+
MBRK -
1321-3R80-B
Line Reactors (required
components)
Internal Shunt
Note 9
Shunt Power
(RC) Connector
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
MBRK -
195...528V AC rms
Three-phase Input
Note 1,2
CONT EN-
CONT EN+
IN2
Digital Inputs
Connections
SHLD Note 6
COM
DC-
DC+
SH
DC+
2198-P208
DC-bus Power Supply
DC-
DC+
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DC-
DC+
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DSL-
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus*
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector
+24
+24
IN1
24V_COM
Three-phase Input
(IPD) Connector
EN-
EN+
Internal Shunt
Note 9
Shunt Power
(RC) Connector
When three 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies are connected in parallel, two
additional 2198-BARCON-85DC200 bus-links must be ordered separately.
DC-
DC+
SH
DC+
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
Internal Shunt
Note 9
Shunt Power
(RC) Connector
2198-P208
DC-bus Power Supply
DSL+
Refer to Attention statement (Note 11).
24V AC/DC
50/60 Hz
Customer
Supplied
+24V DC
Power Supply*
Grounding Screw/Jumpers
Note 10
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus*
SH
DC+
2198-P208
DC-bus Power Supply
Appendix A
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Interconnect Diagrams
In this example, the inverter drives and optional capacitor modules are downstream of three DCbus (converter) power supplies. When two or three DC-bus power supplies are used, they must be
catalog number 2198-P208. This configuration provides more power (kW) to the drive system.
Figure 71 - DC-bus Power Supply (multiple converters) Configuration
DSL-
DSL+
MBRK -
MBRK -
171
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
In this example, the 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module is included for energy storage and to
improve dynamic performance.
Figure 72 - DC-bus Power Supply with Capacitor Module
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
DC+
SH
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
Shunt Power
(RC) Connector
Internal Shunt
Note 9
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus*
Customer
Supplied
+24V DC
Power Supply*
DC+
DC+
DC+
DC-
DC-
DC-
24V_COM
24V_COM
+24
IN1
COM
IN2
Grounding Screw/Jumpers
Note 10
24V AC/DC
50/60 Hz
SHLD
EN+
EN-
CR1*
CR1*
24V_COM
+24
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector
IN1
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
+24
DC Bus
(DC) Connectors
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
MS
COM
MS
IN2
Digital Inputs
Connections
Note 6
CONT EN+
CONT EN-
Contactor Enable
(CED) Connector
Note 12
START*
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
COM
IN4
COM
SHLD
M1*
STOP*
CR1*
Three-phase Input
(IPD) Connector
Refer to Attention statement (Note 11).
2198-DBRxx-F
Three-phase
AC Line Filter
Note 3
195...528V AC rms
Three-phase Input
Bonded Cabinet
Note 1,2
Ground Bus*
Circuit
Protection*
Note 2
M1
Contactor
Note 8
L3 L2 L1
DC Bus
Connector DCNote 20
DC+
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
Note 20
DC+
DC+
DC-
DC-
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
Note 20
DC+
DC+
DC-
DCMotor Feedback
Connector
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
COM
COM
IN3
IN4
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
IN4
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
DSL-
DSL+
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
MBRK -
172
MBRK -
U V W
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
Additional
Inverters and/or
Kinetix 5700
System Power
Supply
PE Ground
Note 7
+24
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
+24
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
Or 2198T-W25K-P-N
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector (1)
+24
DC-
Module
Status (MS)
Connector
2198-H040-P-T
T-connector
and Bus Bar
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
DC Bus (DC)
Connectors
MS
MS
PE Ground
Note 7
Module
Status (MS)
Connector
Capacitor Module
DC-
IN1
IN2
COM
DC Bus
Connector DCNote 20
SHLD
IN4
COM
COM
DC+
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connectors
and Bus Bars
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
DC Bus
(DC) Connectors
PE Ground
Note 7
IN3
Note 20
IN3
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
IN1
IN4
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
U V W
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
IN4
IN3
IN2
COM
IN3
Motor Feedback
Connector
Note 20
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
U V W
IN2
DC-
DC+
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
IN4
Motor Feedback
Connector
Note 20
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
DC-
DC+
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DC-
DC+
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DSL-
COM
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
DC-
DC-
IN1
DC+
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
IN4
DC+
Note 20
IN1
IN2
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
COM
IN1
DC-
DC+
IN2
DC-
Note 20
COM
DC-
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
Note 20
DC+
DC+
MBRK -
DC+
PE Ground
Note 7
+24
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
MBRK -
DC Bus
Connector
Note 20
SHLD
IN4
COM
COM
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connectors
and Bus Bars
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
DSL+
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus
Monitor capacitor
module status by wiring
to digital input Bus
Capacitor OK or Logix
5000 controller. Refer to
Capacitor Module
Status Wiring Example
on, for an example.
MS
MS
PE Ground
Note 7
Flexible Bus-bar
ATTENTION: Circuit
protection can
DC+
be added after the
DC+
DCpower supply
DCcluster to help
protect converters
24V_COM
24V_COM
and inverters from
damage due to a
+24
+24
DC-bus cable short2198-TCON2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
circuit.
24VDCIN36
Extension Module
IN1
24V Input Power
PE Ground
COM
Wiring Connector
Note 7
IN2
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Customer-supplied External DC-bus
Wire Lug Connections
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
Extension Module
DC-
DC+
Flexible Bus-bar
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
24V_COM
DC-
24V_COM
DC+
DC+
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
2198-Sxxx -ERSx or
2198-Dxxx -ERSx
Inverter
Note 5
Additional Inverters and/or Kinetix
5700 System Power Supply
2198-Sxxx-ERSx or
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
Inverter
Note 5
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
In this example, the 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module and 2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO extension
module are used for energy storage and to extend the DC-bus voltage to another inverter cluster.
The capacitor modules are used alone when the external DC-bus current is ≤104 A. The extension
module (or any combination of two accessory modules) is needed when the external DC-bus
current is >104 A, up to a maximum 208 A.
Figure 73 - ArmorKinetix System Extended Drive System Example (extension module)
DSL-
DSL+
MBRK -
MBRK -
173
174
Additional
Inverters and/or
Kinetix 5700
System Power
Supply
PE Ground
Note 7
+24
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
+24
2198-TCON-24VDCIN36
Or 2198T-W25K-P-N
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector (1)
+24
DC-
+24
MS
MS
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
DC-bus Conditioner Module
MS
MS
PE Ground
Note 7
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
Module
Status (MS)
Connector
MS
MS
+24
MS
MS
PE Ground
Note 7
+24
PE Ground Note 7
Monitor DC-bus conditioner status by
wiring to digital input Bus Conditioner OK
or Logix 5000 controller. Refer to
Capacitor Module Status Wiring Example
on, for an example.
Module
Status (MS)
Connector
DC-
DC+
+24
24V_COM
2198-TCON24VDCIN36
24V Input Power
Wiring Connector
PE Ground Note 7
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
Flexible Bus-bar
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
DC-bus Conditioner Module
24V_COM
Monitor capacitor module status by
wiring to digital input Bus Capacitor OK
or Logix 5000 controller. Refer to
Capacitor Module Status Wiring Example
on, for an example.
ATTENTION:
Circuit
protection can
be added after
the power
supply
cluster to help
protect
converters
and inverters
from damage
due to a
DC-bus cable
short-circuit.
Customer-supplied External DC-bus
Wire Lug Connections
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
DC Bus (DC)
Connectors
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
Flexible Bus-bar
2198-H040-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
24V_COM
DC-
24V_COM
DC+
DC+
24V_COM
DC-
DC+
2198-Sxxx -ERSx or
2198-Dxxx -ERSx
Inverter
Note 5
Additional Inverters and/or Kinetix
5700 System Power Supply
2198-Sxxx-ERSx or
2198-Dxxx-ERSx
Inverter
Note 5
DC-
DC+
+24
COM
DC Bus
Connector DCNote 20
SHLD
IN4
COM
DC+
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
Control Power
(CP) Connectors
SHLD Digital Input
COM (IOD) Connector
Note 6
IN3
IN2
2198-PIM070
Power Interface Module
DC Bus
(DC) Connectors
COM
IN1
24V_COM
PE Ground
Note 7
2198-xxxx-P-T
T-connector and Bus Bar
2198-Sxxx -ERSx or
2198-Dxxx -ERSx
Inverter
Note 5
IN1
IN4
IN3
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
Motor Feedback
Connector
Note 20
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
Distributed Servo Drive
U V W
Motor Power /Feedback
Connector Note 20
IN4
IN3
IN2
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
Note 6
COM
IN1
DC-
DC+
IN2
DC-
Note 20
COM
DC-
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx-x0xxxx-xxxxxx
Distributed Servo Motor
Note 20
DC+
DC+
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA CLK +
CLK EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
ECOM (N/C)
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
DC-
DC+
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
In this example, the 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor module and 2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312 DC-bus
conditioner module are used for energy storage and to extend the DC-bus voltage to another
inverter cluster. The capacitor modules are used alone when the external DC-bus current is ≤104 A.
The DC-bus conditioner module (or any combination of two accessory modules) is needed when
the external DC-bus current is >104 A, up to a maximum 208 A.
Figure 74 - ArmorKinetix System Extended Drive System Example (DC-bus conditioner module)
DSL+
MBRK -
DSL-
MBRK -
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix A
Capacitor Module Status
Wiring Example
Interconnect Diagrams
You can configure either of the DC-bus power supply digital inputs as Bus Capacitor OK in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to monitor the Module Status output. See the Kinetix 5700
Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002 for how the DC-bus power supply Digital Inputs
category is configured.
Figure 75 - DC-bus Power Supply with Capacitor Module
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
MS
MS
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
INx
Module Status (MS)
Connector
(1)
24V DC
COM
(1) Configure either of two digital inputs as Bus Capacitor OK.
Refer to the Kinetix 5700 Capacitor Modules Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN008, for
additional installation information.
Contactor Wiring Examples
We recommend that you wire an Allen-Bradley® (Bulletin 100) auxiliary contactor to the bus supply
digital input (IOD connector) and configure AC Line Contactor OK to monitor three-phase input
power. Use the Normally Open (N.O.) auxiliary contact, if more than one auxiliary contact is
available.
IMPORTANT
2198-P141 and 2198-P208 power supplies require an additional intermediate
relay that is used with the contactor.
Figure 76 - Contactor Wiring for DC-bus Power Supply
Allen-Bradley
100C Contactor
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
Contactor Enable
(CED) Connector
CONT EN+
24V DC
A1 +
K1 Coil
CONT EN–
A2 –
L1
2
1
4
3
Out
AC Input Power
(IPD) Connector
L2
L3
2198-DBRxx-F
AC Line Filter
GND
In
6
5
14
13
Refer to IEC Contactor Specifications Technical Data, publication 100-TD013, for additional
contactor related information.
Passive Shunt Wiring
Examples
Wiring from the 2198 shunt modules and resistor are made directly to the shunt (RC) connector. You
can configure either of the DC-bus power supply digital inputs as Shunt Thermal Switch OK in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. See the Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication
2198-UM002 for how the DC-bus power supply Digital Inputs category is configured.
IMPORTANT
Passive shunts attach to only 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supplies. Before
wiring the 2198 external shunt to the RC connector, remove the wires from
the internal servo-drive shunt. Do not connect both internal and external
shunt resistors to the DC-bus power supply.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
175
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to the ArmorKinetix system, wire the 2198-R031, or
2198-R127 shunt thermal switch to a digital input on the DC-bus power supply and
configure the Shunt Thermal Switch OK function in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application.
Figure 77 - DC-bus Power Supply with External Passive Shunt Module
2198-R014, 2198-R031, and 2198R127 External Passive Shunt
Module
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
Shunt (RC)
Connector
DC+
R1
SH
R2
TS
Internal Shunt
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
TS
INx
Resistor
Thermal Switch
(1)
COM
24V DC
(1) Configure either of two digital inputs as Shunt Thermal Switch OK.
Figure 78 - DC-bus Power Supply with External Passive Shunt Resistor
2198-R004 External Passive
Shunt Resistor
2198-Pxxx
DC-bus Power Supply
Shunt (RC)
Connector
DC+
SH
Internal Shunt
Refer to the Kinetix 5700 Passive Shunt Module Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN011, for
additional installation information.
Active Shunt Wiring
Examples
Active shunts are available from the Rockwell Automation Encompass™ partners Powerohm
Resistors, Inc. (https://www.hubbell.com/powerohm/en) or
Bonitron, Inc. (https//:www.bonitron.com).
IMPORTANT
Powerohm Bulletin PKBxxx active shunt modules use built-in internal brake
resistors. Bulletin PWBxxx active shunt modules require appropriately
sized external brake resistors.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to the ArmorKinetix system, wire the active shunt
thermal switch to a digital input on the power supply and configure the Shunt
Thermal Switch OK function in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 79 - 2198 Power Supply with External Active Shunt (built-in brake resistor)
2198-Pxxx
DC-Bus Power Supply
2198-xxxx-ERSx
Inverter
2198-PIM070
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
Powerohm
PKBxxx-xxx
Active Shunt Module
4.6 m (15 ft) Maximum Cable Length
DC+
External DC-bus
DC+
DC–
DC–
3
4
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
INx
COM
Resistor
Fault Contact
9
10
(1)
24V DC
(2)
120V AC
(1) Configure any available digital input as Shunt Thermal Switch OK. See the Digital Inputs Connector Pinouts on page 55.
(2) Powerohm PKB050 and PKB050-800 shunts require 120V AC between pins 9 and 10 to supply power to the cooling fans.
See Knowledgebase Technote: Using PKB external active shunt with Kinetix 5700 for more
information on wiring to these Powerohm Bulletin PKBxxx active shunts.
Figure 80 - 2198 Power Supply with External Active Shunt (external brake resistor)
2198-Pxxx
DC-Bus
Power Supply
2198-PIM070
2198-CAPMOD-2240
Capacitor Module
Powerohm
External Passive
Shunt Module
Powerohm
PWBxxx-xxx
Active Shunt Module
DC+
External DC Bus
DC–
DC+
DC–
R1
R2
DC+
DC–
9.1 m (30 ft)
Maximum Cable Length
4.6 m (15 ft)
Maximum Cable Length
3
4
Fault Contact
9
10
(2)
120V AC
TS
TS
Digital Input
(IOD) Connector
INx
COM
Resistor
(1)
Thermal
Switch
24V DC
(1) Configure any available digital input as Shunt Thermal Switch OK. See the Digital Inputs Connector Pinouts on page 55.
(2) Powerohm PWB050 and PWB050-800 shunts require 120V AC between pins 9 and 10 to supply power to the cooling fans.
See Knowledgebase Technote: Using PWB external active shunt with Kinetix 5700 for more
information on wiring to these Powerohm Bulletin PWBxxx active shunts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
177
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
ArmorKinetix Module and
Rotary Motor Wiring
Examples
These Kinetix rotary motors use single cable technology. The 2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx motor power/
feedback cable provides power from the DSD module and the Kinetix VPL motor and provides
feedback from the Kinetix VPL motor. See the ArmorKinetix 2090 Cables and Connectors installation
instructions, publication 2090-IN053 for more cable information.
Figure 81 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix VPL, VPF, VPH, and VPS Motors
(Frames 63 mm, 75 mm, 100 mm, 115 mm, and 130 mm)
VPL-A/Bxxxx-C/P/Q/W,
VPF-A/Bxxxx-C/P/Q/W,
VPH-A/Bxxxx-C/Q/W,
or VPS-BxxxD-P Motors
with High-resolution
Feedback
2198-DSD-ERSx
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
Cable Shield
Clamp
Note 4
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
2
3
4
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
Motor Feedback
(MF) Connector
GND (1)
Brown (U)
Blue (W)
Black (MBRK+)
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx)
Single Motor Cable
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
Black (MBRK+)
9
10 White (MBRK-)
Blue (DATA +)
7
White/Blue
(Data -)
8
Conductive Connector Housing
A
B
Black (V)
D
F
G
E
H
Motor
Brake
Motor
Feedback
Conductive Connector Housing
Note 14
Note 13
SpeedTec DIN
Single Motor Connector
Power, Brake, and
Feedback Connector
178
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
These compatible Allen-Bradley rotary motors have separate cables for motor power/brake and
feedback connections. See the ArmorKinetix 2090 Cables and Connectors installation instructions,
publication 2090-IN053 for more cable information.
Figure 82 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix MPL, MPM, MPF, and MPS
(Frames 100 mm, 115 mm, and 130 mm)
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
2198-DSD-ERSx
Cable Shield
Clamp
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Note 4
Brown (U)
2
3
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
Note 14
Blue (W)
4
Black (MBRK+)
Black (MBRK+)
9
White (MBRK-)
10
Blue (DATA +)
7
White/Blue
(Data -)
8
Conductive Connector Housing
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
Feedback Connector
D
F
Motor Brake
G
E
H
Conductive Connector Housing
Motor
Feedback
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
GND (1)
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
A
B
Black (V)
26 AWG BLACK
26 AWG WHITE/BLACK
26 AWG RED
26 AWG WHITE/RED
26 AWG GREEN
26 AWG WHITE/GREEN
21 AWG GRAY
21 AWG WHITE/GRAY
22 AWG ORANGE
22 AWG WHITE/ORANGE
26 AWG BLUE
26 AWG WHITE/BLUE
26 AWG YELLOW
26 AWG WHITE/YELLOW
26 AWG BROWN
26 AWG WHITE/BROWN
Note 14
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
SpeedTec DIN
Motor Connectors
179
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
ArmorKinetix System and
Linear Actuator Wiring
Examples
These Kinetix linear actuators use single cable technology. The 2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx motor
power/feedback cable provides power from the DSD module and the Kinetix VPAR motor and
provides feedback from the Kinetix VPAR motor. See the ArmorKinetix 2090 Cables and Connectors
installation instructions, publication 2090-IN053 for more cable information.
Figure 83 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix VPAR Electric Cylinders
VPAR-B1xxxx-W
VPAR-B2xxxx-W
VPAR-B3xxxx-Q
Electric Cylinders
with High-resolution
Feedback
2198-DSD-ERSx
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
Cable Shield
Clamp
Note 4
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
2
3
4
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
Motor Feedback
(MF) Connector
GND (1)
Brown (U)
Blue (W)
Black (MBRK+)
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
Black (MBRK+)
9
10 White (MBRK-)
Blue (DATA +)
7
White/Blue
(Data -)
8
Conductive Connector Housing
A
B
Black (V)
D
F
G
E
H
Motor
Brake
Motor
Feedback
Conductive Connector Housing
Note 14
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Single Motor Cable
Note 13
SpeedTec DIN
Single Motor Connector
Power, Brake, and
Feedback Connector
180
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
These compatible linear actuators have separate connectors and cables for power/brake and
feedback connections.
Figure 84 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix LDAT Linear Thrusters
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
2198-DSD-ERSx
Cable Shield
Clamp
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Note 4
Note 14
Brown (U)
2
3
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
A
B
Black (V)
Blue (W)
4
Black (MBRK+)
Black (MBRK+)
9
White (MBRK-)
10
Blue (DATA +)
7
White/Blue
(Data -)
8
Conductive Connector Housing
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
D
F
Motor Brake
G
E
H
Conductive Connector Housing
Motor
Feedback
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
GND (1)
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
Linear Thrusters with
High Resolution Feedback
26 AWG BLACK
26 AWG WHITE/BLACK
26 AWG RED
26 AWG WHITE/RED
26 AWG GREEN
26 AWG WHITE/GREEN
21 AWG GRAY
21 AWG WHITE/GRAY
22 AWG ORANGE
22 AWG WHITE/ORANGE
26 AWG BLUE
26 AWG WHITE/BLUE
26 AWG YELLOW
26 AWG WHITE/YELLOW
26 AWG BROWN
26 AWG WHITE/BROWN
Note 14
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
SpeedTec DIN
Motor Connectors
181
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 85 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix MPAR Electric Cylinders
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
2198-DSD-ERSx
Cable Shield
Clamp
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Note 4
Brown (U)
2
3
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
Black (V)
Blue (W)
4
Green/Yellow (PE)
GND (1)
MPAR-Bxxxxx
Electric Cylinders with
High Resolution Feedback
Black (MBRK+)
Black (MBRK+)
9
White (MBRK-)
10
Blue (DATA +)
7
White/Blue
(Data -)
8
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
Conductive Connector Housing
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
Note 14
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
D
F
Motor Brake
G
E
H
Conductive Connector Housing
Feedback Connector
26 AWG BLACK
26 AWG WHITE/BLACK
26 AWG RED
26 AWG WHITE/RED
26 AWG GREEN
26 AWG WHITE/GREEN
21 AWG GRAY
21 AWG WHITE/GRAY
22 AWG ORANGE
22 AWG WHITE/ORANGE
26 AWG BLUE
26 AWG WHITE/BLUE
26 AWG YELLOW Three-phase
Motor Power
26 AWG WHITE/YELLOW
26 AWG BROWN
26 AWG WHITE/BROWN
Note 14
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
182
A
B
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
SpeedTec DIN
Motor Connectors
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 86 - ArmorKinetix DSD Module with Kinetix LDC Linear Motors (cable connectors)
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
LDC-Cxxxxxx-xHTx1
Linear Motor Coil with
Sin/Cos or TTL External Encoder
and Cable Connectors
2198-DSD-ERSx
Cable Shield
Clamp
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Note 4
Brown (U)
2
3
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
Note 14
Blue (W)
4
Black (MBRK+)
Black (MBRK+)
9
White (MBRK-)
10
Blue (DATA +)
7
8 White/Blue (Data -)
Conductive Connector Housing
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
D
F
Motor Brake
G
E
H
Conductive Connector Housing
Motor
Feedback
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
GND (1)
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
A
B
Black (V)
26 AWG BLACK
26 AWG WHITE/BLACK
26 AWG RED
26 AWG WHITE/RED
26 AWG GREEN
26 AWG WHITE/GREEN
21 AWG GRAY
21 AWG WHITE/GRAY
22 AWG ORANGE
22 AWG WHITE/ORANGE
26 AWG BLUE
26 AWG WHITE/BLUE
26 AWG YELLOW
26 AWG WHITE/YELLOW
26 AWG BROWN
26 AWG WHITE/BROWN
Note 14
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
SpeedTec DIN
Motor Connectors
183
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 87 - ArmorKinetix DSx Modules with Kinetix LDC Linear Motors (flying-lead cables)
Refer to table on page 169 for note information.
LDC-Cxxxxxx-xHTx1
Linear Motor Coil with
Sin/Cos or TTL External Encoder
and Cable Connectors
2198-DSD-ERSx
Cable Shield
Clamp
2090-CSBM1P7-14AFxx
Note 4
Brown (U)
2
3
Motor Power
(MP) Connector
Note 14
Blue (W)
4
Black (MBRK+)
Black (MBRK+)
9
White (MBRK-)
10
Blue (DATA +)
7
8 White/Blue (Data -)
Conductive Connector Housing
White (MBRK-)
Blue (Data +)
White/Blue (Data -)
Electrical Screens (Braided Copper)
Motor Brake
G
E
H
Motor
Feedback
26 AWG BLACK
26 AWG WHITE/BLACK
26 AWG RED
26 AWG WHITE/RED
26 AWG GREEN
26 AWG WHITE/GREEN
21 AWG GRAY
21 AWG WHITE/GRAY
22 AWG ORANGE
22 AWG WHITE/ORANGE
26 AWG BLUE
26 AWG WHITE/BLUE
26 AWG YELLOW
26 AWG WHITE/YELLOW
26 AWG BROWN
26 AWG WHITE/BROWN
Note 14
2090-CFBM7S7-CDAFxx
184
D
F
Conductive Connector Housing
Motor
Feedback
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
Three-phase
Motor Power
C
Green/Yellow (PE)
GND (1)
Motor Brake
(BC) Connector
A
B
Black (V)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
SIN +
SIN COS +
COS DATA +
DATA EPWR 5V
ECOM
EPWR 9V
TS +
TS- (N/C)
S1
S2
S3
CLK +
CLK ECOM (N/C)
SpeedTec DIN
Motor Connectors
Appendix A
System Block Diagrams
Interconnect Diagrams
This section provides block diagrams of the ArmorKinetix system.
SH
Shunt Resister
(RC) Connector
DC+
Figure 88 - DC-bus Power Supply Block Diagram
Internal Shunt
Resistor
DC+
L1
Three-phase
Input Power
(IDP) Connector
DC Bus Power
(DC) Connector
L2
L3
DC–
Ground Screw (1)
Chassis
Contactor Enable
(CED) Connector
CONT EN+
CONT EN–
24V Control Power
(CP) Connector
24V+
Control
24V–
(1) Ground screw in the installed (default) configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
185
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 89 - Capacitor Module Block Diagram
Fuse Detection
Module Status
Status Indicator
MS
MS
DC Bus Output
Lug Connector
Module Status
(MS) Connector
DC+
DC–
DC-bus Detection
DC-bus Status
Status Indicator
DC Bus Input
Link Connector
DC+
Fuse
DC+
Capacitor Bank
DC–
DC–
186
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Bleeder
Resistor
DC–
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 90 - DC-bus Conditioner Module Block Diagram
Module Status
Status Indicator
Fuse Detection and
Over Temperature
Protection
MS
MS
DC Bus Output
Lug Connector
Module Status
(MS) Connector
DC+
DC–
DC-bus Detection
DC-bus Status
Status Indicator
Conditioning Circuit
DC Bus Input
Link Connector
Fuse
DC+
DC–
Chassis
Figure 91 - ArmorKinetix PIM Module Block Diagram
DC Bus
F2
F1
DC/DC
24V Input
24V
Sensing Circuitry
58V
Output Voltage
(DC Bus/58V)
Housekeeping
Voltages
ENET 1
ENET 2
Control CPU and
Network Interface
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
187
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 92 - ArmorKinetix DSD Inverter Module Block Diagram
OUT DC Bus Power
(DC) Connector
DC+
DC-
PE
U
DC+
IN DC Bus
Power (DC)
Connector
V
DC-
W
PE
PE
Control
Chassis
Motor Brake
Control
Figure 93 - ArmorKinetix DSM Inverter/Motor Module Block Diagram
OUT DC Bus Power
(DC) Connector
DC+
IN DC Bus
Power (DC)
Connector
DC-
PE
DC+
U
V
DC-
W
PE
PE
BR+
Control
24V+
Chassis
24V-
Motor Brake Override Control
188
BR-
Motor Brake Control
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
BR+
BR-
Motor Power
(MP)
Connector
Appendix
B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
This appendix provides information and examples for sizing your ArmorKinetix® system power
supplies and inverters in multi-axis shared-bus configurations.
Shared DC-bus
Configurations
You can supply power to your Kinetix® 5700 shared DC-bus system configuration from following
sources:
• Single 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply
• Multiple 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies (up to three are possible)
Shared DC-bus Definitions
Throughout this manual, these terms are used to describe how modules are grouped together.
Table 70 - Shared-bus Terminology
Term
DC-bus group
Cluster
Extended cluster
Power supply cluster
Extended DC-bus
Definition
Drive modules that are all connected to the same DC bus.
Group of power supply and/or drive modules that are directly connected together via Kinetix
5700 DC bus-bars only.
Group of drive modules that are directly connected together via Kinetix 5700 DC bus-bars and
connected to the power supply cluster via customer-supplied DC-bus cable.
The cluster that contains the AC to DC converter (power supply).
When 2 drive clusters are part of the same DC-bus group joined by the DC bus-bars and
customer-supplied DC-bus cable.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
189
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
In this example, two drive clusters in the same cabinet are connected by the same 276…747V DCbus voltage. Kinetix 5700 capacitor modules provide connection points for the DC bus. The
extension module is needed only when the DC-bus system current exceeds 104 A, and can support
up to 208 A maximum external DC-bus current.
Figure 94 - Extended DC-bus Installation
Extension
Module
Capacitor
Module
PIM
Module
Dual-axis Inverters
ArmorKinetix System Extended Servo Drives
Cluster 2 (front view)
MOD
NET
MOD
DC BUS
MOD
NET
2
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
MOD
NET
2
1
1
1
MOD
NET
2
2
1
MODULE
STATUS
MOD
NET
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-B
6 1
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
2
1
1
I/O-A
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
10 5
UFB-A
6
1
10
UFB-B
5
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
2
1
I/O-A
MOD
NET
Shared DC-bus and
24V DC Control Power
1
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
DC-bus Extension
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
MF-B
D+
D-
MF-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
MF-B
Dual-axis
Inverters
DSD Module connected to
Kinetix VPL motor
DC-bus Extension
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supplies
195…528V AC
Three-phase
Input Power
Line Disconnect
Device
2198 Shared-bus Connection
System
(24V shared-bus connection
system is optional)
Magnetic Contractor
(M1) Control String
MOD
NET
2198-DBR200-F
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
MOD
NET
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
I/O
I/O
PIM Capacitor
Module Module
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
1
1
Extension
Module
MOD
DC BUS
2
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
I/O-A
6
I/O
MODULE
STATUS
5
UFB
10
DSM Module
Circuit
Protection
Magnetic (M1)
Contactor
MOD
NET
Single-axis
Inverter
D+
D-
MF
ArmorKinetix System Servo
Drives
Circuit
Protection
ATTENTION: Circuit protection can be
added after the power supply cluster to
help protect converters and inverters
from damage in the event of a DC-bus
cable short-circuit.
-
MBRK
+
1321-3R80-B
Line Reactors
(required components)
DSD Module connected to Kinetix VPL motor
DSM Module
Bonded Cabinet
Ground Bus
IMPORTANT
190
When two or three DC-bus power supplies are wired together in the same
drive cluster, they must all be catalog number 2198-P208.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
General Sizing Guidelines
These limitations apply to Kinetix 5700 servo drive systems supplied by a single 2198-Pxxx or
multiple 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies:
• The sum of the inverter motor-power cable lengths for all inverters on the same DC bussharing group must not exceed 1200 m (3937 ft) to comply with CE and UK requirements
when used with 2198-DBRxx-F line filters. See Cable Length Restrictions and System Sizing
on page 29 for additional motor power cable-length limitations.
• The total system capacitance limit is based on the power supply catalog number. DC-bus
groups must not exceed the limits as defined in Table 71.
• No more than three 2198-P208 DC-bus power supplies can be used to increase the
converter power.
• If using the 24V DC shared-bus connection system to distribute control input power to a
cluster of drive modules, current from the 24V power supply must not exceed 40 A.
• The Kinetix 5700 system can have multiple drive clusters in a single DC-bus group. See the
Kinetix 5700 Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2198-UM002 for more information on
extended clusters.
System Sizing Guidelines
You begin the process by selecting the motor for your application and sizing the drive and power
supply combinations. Next, calculate whether the hybrid cable, motor power cable length, total
system capacitance, and 24V current demand are within specifications.
Select Drive/Motor Combinations
The motor required for a particular application determines the servo drive required for full motor
performance.
For best results, use the FactoryTalk® Motion Analyzer™ system sizing and selection tool, available
at: rok.auto/motion-analyzer.
Drive/motor performance specifications and torque/speed curves are also available in the Kinetix
5700 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication KNX-RM010.
Select the Power Supply and Define the DC-bus Groups
•
•
•
•
Determine the converter DC-bus motoring and bus-regulation power requirements based on
the load profile.
Estimate the net converter and inverter power and bus-regulator capacity, based on the
load profiles.
Determine if 2198-CAPMOD-2240 capacitor modules are required.
Determine if 2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312 DC-bus conditioner modules are required.
For best results, use the FactoryTalk Motion Analyzer system sizing and selection tool, available at:
rok.auto/motion-analyzer.
Calculate System and External-bus Capacitance
Total system capacitance is the sum of all internal capacitance values from each of the DSD
modules, DSM modules, single-axis inverters, dual-axis inverters, power supplies, and capacitor
modules in the same DC-bus group.
The total system capacitance must be less than the maximum supported DC-bus capacitance
value of the power supply, see Table 71.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
191
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
IMPORTANT
If your total system capacitance value exceeds the maximum supported
capacitance value of the DC-bus power supply, perform one of the
following:
• Increase the size of the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply
• Use multiple DC-bus power supplies (1…3 power supplies are possible)
Decrease the total system capacitance by removing inverters or capacitor
modules from the DC-bus group.
External bus capacitance is the total system capacitance minus the power supply capacitance. The
external bus capacitance must be entered into the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application for a
regenerative power supply to maintain proper control.
Table 71 - Power Supply Capacitance
Power Supply
DC-bus Power Supply
Cat. No.
2198-P031
2198-P070
Single DC-bus Power Supply
2198-P141
2198-P208
2198-P208
x2
Multiple DC-bus Power
Supplies
2198-P208 x 3
iTRAK® Power Supply
2198T-W25K-ER
Supported Capacitance,
max
µF
Internal Capacitance
µF
585
780
1640
2050
4100
6150
0
8,000
13,000
26,000
39,000
390
Table 72 - Internal Inverter and Accessory Module Capacitance
Drive Module
Dual-axis Inverters
Single-axis Inverters
Capacitor Module
Extension Module
DC-bus Conditioner Module
Distributed Servo Drive (DSD)
Distributed Servo Motor (DSM)
Drive Module
Cat. No.
2198-D006-ERSx
2198-D012-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
2198-D032-ERSx
2198-D057-ERSx
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S130-ERSx
2198-S160-ERSx
2198-S263-ERSx
2198-S312-ERSx
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
2198-DSD0xx-ERSx
2198-DSM0xx-ERSx
Internal Capacitance
µF
165
330
390
705
560
840
1120
2050
2240
0
0
5.2
5.2
Calculate the Total Motor Power Cable Length
To meet CE and UK requirements, the sum of all motor power cable lengths from the same DC-bus
group must not exceed 1200 m (3937 ft) when 2198-DBRxx-F line filters are used. See Cable Length
Restrictions and System Sizing on page 29 for additional motor power cable-length limitations.
192
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
Calculate 24V DC Control Power Current Demand
If using the 24V DC shared-bus connection system to distribute control input power to a drive
cluster, output current from the 24V power supply must not exceed 40 A.
Table 73 - Control Power Current Specifications
24V Current Per Module
(non-brake motor) (1)
ADC
Module
Cat. No.
Drive Module
2198-P031
2198-P070
2198-P141
2198-P208
2198-D006-ERSx
2198-D012-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
DC-bus Power Supplies
Dual-axis Inverters
24V Inrush Current (2)
A
0.8
4.0
1.9
1.4 (3)
4.0
2198-D032-ERSx
1.7 (3)
2198-D057-ERSx
2.3 (3)
Single-axis Inverters
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S130-ERSx
2198-S160-ERSx
2198-S263-ERSx
2198-S312-ERSx
4.6
4.0
PIM Module
2198-PIM070
12
13.2(4)
iTRAK Power Supply (5)
Capacitor Module
Extension Module
DC-bus Conditioner Module
2198T-W25K-ER
1.3
2.2
2198-CAPMOD-2240
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312
0.1
–
0.1
7.0
–
7.0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
For motor-brake current values, see to the Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD001.
Inrush current duration is less than 30 ms.
Values are base current per module.
Values are with no capacitor modules. For Inrush current with capacitor modules, see Table 74.
These values represent only the iTRAK power supply. They do not include the iTRAK motor modules that are connected to the iTRAK
power supply and also draw current from this 24V control power input. For more information regarding 24V control power
requirements, see iTRAK System with TriMax Bearings User Manual, publication
2198T-UM002, or iTRAK 5730 System User Manual, publication 2198T-UM003.
IMPORTANT
If the 24V control-power output current (based on your system
calculation) exceeds 40 A, you can insert another control-power input
wiring connector at any point in your drive cluster. However, the input
connector must always extend the 24V DC-bus from left to right.
Table 74 - PIM Module 24V DC Power Supply Current Demand (Inrush)
1 Capacitor Module(2)
6 Capacitor Modules
11 Capacitor Modules
4 Axes(1)
8 Axes(1)
12 Axes(1)
16 Axes(1)
20 Axes(1)
24 Axes(1)
7A
8.5 A
10 A
11.3 A
13 A
14.3 A
30.3 A
32.8 A
31.6 A
33.2 A
32.5 A
33.5 A
33.4 A
34 A
32.2 A
34.4 A
32 A
35 A
(1) Including 2 brake motors out of the total number.
(2) One capacitor module is 2.24 mF
Table 75 - PIM Module 24V DC Power Supply Current Demand (Continuous)
4 Axes(1)
58V Continuous Output 0.5 A
Current
24V Continuous Input 2.5 A
Current
8 Axes(1)
12 Axes(1)
16 Axes(1)
20 Axes(1)
24 Axes(1)
1.3 A
1.9 A
2.6 A
3.3 A
4.0 A
4.5 A
6.0 A
8.0 A
9.8 A
12.0 A
(1) Including 2 brake motors out of the total number.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
193
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
Figure 95 - PIM Module Power Output Specification
PIM Module 58V Output Current Profile
Number of Axes with Brake Motor
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
16
18
20
22
24
Total Number of Axes
24V DC Voltage Drop Calculation Example
In this example, the 24V DC power supply is 21.3 m (70 ft) away from the Kinetix 5700 drive system.
The drive system includes one bus supply, two 2198-S312-ERS4 single-axis inverters, two 2198D057-ERS4 dual-axis inverters, and one 2198-PIM070 module. The inverters supply power to seven
non-brake motors.
Figure 96 - 24V DC Voltage Drop Example System
21.3 m (70 ft)
Input Wiring
Connector
2198-P208 DC-bus
Power Supplies
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control Power
(customer-supplied)
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2198-S312-ERS4
Single-axis Inverter
2198-S312-ERS4
Single-axis Inverter
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2198-D057-ERS4
Dual-axis Inverters
2198-PIM070
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
24V DC Shared Bus
Control Power
Allen-Bradley
1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
Input
AC Input Power
2
I/O
1
I/O
6
1
10
5
I/O
1
6
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
4
I/O
I/O
5
5
10
ArmorKinetix System Drive
System
(front view)
10 5
UFB-A
10 5
UFB-A
10
UFB-B
1
5
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-A
10
MF-B
MBRK
+
+
V
MF-A
-
-
MBRK
W
6
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
I/O-A
U
21mm2 (4 AWG-250 kcmil)
15-20 Nm (132-177 lbin)
W
V
U
21mm2 (4 AWG-250 kcmil)
15-20 Nm (132-177 lbin)
Follow these steps to calculate the voltage drop for your drive system. The system conditions
remain the same, but the wire gauge (AWG) is increased to reduce the voltage drop.
1. Determine the 24V DC control power current demand.
In this example, the total current demand is 22.9 A. See Calculate 24V DC Control Power
Current Demand on page 193 for current values.
Module
Quantity
Current Demand
2198-P208
1
9.1 A
2198-PIM070
1
12 A
2198-S312-ERS4
2
4.6 • 2 = 9.2 A
2198-D057-ERS4
2
2.3 • 2 = 4.6 A
Total current demand
194
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
34.9 A
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
2. Determine the voltage drop across the wire that is used to supply 24V power to the drive
system (voltage drop = current draw • resistance of the wire).
You must obtain the wire resistance value from the wire manufacturer. Resistance values
used below are only examples.
Wire Length
21.3 m (70 ft)
Wire Gauge
mm2 (AWG)
Calculation
Voltage Drop
1.5 (16)
34.9 A • 0.281 Ω
9.80V
4.0 (12)
34.9 A • 0.111 Ω
3.87V
6.0 (10)
34.9 A • 0.070 Ω
2.44V
3. Determine if the voltage supplied to the drive system is within its required input-voltage
range; 24V ±10% (21.6…26.4V DC).
Wire Length
21.3 m (70 ft)
Wire Gauge
mm2 (AWG)
Calculation
Applied Voltage
1.5 (16)
24V – 6.43V
17.57V (insufficient)
4.0 (12)
24V – 2.54V
21.46V (insufficient)
6.0 (10)
24V – 1.60V
22.40V (acceptable)
In this example, increasing the wire gauge to 6 mm2 (10 AWG) is one way to lower the
voltage drop.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
195
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
System Sizing Example
This example shows how a single Kinetix 5700 drive cluster meets the total bus capacitance, power
cable length, and 24V DC current limitations.
Figure 97 - Example DC-bus Group (single drive cluster)
2198-PIM070 Power Interface Module
2198-D006-ERSx Dual-axis Inverters
2198-D020-ERSx Dual-axis Inverters
2198-S086-ERSx Single-axis Inverter
2198-S160-ERSx Single-axis Inverter
2198-P208 DC-bus Power Supply
In this example, only 1 drive cluster defines the DC-bus group.
• Maximum motor power cable length: 1200 m (3937 ft). See Cable
Length Restrictions and System Sizing on page 29 for additional motor
power cable-length limitations.
- Total motor power cable length is 337 m (1106 ft)
• Maximum supported capacitance: 13,000 µF
- Total system capacitance is 4840 µF
- External bus capacitance is 4840 - 2050 = 2790 µF
• Maximum 24V DC control power current: 40 A
- Total 24V DC control power current is 20.3 A
- The Coil Current column shows how much of the 24V current is
consumed by the motor brake circuit.
MOD
NET
2
2
1
1
1
1
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
MOD
NET
2
6
1
10
5
6
1
10
5
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
MOD
NET
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
6 1
2
1
1
I/O-A
6
MOD
NET
2
2
1
1
I/O
MOD
NET
2
2
1
I/O
MOD
NET
I/O-A
6 1
I/O-B
1
I/O-A
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
6 1
I/O-B
6
1
10 5
10
UFB-A
UFB-B
5
I/O-A
6
4
I/O
5
UFB
UFB
D+
D-
D+
D-
D+
D-
-
MBRK
+
D+
D-
MF-A
MF
MF
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
MF-A
D+
D-
MF-B
D+
D-
MF-A
D+
D-
D+
D-
MF-B
10
MF-A
MF-B
-
MBRK
+
All of the total system values are within the acceptable range. The 24V DC
power supply should be rated to greater than 28 A inrush current.
Table 76 - System Sizing Example Data
Servo Motor
DC-bus Group
Cat. No.
2198-P208
2198-S160-ERSx
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-DSM016-ERSxB0752M
2198-DSD016-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
2198-D006-ERSx
2198-D006-ERSx
Totals
24V DC Control Power Current Calculations
24V Current
24V Inrush
Brake Current (non-brake
Total Current
Current
@ 24V DC
motor)
A
ADC
A
ADC
Internal
Capacitance
µF
Cable Length
Servo Motor
m (ft)
Cat. No.
Brake Option
Yes/No
—
—
—
2050
1120
560
—
50 (164)
90 (295)
—
No
Yes
—
—
2.10
1.9
4.6
4.6
1.9
4.6
6.7
4.0
4.0
4.0
—
5.2
50 (164)
Yes
—
—
—
—
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
5.2
4 (13)
20 (66)
15 (49)
9 (30)
90 (295)
9 (30)
9 (30)
15 (49)
30 (98)
391 (1283)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
—
–
–
0.50
0.50
0.50
–
–
–
3.6
—
—
—
1.4
1.4
4.0
1.4
2.4
4.0
1.4
1.9
4.0
1.4
1.4
4.0
16.7
20.3
28.0
Axis
390
390
165
165
4850.4
—
MPL-B980E
MPL-B660F
2198-DSM016ERSx-B0752M
VPL-B1003C
VPL-B1152F
VPL-B1152F
VPL-B1003C
VPL-B1003C
MPL-B310P
MPL-B310P
MPL-B310P
MPL-B310P
For more information on motor and motor-brake specifications, refer to the Kinetix Rotary Motion
Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD001.
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix B
System Sizing Application
Example
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
This example shows how to size the DC-bus power supply for your multi-axis system by using the
motor output power (kW). Sizing is based on the largest motor kW value in your drive system.
The Kinetix 5700 drive modules and ArmorKinetix PIM modules are zero-stacked and use the
shared-bus connection system to extend power from the 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply to
multiple drive modules.
For best results, use the FactoryTalk Motion Analyzer system sizing and selection tool, available at:
rok.auto/motion-analyzer.
Table 77 - Kinetix 5700 System Power Supply Continuous Output Power
DC-Bus Power Supply
Cat. No.
2198-P031
2198-P070
2198-P141
2198-P208
Continuous Output
Power
kW
7
17
31
46
In this typical system, all axes are running in an asynchronous rapid acceleration/deceleration
motion profile. Use this formula to calculate the minimum continuous output-power (kW) for your
Kinetix 5700 drive system:
2198-Pxxx = Largest motor-rated kW x (axis-count x 0.6) + (axis-count x 0.2)
Table 78 - Motor/Drive System Example
Motor
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
Motor Cat. No.
Motor Rated Output (1)
kW
MPM-B2153F
7.2
MPL-B660F
6.1
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B0753M
0.78(2)
2198-DSM024-ERSx-B0753M
0.82
2198-D020-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
2
VPL-B0753
2
9 = axis count
Drive Cat. No.
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S086-ERSx
(1) For more motor specifications, see the Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD001.
(2) For more DSM module specifications, see Kinetix 5700, 5500, 5300, and 5100 Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication
KNX-TD003.
Continuous Output Power, min (kW) = 7.2 x (8 x 0.6) + (8 x 0.2)
kW = 7.2 x 4.8 + 1.6
kW = 36.16
In this example, the MPM-B2153F motor has the largest motor-rated output. As a result, the
minimum continuous output-power = 36.16 kW, and the 2198-P208 DC-bus power supply is
required for the 8-axis system example.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
197
Appendix B
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
Notes:
198
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix
C
Maximum Motor Cable Lengths for Kinetix 5700
Power Supplies
This appendix provides information on maximum motor cable length limitations for ArmorKinetix®
systems.
Maximum motor cable lengths for the following configurations are dependent on these
configuration variables:
• Kinetix® 5700 power supply
- 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supply
• AC input power type
- WYE grounded
- WYE impedance grounded
- WYE/Delta corner grounded or ungrounded
• AC input voltage
- 240V AC
- 480V AC
- 400V AC
• Whether the drive cluster includes a DC-bus conditioner module
• Allen-Bradley® servo motor or actuator connected to the inverter
Table 79 - Drive-to-Motor Feedback Cable Length
Feedback Type
Single-turn or multi-turn absolute
Incremental
Cable Length, max (1)(2)
m (ft)
up to 90 (295) (in-cabinet drive)
up to 4 (13.1) (DSD module)
up to 30 (98) (in-cabinet drive)
up to 4 (13.1) (DSD module)
(1) See DC-bus Power Supply Configurations on page 200 for the maximum motor-to-drive cable length for specific motor and
actuator families.
(2) Cable length is not affected by use of the 2198-H2DCK converter kit on the Kinetix 5700 drive.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
199
Appendix C
Maximum Motor Cable Lengths for Kinetix 5700 Power Supplies
DC-bus Power Supply
Configurations
Cable length maximums for 2198-Pxxx DC-bus power supplies when they operate with DC-bus
regulation disabled.
Table 80 - DC-bus Power Supply - DFE (480V AC input)
AC Input Power Source Type
WYE Grounded
Delta Corner Grounded
• WYE Impedance Grounded (1)
• WYE Ungrounded (2)
• Delta Ungrounded (2)
Motor/Actuator Cat. No.
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-B1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• Third-party Motor (1200V min)
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-B1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
DSD-to-Motor
Cable Length, max
m (ft)
3 (9.8)
4 (13.1)
4 (13.1)
3 (9.8)
4 (13.1)
(1) Impedance grounded systems running in ground fault conditions, for prolonged periods of time, cause additional stress to the
motor insulation and can cause premature motor failure.
(2) Unbalanced, floating, ungrounded systems can cause additional stress to the motor.
Table 81 - DC-bus Power Supply - DFE (400V AC input)
AC Input Power Source Type
WYE Grounded
Delta Corner Grounded
• WYE Impedance Grounded (1)
• WYE Ungrounded (2)
• Delta Ungrounded (2)
Motor/Actuator Cat. No.
DSD-to-Motor
Cable Length, max
m (ft)
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-B1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• Third-party Motor (1200V min)
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-B1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
4 (13.1)
(1) Impedance grounded systems running in ground fault conditions, for prolonged periods of time, cause additional stress to the
motor insulation and can cause premature motor failure.
(2) Unbalanced, floating, ungrounded systems can cause additional stress to the motor.
Table 82 - DC-bus Power Supply - DFE (200V AC input)
AC Input Power Source Type
WYE Grounded
Delta Corner Grounded
• WYE Impedance Grounded (1)
• WYE Ungrounded (2)
• Delta Ungrounded (2)
Motor/Actuator Cat. No.
DSD-to-Motor
Cable Length, max
m (ft)
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Axxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-A1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
• VPx-A1xxxx, MPx-B1xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1200V min)
• LDAT-Sxxxxxx
• LDC-Cxxxxxx
• VPx-Bxxxxx, MPx-Bxxxxx
• VPAR-B1xxxx, VPAR-B2xxxx
• Third-party Motor (1000V min. rated)
4 (13.1)
(1) Impedance grounded systems running in ground fault conditions, for prolonged periods of time, cause additional stress to the
motor insulation and can cause premature motor failure.
(2) Unbalanced, floating, ungrounded systems can cause additional stress to the motor.
200
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix
D
Motor Control Feature Support
This appendix provides feature descriptions for the induction motors and permanent-magnet
motors that are supported by ArmorKinetix® DSx modules.
Frequency Control Methods
The ArmorKinetix DSD modules support three open-loop frequency control methods. These are the
choices:
• Basic Volts/Hertz - This method is used in single asynchronous-motor applications
• Basic Volts/Hertz - Fan Pump - This method is similar to Basic Volts/Hertz, but is
specifically tailored for fan/pump applications
• Sensorless Vector with Slip Compensation - This method is used for most constant
torque applications. Provides excellent starting, acceleration, and running torque
To configure your induction motor in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, refer to Configure
Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties on page 106.
Open-loop frequency control is suitable in applications such as conveyors, pumps, and fans.
Features include the following:
• Start Boost and Run Boost
• Electronic motor thermal-overload protection per Class 10 requirements
• Two skip frequencies, in which the drive does not operate
• All three-phase induction motors, suitable for variable speed drive (VFD) operation, are
supported
Table 83 - Motor Specifications
Attribute
Output frequency, max
Pole pairs, max
Value
590 Hz
50
Motor cable length, max
4 m (13 ft) (1)
(1) Applies to all ArmorKinetix modules and compatible motors/actuators.
Basic Volts/Hertz
Volts/hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and output frequency.
Voltage is applied to the motor, which is based on the operating frequency command at a fixed
volts/hertz ratio. The ratio is calculated from the motor nameplate data and entered into the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application > Axis Properties > Frequency Control category.
The Basic Volts/Hertz method provides various patterns. The default configuration is a straight line
from zero to rated voltage and frequency. As seen in Figure 98, you can change the volts/hertz
ratio to provide increased torque performance when required by programming five distinct points
on the curve.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
201
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Table 84 - Basic Volts/Hertz Definitions
Curve Feature
Start boost
Run boost
Break voltage/frequency
Motor nameplate voltage/
frequency
Maximum voltage/frequency
Definition
Used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration of
heavy loads at lower speeds.
Used to create additional running torque at low speeds. The value is typically less
than the required acceleration torque. The drive lowers the boost voltage to this level
when running at low speeds (not accelerating). This reduces excess motor heating
that could result if the higher start/accel boost level were used.
Used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts/Hertz curve, providing
additional torque.
Sets the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design. Marks the beginning
of the constant power region.
Slopes the portion of the curve that is used above base speed.
Figure 98 - Basic Volts/Hertz Method
Voltage, max
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Break Voltage
Start/Accel Boost
Run Boost
Break
Frequency
Base Frequency,
(nameplate)
Frequency,
max
Basic Volts/Hertz for Fan/Pump Applications
The Basic Volts/Hertz Fan/Pump (fan/pump) method is based on the Basic Volts/Hertz (V/Hz)
method, but is specifically tailored for fan/pump applications.
Figure 99 - Output Voltage Equation
Vx =
fx
fn
2
V n – V boost + Vboost
Where:
Vx = Output voltage
fx = Output frequency
Vn = Rated voltage
Fn = Rated frequency
Vboost = Run boost voltage
For maximum system efficiency, fan/pump loads use variable frequency drives that are equipped
with a specific V/Hz curve where voltage is proportional to square of the frequency.
202
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 100 - Basic Volts/Hertz Fan/Pump Method
Voltage, max
Voltage
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Run Boost
Frequency (Hz)
Base Frequency,
(nameplate)
Frequency,
max
The Fan/Pump control method supports the run-boost attribute, but does not support
break-voltage, break-frequency, or start-boost.
Sensorless Vector
The Sensorless Vector method uses a volts/hertz core enhanced by a current resolver, slip
estimator, and a voltage-boost compensator based on the operating conditions of the motor.
Figure 101 - Sensorless Vector Method
Motor Pole
Pairs
Velocity Trim
Velocity Command
x
+
V/Hz
Voltage
Control
+
Inverter
Motor
Vboost
Estimator
Slip Speed
Slip
Estimation
Torque
Estimate
Load
Torque
Estimator
Current
Resolver
Current
Feedback
The algorithms operate on the knowledge of the relationship between the rated slip and torque of
the motor. The drive uses applied voltages and measured currents to estimate operating slipfrequency. You can enter values to identify the motor resistance value or you can run a motor test
to identify the motor resistance value (see Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure on page 215). Motor
nameplate data and test results are ways to accurately estimate the required boost voltage.
The sensorless vector method offers better torque production and speed regulation over a wider
speed range than basic volts/hertz.
Dynamic boost is applied internally to compensate voltage drop and improve starting torque.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
203
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 102 - Approximate Load Curve
Voltage, max
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Ideal, volts/hertz
Dynamic Boost Applied
Base Frequency,
(nameplate)
Current Limiting for
Frequency Control
Frequency,
max
The current limiting module prevents the OutputCurrent value from exceeding the
OperativeCurrentLimit value when the drive is configured in Frequency Control mode.
Figure 103 - Current Limiting Module
Fine Command
Velocity
Velocity from Planner
(MAJ)
Operative Current
Limit
+
–
+
–
Velocity
Reference
PI
Output
Current
In Frequency Control mode, OperativeCurrentLimit is the minimum value of the motor-thermal
current limit, inverter-thermal current limit, motor-peak current limit, drive-peak current limit, and
the CurrentVectorLimit value.
The Effects of Current Limiting
Indirect current limiting is available for induction motors configured for frequency control. You can
use this feature to help prevent overcurrent faults due to aggressive acceleration/deceleration
profiles or impact loads. The Current Limiting attribute uses a PI regulator to control the
OutputCurrent by adjusting the velocity reference.
IMPORTANT
204
When configured for Frequency Control (induction motors only), select the
Decel and disable stopping action only when the Current Limiting feature is
enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
0 200
Time (ms)
400
Output Current
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 200 400
Time (ms)
200
Output Current
Output Frequency
Operative Current Limit
Aggressive Acceleration, Current Limiting Active
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
Frequency (Hz)
Aggressive Acceleration, No Current Limiting
Frequency (Hz)
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Output Current (Arms), Operative Current Limit (rms)
Output Current (Arms), Operative Current Limit (rms)
Figure 104 - Effects of Current Limiting on an Aggressive Acceleration
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Operative Current Limit
1600
1800
200
Output Frequency
Figure 105 - Effects of Current Limiting on an Impact Load
4000 4200
Time (ms)
4400
Output Current
4600
4800
500
5200
5400
5600
5800
Output Frequency
Operative Current Limit
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Frequency (Hz)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
Output Current (Arms), Operative Current Limit (rms)
Impact Load, Current Limiting Active
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Frequency (Hz)
Output Current (Arms), Operative Current Limit (rms)
Impact Load, No Current Limiting
4000 4200 4400
Time (ms)
Output Current
4600
4800
500
5200
Operative Current Limit
5400
5600
5800
Output Frequency
Current limiting for frequency control is not enabled by default. You can enable via messaging by
using the following device-specific attributes.
We recommend you leave the Kp, Ki, Kd gains at the default values.
Table 85 - Enable Current Limiting via Messaging
Attribute
Offset
Type
Attribute Name
3022
SINT
Current Limiting
Enable
3023
REAL
Current Limiting Kd
3024
REAL
Current Limiting Ki
3025
REAL
Current Limiting Kp
Conditional
Implementation
Description
Frequency Control
Induction Motor only
When enabled, limits the rate of change to the velocity reference during high-current situations for
improved current limiting. This feature is only active when executing an MDS command and when
configured for Frequency Control.
0 = Current Limiting is disabled
1 = Current Limiting is enabled
Derivative gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency Control
and when executing an MDS command. Units of seconds.
Integral gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency Control
and when executing an MDS command. Units of feedback counts / (Amp, inst* Seconds).
Proportional gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency
Control and when executing an MDS command. Units of feedback counts / Amp, inst.
IMPORTANT
For induction motors greater than 5 Hp, it is recommended that the Stability
Control feature also be enabled when Current Limiting is enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
205
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Enable the Current Limiting Feature
In this example, a Message Configuration (MSG) instruction is configured to set the
CurrentLimitingEnable attribute for axis 3 of a dual-axis inverter. The Instance field is used to direct
the message to the proper axis. For single-axis inverters the value of 1 is used for Instance.
Set the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute Value
For current limiting, the CurrentVectorLimit attribute is used to help determine the
OperativeCurrentLimit of the drive. Set the CurrentVectorLimit value to artificially lower
OperativeCurrentLimit below the drive or motor peak current limits.
1. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to CurrentVectorLimit.
2. Set the CurrentVectorLimit value appropriate for your application.
IMPORTANT
206
The CurrentVectorLimit attribute appears in the Parameter List of the Studio
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Stability Control for
Frequency Control
Motor Control Feature Support
Stability control is available for induction motors configured for frequency control. This feature can
be used to help remove resonances that are sometimes seen on larger motors. The stability control
feature adjusts the OutputFrequency and OutputVoltage commands to stabilize the OutputCurrent.
Figure 106 - Effects of Stability Control
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
20
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback versus Commanded Speed with Stability Control Enabled
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback A-pk
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback A-pk
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback versus Commanded Speed with Stability Control Disabled
Commanded Frequency, Hz
Iq
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
Commanded Frequency, Hz
Iq
Id Feedback
Id Feedback
Stability control for frequency control is not enabled by default. You can enable via messaging by
using the following device-specific attributes.
We recommend you leave the angle, voltage gains, and filter bandwidth at the default
values.
Table 86 - Enable Current Limiting via Messaging
Attribute
Offset
Type
Attribute Name
3026
SINT
Stability Control
Enable
3027
REAL
Stability Filter
Bandwidth
3028
REAL
Stability Voltage Gain
3029
REAL
Stability Angle Gain
Conditional
Implementation
Description
Frequency Control
Induction Motor only
Enables stability control when configured for frequency control.
0 = Stability Control is disabled
1 = Stability Control is enabled
Sets the bandwidth of the low-pass filter applied to the current feedback signal. This bandwidth is
common to both the angle and voltage stability control algorithms. Units of radians/second.
The gain of the voltage stability control function. Only active when configured for frequency control.
Units of Volt (inst,p-n)/Amp (inst).
The gain of the electrical angle stability control function. Only active when configured for frequency
control. Units of radians/Amp (inst).
IMPORTANT
Because the stability control feature works by manipulating the
OutputVoltage and OutputFrequency signals, these signals may appear
'noisy' when the feature is enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
207
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Enable the Stability Control Feature
In this example, a Message Configuration (MSG) instruction is configured to enable the
StabilityControl attribute for axis 3 of a dual-axis inverter. The Instance field is used to direct the
message to the proper axis. For single-axis inverters the value of 1 is used for Instance.
Skip Speeds
Some machines have a resonant operating frequency (vibration speed) that is undesirable or could
cause equipment damage. To guard against continuous operation at one or more resonant points,
you can configure the skip-speed attributes in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application>Axis
Properties>Parameter List category.
The value that is programmed into the SkipSpeed1 or SkipSpeed2 attribute sets the central speed
of a skip-speed band within which the drive does not operate. The width of the band is determined
by the SkipSpeedBand attribute. The range is split, half above and half below the SkipSpeedx
attribute. Any command set-point within this band is adjusted by the skip-speed feature to fall at
either the upper or lower skip-speed band boundary value. The skip-speed feature contains
hysteresis (25% of the SkipSpeedBand value) to prevent frequent switching of VelocityReference.
Figure 107 - Single Skip Speed Example
Speed
Velocity
Setpoint
Velocity
Reference
SkipSpeedBand Upper Boundary
SkipSpeed
SkipSpeedBand Lower Boundary
Time
A SkipSpeedBand value of 0 disables the skip-speed feature.
208
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
IMPORTANT
When a single SkipSpeed value is desired, the SkipSpeed1 and
SkipSpeed2 settings must be the same.
IMPORTANT
Acceleration and deceleration are affected by the skip-speed feature.
Too large of a SkipSpeedBand value can result in an overcurrent drive
fault.
IMPORTANT
The MaximumFrequency attribute is always enforced. Skip-speed band
boundary values beyond the MaximumFrequency value do not apply.
Multiple Skip Speeds
The ArmorKinetix DSx modules feature two independent skip-speed attributes (SkipSpeed1 and
SkipSpeed2) that use the same SkipSpeedBand.
Figure 108 - Multiple Skip Speed Example
SkipSpeed2
Speed
SkipSpeedBand
SkipSpeedBand
SkipSpeed1
0
0
Time
When skip-speed band boundaries of SkipSpeed1 and SkipSpeed2 overlap, the skip-speed
hysteresis is calculated using the effective skip band.
In Figure 109, SkipSpeed1 is set to 0 and SkipSpeed2 is set to 15 hz. The skip band is 10 Hz wide.
At point A the axis is enabled, and the motor begins to rotate at -5 Hz even though the command is
0 Hz. As the command reaches hysteresis point the output frequency begins to follow the
command. During deceleration, when the command decreases to 0 Hz, the output frequency
continues at 5 Hz until the axis is disabled (point B), or the command is changed outside of the skip
band.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
209
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 109 - Zero-speed Skip Frequency
30
25
20
SkipSpeed1 = 0 Hz
SkipSpeed2 = 15 Hz
Skip Band = 10 Hz
15
10
5
A
0
B
-5
-10
0
5000
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
Output Frequency
Flux Up
30,000
35,000
40,000
Command Frequency
AC induction motors require that flux builds in the motor stator before controlled torque can
develop. To build flux, voltage is applied. There are two methods to flux the motor and three
configurable FluxUpControl settings.
With the No Delay setting (normal start), flux is established when the output voltage and frequency
are applied to the motor. While flux is building, the unpredictable nature of the developed torque
can cause the rotor to oscillate even though acceleration of the load can occur. In the motor, the
acceleration profile does not follow the commanded acceleration profile due to the lack of
developed torque.
Figure 110 - Acceleration Profile during Normal Start - No Flux Up
Frequency
Reference
Frequency
Rated Flux
Stator
Rotor
Oscillation due to flux
being established.
0
Time
With the Automatic setting (default) DC current is applied to the motor so that flux builds before
rotation. The flux-up time period is based on the level of flux-up current and the rotor time
constant of the motor. The flux-up current is not adjustable.
In the Manual setting, DC current is applied to the motor so that flux builds before rotation. The fluxup time period is determined by the FluxUpTime attribute. The flux-up current is not adjustable.
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 111 - Flux Up Current versus Flux Up Time
Flux Up Current
Flux Up Current = Maximum DC Current
Rated Flux
Current
Rated Motor Flux
Motor Flux
0
T1
T2
T3
T4
Flux Up Time
Once rated flux is reached in the motor, normal operation can begin and the desired acceleration
profile achieved.
Figure 112 - Rated Flux Reached
IR Voltage - SVC
Greater of IR Voltage or
Voltage Boost - V/Hz
Flux Up
Voltage
Stator Voltage
Rotor Speed
Motor Flux
Stator Frequency
Flux Up
Normal Operation
Time
Flux Up Attributes
ID
Access
Attribute
558
Set
Flux Up Control
559
Set
Flux Up Time (1)
Conditional Implementation
Ind Motor only
0 = No Delay
1 = Manual Delay
2 = Automatic Delay
Ind Motor only
Units: Seconds
Default: 0.0000
Min/Max: 0.0000 / 1000.00
(1) This is the time designated for the Manual Delay setting. This attribute is not supported by the Automatic delay method. The flux-up
feature is disabled if FluxUpControl is set to Manual Delay and FluxUpTime is set to 0.
FluxUpControl Attribute
When the motion axis is enabled, DC current is applied to an induction motor to build stator flux
before transitioning to the Running state. This attribute controls how an induction motor is to be
fluxed in the Starting state prior to transitioning to the Running state.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
211
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Table 87 - FluxUp Control Delay Methods
Delay Method
No delay
Manual delay
Automatic delay
Description
The axis transitions immediately to the Running state while the motor flux is building.
The axis remains in the Starting state while the motor stator flux is building according to the
Flux Up Time attribute.
The drive determines the amount of delay time to fully flux the motor based on the motor
configuration attribute data or measurements.
FluxUpTime Attribute
When FluxUpControl is configured for Manual Delay, this attribute sets the length of delay time to
fully flux the motor before transitioning to the Running state.
Configure the Flux Up Attributes
Follow these steps to configure the flux-up attributes.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to FluxUpControl.
3. From the FluxUpControl dropdown menu, choose the proper delay value appropriate for
your application.
4. If you chose Manual Delay in step 3, enter a value in the FluxUpTime attribute appropriate
for your application.
If you chose No Delay or Automatic Delay in step 3, the FluxUpTime attribute does not apply.
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Current Regulator Loop
Settings
Current loop bandwidth is set differently based on the selected motor type.
Table 88 - Current Regulator Loop Settings
Default Torque/Current Loop Bandwidth
Hz
Motor Type
Rotary permanent magnet
Rotary interior permanent magnet
Linear permanent magnet
Rotary induction
IMPORTANT
Motor Category
Motor Control Feature Support
1000
400
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application does not perform
calculations when the Torque/Current Loop Bandwidth attribute is
updated. This bandwidth affects many other gains and limits. Changing,
(lowering) the torque loop bandwidth without updating all the dependent
attributes can result in drive/motor instability.
From the Motor category you can enter motor nameplate or datasheet values (phase-to-phase
parameters) for rotary induction motors.
In this example, the Motor category>Nameplate / Datasheet parameters, were taken from a typical
motor performance datasheet. Max Speed and Peak Current values are typically application
dependent.
Figure 113 - Motor Nameplate / Datasheet Example
See Figure 114 for motor manufacturer performance data sheet example.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
213
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 114 - Motor Manufacturer Performance Data Sheet
C E R T I FI C A T I ON DA T A SHE E T
T Y PI C A L M OT OR PE R FOR M A NC E DA T A
HP
kW
SY NC . R P M
F .L . R P M
F R AME
E NC L O SUR E
K V A C O DE
DE SI G N
1
.75
1800
1725
56C
T E NV
P
A
PH
Hz
VOLTS
F L AMPS
ST A R T T Y P E
DUT Y
I NSL
S.F .
A M B°C
EL EV ATION
3
60
230/
460
3/
INV E R T E R ONL Y
C ONT INUOUS
F3
1.0
40
3300
1.5
F UL L L O AD E F F : 84
3/4 L O AD E F F : 82.5
1/2 L O AD E F F : 78.5
G T D. E F F
E L E C . T Y PE
F UL L L O AD PF : 75
3/4 L O AD PF : 65.5
1/2 L O AD PF : 51
81.5
S Q C AGE INV DUT Y
F .L . T O R Q UE
L OC K E D R OT OR AMPS
3 L B -F T
30 / 15
L .R . T O R Q UE
10.8 L B -F T
360%
NO L O A D A M P S
B.D. T O R Q UE
15 L B -F T
2/
1
F .L . R I SE °C
500%
65
SO UND P R E SSUR E
@ 3 FT.
SO UND P O W E R
R O T O R W K ^2
M A X . W K ^2
SA F E ST A L L T I M E
ST A R T S /
H O UR
APPR OX .
MOT OR W G T
62 dB A
72 dB A
0.11 L B -F T ^2
0 L B -F T ^2
0 SE C.
0
42 L B S .
E QU I V A L E NT W Y E C K T .PA R A M E T E R S (OHM S PE R PHA SE )
R1
R2
X1
X2
XM
8.378
5.6232
10.7068
9.9116
278.036
RM
ZR E F
XR
TD
T D0
11132.8
284
1.7
0.0071
0.136
Motor > Model Category
From the Motor > Model category you can enter additional motor nameplate or datasheet values
(phase-to-neutral parameters) for induction motors.
The Motor > Model parameters are used in closed-loop induction-motor control mode, sensorless
vector control mode, and when FluxUp is enabled, and are estimated automatically by the
Logix Designer application based on the motor nameplate data. You can also enter these
parameter values directly from the motor nameplate/datasheet or indirectly by running a
Motor > Analyzer test.
Figure 115 - Phase-to-Neutral Parameters
IMPORTANT
214
If you do not know the Stator Leakage, Rotor Leakage, Stator
Resistance, Rated Flux Current, and system inertia, you can run the
static motor test and Autotune procedure to determine the
parameter values.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Motor > Analyzer Category
From the Motor > Analyzer category you can perform three types of tests to identify motor
parameters.
In this example, the Calculate Model test was run. If the Motor>Analyzer test executes successfully,
and you accept the test values, they populate the Model Parameter attributes.
Figure 116 - Motor Analyzer Category
Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure
You can perform three types of tests to identify motor parameters and one test for motor/system
inertia. These parameters are used by sensorless-vector frequency-control and induction motor
closed-loop modes. Table 89 recommends which test to use based on the control mode and
application.
Table 89 - Motor Tests and Autotune Matrix
Control Mode
Induction motor - Frequency control
Induction motor - Closed-loop control
Description
Basic volts/hertz
Basic volts/hertz for
Fan/Pump
Sensorless vector
Calculate
Not required
Static
Not required
Dynamic
Not required
Autotune (inertia test)
Not required
Not required
Not required
Not required
Not required
Required
Preferred
Not required
Not required
Required
Preferred (1)
Preferred
Required (2)
(1) If it is not desired to rotate the motor (due to coupled load) you can perform this test for induction motor closed-loop mode and skip the Dynamic test. The dynamic test provides the best results for
induction motor closed-loop mode.
(2) The motor inertia value must be non-zero prior to running a dynamic test. The motor inertia value is estimated automatically based upon the Motor Nameplate data in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
215
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
The Motor > Analyzer category offers three choices for calculating or measuring electrical motor
data.
Follow these steps to run motor tests and identify motor parameters.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Motor>Analyzer category.
Nameplate data was entered on page 213. The nameplate data must be entered before
running the Calculate test.
3. Click Start to run the test.
4. Click Accept Test Results to save the values.
5. Click OK.
Motor Analyzer Category Troubleshooting
Calculate Model
When a Calculate test is run, the drive uses motor nameplate data to estimate the motor’s Rated
Flux Current, Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) and Rotor Leakage Reactance
(X2). The drive also calculates the rated slip speed based on rated speed and rated frequency. No
measurements are taken when using the Calculate test.
Static Motor Test
Use the Static test if the motor shaft cannot rotate or if it is already coupled to the load. Only tests
that do not create motor movement are run. During this test, the Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator
Leakage Reactance (X1), and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) values are measured during a series of
static tests. The Rated Flux Current is estimated, since measurement of this value requires motor
movement. The drive also calculates the rated slip speed based on rated speed and rated
frequency.
The Static test requires that you enter initial estimates for Rated Flux Current, Rated Slip Speed,
Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1), and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) into the
Motor Model fields.
• For the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 35.00 or later, initial estimates are
populated by the controller.
216
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Dynamic Motor Test
Dynamic tests are run with the motor disconnected from the load because the motor shaft turns
and there are no travel limits. This is often the most accurate test method. During this test, the
Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) values are
measured in a series of static tests. The Rated Flux Current is measured during a rotational test, in
which the drive commands 75% of the motor rated speed.
The rated slip speed is measured during a second rotational test, in which the drive commands a
speed (default of 100% of the motor rated speed) and set a torque limit (default of 50% of the
motor rated torque). This quickly accelerates the motor to rated speed and then decelerates back
to zero speed.
IMPORTANT
The Dynamic test does not support travel limits.
The Dynamic test also requires that you enter initial estimates for Rated Flux Current, Rated Slip
Speed, Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1), and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
into the Motor Model fields.
• For the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 35.00 or later, initial estimates are
automatically populated by the controller.
The Dynamic test uses the Ramp Acceleration and Ramp Deceleration attributes to set the
rotational test ramp-up and ramp-down times. If the resulting acceleration/deceleration times are
less than 10 seconds, 10 seconds is used. If these attributes are not supported, 10 seconds is also
used.
The Dynamic test also uses the IM Slip Test Velocity Command (percent of rated speed) and IM Slip
Test Torque Limit (percent of rated torque) attributes to define the motion profile for the slip
measurement. The default values are 100.0 and 50.0 respectively. The speed command dictates
the speed that the motor spins up to and the torque dictates how quickly the motor reaches that
speed. In general, A higher speed and lower torque results in a longer acceleration and a more
accurate rated slip speed.
However, be aware that the dynamic test will not return expected results if the torque limit is set
below 30.0.
Table 90 - Slip Test via Messaging
Attribute
Offset
Type
Attribute Name
3095
REAL
IM Slip Test Torque Limit
3096
REAL
IM Slip Test Velocity Command
Conditional
Implementation
Description
Closed loop induction
motor only
Sets positive and negative torque limits for the slip test within the Dynamic motor test
(similar to the torque limits in the inertia test). Units are in percent of rated torque.
Sets the velocity command for the slip test within the Dynamic motor test, (similar to the
velocity command in the inertia test). Units are in percent of motor rated speed.
The Dynamic test requires the Positive and Negative Torque Limits for said axis are not overwritten while the test is in progress. This can be satisfied by making sure that (1) these cyclic
attributes are not checked as writable within the Drive Parameters tab of the axis properties and (2)
these parameters are not being messaged via an MSG instruction.
When configured for closed-loop control, the Dynamic test requires that an accurate system inertia
is set in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. A default value is automatically populated by
the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
217
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
When configured for closed-loop control, the Dynamic test uses the velocity regulator tuning as
entered into the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. If the motor is coupled to a load, the
velocity regulator tuning may need to be adjusted to make sure the velocity response is well
controlled. The Dynamic test fails if the steady-state velocity feedback is not within a ±30%
tolerance of the commanded velocity.
IMPORTANT
The Dynamic test is not supported in closed-loop Torque Control.
If using the Dynamic test in Frequency Control mode, uncouple the motor from any load or results
may not be valid. In closed-loop control, either a coupled or uncoupled load produces valid results.
Selection of Motor Thermal
Models
The ArmorKinetix modules contain two motor thermal-overload protection algorithms that you can
use to prevent the motor from overheating.
Generic Motors
The default thermal model is a generic I2T Class 10 overload protection algorithm. This model is
active if the MotorWindingToAmbientResistance or the MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance values
are 0.0. The purpose of this algorithm is to limit the time a motor is operating with excessive levels
of current. The relationship between Motor Overload Factory Limit trip-time and motor output
current is shown in Figure 117.
Figure 117 - Motor Overload Curve
100,00
10,00
1000
100
10
0
100
125
150
175 200
225
250
You can use the MotorOverloadLimit attribute (default of 100%, max of 200%) to increase the motor
overload trip-time by artificially increasing the motor rated current (for thermal protection only).
MotorOverloadLimit should only be increased above 100% if cooling options are applied. Increasing
MotorOverloadLimit causes MotorCapacity to increase more slowly.
The generic motor thermal model also derates the motor rated current (for thermal protection only)
when operating at low speeds. The derating factor is 30% at 0 Hz and 0% at 20 Hz, with linear
interpolation between. Operating at output frequencies less than 20 Hz causes MotorCapacity to
increase more quickly.
When the generic motor thermal-model is active, the MotorCapacity attribute increases only if the
motor output current is greater than the effective motor rated current (taking into account the
MotorOverloadLimit and low speed derating factor). The default MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit
and MotorThermalOverloadUserLimit values for this thermal model are both 100%.
IMPORTANT
218
The generic motor-thermal model does not support Current
Foldback as a Motor Overload Action.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Rotary Motor Fan Cooling Attribute Information
For motors that are thermally uncharacterized (for example, many third party motors), the drive
utilizes a generic I2T thermal model for motor thermal protection. When using the generic thermal
model, the motor’s continuous output capacity at low speeds is de-rated to account for an
assumed reduction in cooling ability. Motors equipped with forced ventilation may not require the
de-rated overload protection at low speeds. For this application type, messageable attributes have
been added to firmware versions 13.5 and later. With these attributes, you can adjust the speed
threshold at which derating begins and the amount of derating to be applied at zero speed. See
Table 91 for attribute information.
Table 91 - Rotary Motor Fan Cooling Attributes
Attribute ID
Access
Attribute Name
Data Type
2311
Set
Rotary Motor Fan
Cooling Speed
REAL
2312
Set
Rotary Motor Fan
Cooling Derating
REAL
Description
Default Value
Units
Selects the output speed of the motor below which the motor thermal
protection method reduces the threshold used to detect an overload
condition due to the reduced effectiveness of an integral fan cooling
600
rpm
system. A value of zero disables the effect of the attribute. This attribute is
only applicable when using the I2T motor thermal protection method.
The attribute value indicates the level of the overload detection threshold
at zero speed as a percentage of rated continuous motor current. This
70
% Motor Rated
attribute is only applicable when using the I2T motor thermal protection
method.
Motor Thermal Overload Plot
Figure 118 shows the default values of the attributes 2311 and 2312 and an example with attributes
changed to 200 rpm and 80% respectively.
Figure 118 - Motor Thermal Overload Threshold Versus Motor Speed
110
100
90
Attribute 2311
Default Rotary Motor Fan
Cooling Speed
80
% Motor Rated
70
60
50
Attribute 2312
Default Rotary Motor Fan
Cooling Derating
40
30
20
10
0
0
200
400
600
800
1000
Speed (rpm)
Example Adjusted Cooling Capacity
1200
1400
1600
1800
Default Cooling Capacity
Thermally Characterized Motors
If the MotorWindingToAmbientResistance and MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance attribute values
are both non-zero, the motor is considered thermally characterized and an alternate motor thermal
model is run. The purpose of this algorithm is to limit the time a motor is operating with excessive
levels of current. This thermal model uses the first-order time constant determined from the
MotorWindingToAmbientResistance and MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance values to estimate
the motor thermal capacity based on the motor output current.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
219
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
The MotorOverloadLimit attribute (default of 100%, max of 200%) can be used to increase the
motor overload trip-time by increasing the MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit value. The
MotorOverloadLimit should be increased above 100% only if cooling options are applied. Increasing
MotorOverloadLimit does not change the behavior of MotorCapacity.
This thermal model supports setting the MotorOverloadAction attribute as Current Foldback.
Selecting the Current Foldback action results in a reduction in the current reference via the
MotorThermalCurrentLimit attribute value that is reduced in proportion the percentage difference
between the MotorCapacity and the MotorOverloadLimit values.
When this thermal model is active, the MotorCapacity attribute is non-zero if the motor output
current is non-zero. The default MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit and
MotorThermalOverloadUserLimit values for this thermal model are both 110%.
IMPORTANT
Speed Limited Adjustable
Torque (SLAT)
This thermal model does not derate the motor-rated current when
operating at low speeds. Operating at low output frequencies does not
cause the MotorCapacity behavior to change.
Speed limited adjustable torque (SLAT) is a special mode of operation used primarily in web
handling applications. While configured for SLAT, the drive typically operates as a torque regulator.
The drive can automatically enter velocity regulation based on conditions within the velocity
regulator and the magnitude of the velocity regulator's output, relative to the applied TorqueTrim
attribute.
A torque regulated application can be described as any process requiring tension control. For
example, a winder or unwinder with material being drawn or pulled with a specific tension
required. The process also requires that another element set the speed.
When operating as a torque regulator, the motor current is adjusted to achieve the desired torque.
If the material being wound or unwound breaks, the load decreases dramatically and the motor
can potentially go into a runaway condition.
The SLAT feature is used to support applications that require a robust transition from torque
regulation to velocity regulation (and vice versa). The SLAT feature can be configured via the
SLATConfiguration attribute as:
Table 92 - SLAT Configuration Descriptions
Name
SLAT Disable
SLAT Min Speed/Torque
SLAT Max Speed/Torque
Description
SLAT function is disabled. Normal Velocity Loop operation.
Drive automatically switches from Torque regulation to Velocity regulation if VelocityError <
0 and switches back to Torque regulation if VelocityError > SLATSetPoint for SLATTimeDelay.
Drive automatically switches from Torque regulation to Velocity regulation if VelocityError >
0 and switches back to Torque regulation if VelocityError < SLATSetPoint for SLATTimeDelay.
Direction of the applied torque and direction of the material movement determine whether SLAT
minimum or SLAT maximum mode should be used.
Motion Polarity Setting
The Motion Polarity setting in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application > Axis Properties >
Polarity does not affect SLAT behavior, however, you may require clarification on whether to use
the SLAT Min Speed/Torque or SLAT Max Speed/Torque configuration when Motion Polarity is set to
Inverted. In this case, the velocity error displayed in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is
inverted compared to what is actually used by the axis to control the SLAT function. So, if the SLAT
configuration is set to Min and then Motion Polarity is switched to Inverted, change the SLAT
configuration to Max.
220
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Table 93 - SLAT Operation When Motion Polarity Is Inverted
Velocity Command
Positive (clockwise)
Negative (CCW)
Motion Polarity
Normal
Inverted
Normal
Inverted
SLAT Configuration
Min
Max
Min
Max
SLAT Min Speed/Torque
SLAT Min Speed/Torque is a special mode of operation primarily used in web handling applications.
The drive typically operates as a torque regulator, provided that the TorqueTrim attribute is less
than the torque output due to the velocity regulator's control effort. The drive can automatically
enter velocity regulation based on conditions within the velocity regulator and the magnitude of the
velocity regulator's output relative to the torque reference.
When used for SLAT control, an application dependent VelocityCommand value is applied to the
drive via an MAJ instruction or MDS instruction. An application dependent TorqueTrim value is also
applied via cyclic write. Under normal operation, VelocityCommand is set to a level that results in
the velocity regulator's control effort becoming saturated when the motor's speed is mechanically
limited. The TorqueReference value equals the TorqueTrim value, resulting in a positive
VelocityError value.
Should the mechanical speed limitation be removed (example: web break), the motor accelerates
and VelocityError becomes negative. At this time, a forced transition to velocity regulation occurs,
and the motor's speed is regulated to the VelocityCommand attribute.
The axis remains in velocity regulation until VelocityError exceeds SLATSetPoint for a time specified
by SLATTimeDelay. At this point, the axis returns to operating as a torque regulator.
Figure 119 - SLAT Min Speed/Torque
Select Minimum of Velocity Loop Output
or Torque Command
(speed control is OFF)
Velocity Error < 0
Select Velocity Loop Output
(speed control is ON)
Velocity Error > SLAT Setpoint for SLAT Time
See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP™ Network Reference Manual,
publication MOTION-RM003, for more information on SLAT attributes.
SLAT Max Speed/Torque
SLAT Max Speed/Torque is a special mode of operation primarily used in web handling
applications. The drive typically operates as a torque regulator, provided that the TorqueTrim
attribute is greater than the torque output due to the velocity regulator's control effort. The drive
can automatically enter velocity regulation based on conditions within the velocity regulator and
the magnitude of the velocity regulator's output relative to the torque reference.
When used for SLAT control, an application dependent VelocityCommand value is applied to the
drive via an MAJ instruction or MDS instruction. An application dependent TorqueTrim value is also
applied via cyclic write. Under normal operation, VelocityCommand is set to a level that results in
the velocity regulator's control effort becoming saturated when the motor's speed is mechanically
limited. The TorqueReference value equals the TorqueTrim value, resulting in a negative
VelocityError value.
Should the mechanical speed limitation be removed (example: web break), the motor accelerates
and VelocityError becomes positive. At this time, a forced transition to velocity regulation occurs,
and the motor's speed is regulated to the VelocityCommand attribute.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
221
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
The axis remains in velocity regulation until VelocityError is less than SLATSetPoint for a time
specified by SLATTimeDelay. At this point, the axis returns to operating as a torque regulator.
Figure 120 - SLAT Max Speed/Torque
Velocity Error > 0
Select Maximum of Velocity Loop Output
or Torque Command
(speed control is OFF)
Select Velocity Loop Output
(speed control is ON)
Velocity Error < SLAT Setpoint for SLAT Time
See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual,
publication MOTION-RM003, for more information on SLAT attributes.
SLAT Attributes
ID
Access
Attribute
833
Set
SLAT Configuration
834
835
Set
Set
SLAT Set Point
SLAT Time Delay
Conditional Implementation
0 = SLAT Disable
1 = SLAT Min Speed/Torque
2 = SLAT Max Speed/Torque
Velocity Units
Seconds
Configure the Axis for SLAT
Follow these steps to configure the SLAT attributes.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General dialog box appears.
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
3. From the Axis Configuration dropdown menu, choose Velocity Loop.
The Velocity Loop dialog box appears.
4. Enter values for the Velocity Loop attributes appropriate for your application.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameters List category.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
7. From the SLATConfiguration dropdown menu, choose the SLAT configuration appropriate for
your application.
IMPORTANT
SLAT parameters are configurable only when Velocity Loop is chosen
from the General category, Axis Configuration dropdown menu.
8. Click Apply.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
223
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
9. Enter values for SLATSetPoint and SLATTimeDelay attributes appropriate for your
application.
10. Click OK.
11. Select the Drive Parameters category.
The Drive Parameters to Controller Mapping dialog box appears.
When using SLAT with ArmorKinetix modules, the velocity command is sent to the drive via an MAJ
instruction or MDS instruction. The torque command is sent via the cyclic write TorqueTrim
attribute. See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual, publication
MOTION-RM003, for more information on cyclic read and cyclic write.
For MAJ instructions:
• When using SLAT, start the axis with the MSO instruction.
• The VelocityCommand is sent via the MAJ instruction.
• The TorqueCommand is sent to AxisTag.TorqueTrim.
• To make changes to the VelocityCommand, you must re-trigger the MAJ with the Speed
value or use a MCD (motion change dynamics) instruction.
• To stop the axis use a MAS instruction.
• The axis accelerates and decelerates at the MAJ instruction programmed Acceleration and
Deceleration rates.
• You can also change the rates using the MCD instruction.
For MDS instruction:
• When using SLAT, start the axis with an MDS instruction.
• The MDS instruction turns on the power structure enable and tracking command status and
also executes the velocity command.
See sample code in Motion Drive Start (MDS) Instruction.
• The acceleration and deceleration rate is controlled by Ramped Acceleration and Ramped
Deceleration by using the SSV instruction.
• The Torque Command is set to Axis Tag.Torque Trim. Make sure the Torque Trim Write is
checked in the drive parameter (see Drive Parameters dialog box above). The value can be
changed.
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
- Alternatively, you can use the Axis Tag.DirectCommandVelocity to alter the Velocity
Command when the existing MDS instruction is being executed.
•
To stop the axis, use MAS instructions, keeping the Change Decel to NO and by using an SSV
instruction to change Ramped Deceleration for the desired rate.
Motion Drive Start (MDS) Instruction
ArmorKinetix modules provide access to the Motion Drive Start (MDS) instruction. Use the MDS
instruction to activate the drive control loops for the specified axis and run the motor at the
specified speed.
For information regarding the MDS instruction, refer to the Logix 5000® Controllers Motion
Instructions Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM002.
The MDS instruction is valid only when the axis configuration is set to one of these control modes:
• Frequency Control
• Velocity Loop
• Torque Loop
IMPORTANT
The MDS instruction is not valid when the axis configuration is set to Position
Loop.
Motion Drive Start Instruction Configuration
The MDS instruction is configured in a similar fashion to most motion instructions, as seen in this
example.
Figure 121 - Typical MDS Instruction
Selected Axis
Motion Instruction Tag
Speed Reference
Units per sec
or
% of Maximum
The MDS instruction is similar to a Motion Axis Jog (MAJ) instruction, however, the MDS instruction
does not set the acceleration/deceleration rates. The acceleration rate is dynamically set by the
ramp attributes configured in a Set System Value (SSV) instruction. See Ramp Attributes on
page 227.
The K5700_Axis was configured for revolutions. Therefore, the Speed Units are
revolutions per second (rev/s).
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
225
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Motion Drive Start (MDS) Sample Code
Figure 122 - Start
The speed is increased by updating the speed reference and then re-executing the MDS
instruction.
Figure 123 - Increase Speed
The speed is decreased by updating the speed reference and then re-executing the MDS
instruction.
Figure 124 - Decrease Speed
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
When the axis configuration is in Torque Loop, the Speed attribute within the MDS instruction is not
used to command the speed of the drive. The speed is determined by the amount of torque
specified in the CommandTorque and/or TorqueTrim attributes.
Figure 125 - Torque Mode
IMPORTANT
You must command zero torque in the CommandTorque and TorqueTrim
attributes before you can use the Motion Axis Stop (MAS) instruction to stop a
specific motion process on an axis or to stop the axis completely. To use the
MAS instruction, you must set Change Decel to No. Otherwise, an instruction
error can occur. The deceleration rate is set based on the Ramp
Deceleration attribute. The Motion Servo Off (MSF) instruction is used to
deactivate the drive output for the specified axis and to deactivate the axis’
servo loop. If you execute an MSF instruction while the axis is moving, the
axis coasts to an uncontrolled stop.
Ramp Attributes
The MDS instruction is validated if the Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP drive device supports the
following five ramp attributes:
• RampAcceleration
• RampDeceleration
• RampVelocity - Positive
• RampVelocity - Negative
• RampJerk - Control
IMPORTANT
Ramp attributes are available only when the ArmorKinetix DSx axis
configuration is set to Frequency Control or Velocity Loop. Ramp attributes
are not available when the axis configuration is set to Torque Loop or
Position Loop.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
227
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Table 94 - Ramp Attributes
Ramp Attribute
Access
ID
RampVelocity - Positive
Set
374
RampVelocity - Negative
Set
375
RampAcceleration
Set
376
RampDeceleration
Set
377
RampJerk - Control
Set
379
Description
Ramp Velocity - Positive attribute is a positive value that defines the maximum positive velocity command
output of the Ramp Generator.
Ramp Velocity - Negative attribute is a negative value that defines the maximum negative velocity command
output of the Ramp Generator.
The Ramp Acceleration attribute is a positive value that defines the maximum acceleration (increasing speed)
of the velocity command output by the Ramp Generator.
The Ramp Deceleration attribute is a positive value that defines the maximum deceleration (decreasing speed)
of the velocity command output by the Ramp Generator.
The Ramp Jerk Control attribute sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to the
speed ramp as jerk limited S-Curve based on a step change in velocity. The S-Curve time is added half at the
beginning and half at the end of the ramp. A value of 0 results in no S-Curve, for example, a linear acceleration
or deceleration ramp. A value of 100% results in a triangular acceleration profile with the peak being the
configured ramp acceleration or deceleration. As the Jerk Control value increases, the derived accelerating
jerk value decreases based on the following: 0.5 • 0.01 • Jerk Control • Ramp Vel Positive/Ramp Accel. The
decelerating Jerk limit value also decreases according to the following: 0.5 • 0.01 • Jerk Control • Ramp Vel
Negative/Ramp Decel.
IMPORTANT
The Ramp attributes can be viewed and set with only an SSV or GSV
instruction.
Figure 126 - Ramp Attribute Sample Code
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Overload Retention
Motor Control Feature Support
The motor overload retention feature protects the motor in the event of a drive power-cycle, in
which the motor thermal state is lost.
With motor overload retention, upon drive power-up the MotorCapacity attribute initially reads:
• 20% if the motor is configured to use an integral thermal switch or an integral motor
winding temperature is available
• 50% if the motor is not configured to use an integral thermal switch or an integral motor
winding temperature is not available
If you have a separate monitoring algorithm within your Logix 5000 controller, you can use the
InitialMotorCapacity attribute (3075)10 or (C03)16 to change the initial MotorCapacity value that the
motor overload retention feature populates.
• You can write to the InitialMotorCapacity attribute only in the Stopped state after power-up
• You cannot write to the InitialMotorCapacity attribute after the first time the axis is enabled
following a power cycle.
Use a message instruction to write to the InitialMotorCapacity value.
In this example, the source element tag motorcapacity is a REAL Data type.
Phase Loss Detection
The phase-loss detection feature is designed to determine if motor power wiring is electrically
connected to a motor and that reasonable current control exists. This attribute enables the
operation of the drive's torque proving functions that work in conjunction with mechanical brake
control.
When the ProvingConfiguration attribute is enabled, the drive performs a torque prove test of the
motor current while in the Starting state to prove that current is properly flowing through each of
the motor phases before releasing the brake. If the torque prove test fails, the motor brake stays
engaged and a FLT-S09 Motor Phase Loss exception (fault) is generated.
IMPORTANT
The mechanical brake must be set as soon as the drive is disabled. When
the brake is under the control of the axis state machine, this is
automatic. But, when controlled externally, failure to set the brake when
the drive is disabled can cause a free-fall condition on a vertical
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
229
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Table 95 - Phase-loss Detection Startup Sequence
Startup Phase
Description
When the drive receives an enable request, the Starting state begins execution and torque proving
starts.
The torque proving feature ramps current to the motor-phase output connector and verifies that
the current feedback circuitry detects current on each of the phases.
Once motor-current feedback has been verified in each motor phase, the drive attempts to enable
the current control loop at a user-specified current level, and verifies that the current-loop error
tolerance is within range.
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Torque proving is available for all motoring configurations including closed-loop servo control and
induction motors.
For permanent magnet (PM) motors, the drive attempts to apply current to the motor phases such
that all current through the motor is flux current. However, due to the electrical angle of the motor
at the time of the MSO instruction, it may not be possible to verify the motor phase wiring with only
flux current. Therefore, with a PM motor it is possible that the motor shaft can move slightly during
torque proving if no motor brake exists to hold the load.
Phase-loss Detection Attributes
ID
Access
Attribute
590
SSV
ProvingConfiguration
591
SSV
TorqueProveCurrent
Conditional Implementation
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
% Motor Rated
Units: Amps
Default: 0.000
Min/Max: 0/10,000
Phase-loss Detection Configuration
Follow these steps to configure the phase-loss detection attributes.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to ProvingConfiguration.
230
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
3. From the ProvingConfiguration dropdown menu, choose Enabled to enable the torque
proving feature.
4. Enter a value in the TorqueProveCurrent attribute appropriate for your application.
5. Click OK.
The TorqueProveCurrent attribute is active only if ProvingConfiguration is set to Enabled.
TorqueProveCurrent lets you specify the amount of current that is used during the torque proving
test and calculated as a percentage of motor rating. The higher the TorqueProveCurrent value the
more current the drive delivers to the motor to verify that the motor phase wiring is available and
capable of that current level. High current levels conversely cause more thermal stress and
(potentially) can cause more torque to be driven against the motor brake during the test. If the
TorqueProveCurrent level selected is too small, the drive cannot distinguish the proving current
from noise, and in this case the drive posts an INHIBIT M04 torque-proving configuration fault code.
The minimum amount of torque proving current depends on catalog number of the drive.
Phase Loss Detection Current Example
In this example, a 2198-D032-ERS3 dual-axis inverter is paired with a VPL-B1003T-C motor with
9.58 A rms rated current. Use the phase-loss detection equation and table to calculate the initial
minimum torque-proving current as a percentage of motor rated current. Depending on the unique
characteristics of your application, the required torque-proving current value can be larger than
the initial recommended value.
Figure 127 - Phase-loss Detection Equation
0.9337 A
Rating From Table
=
= 9.75% motor rated current.
9.58 A
Motor Rated Current
Table 96 - Recommended Phase-loss Detection Current
Drive Cat. No.
2198-S086-ERSx
2198-S130-ERSx
2198-S160-ERSx
2198-S263-ERSx
2198-S312-ERSx
2198-D006-ERSx
2198-D012-ERSx
2198-D020-ERSx
2198-D032-ERSx
2198-D057-ERSx
Phase-loss Detection Current, min
A, rms
7.183
9.337
12.21
21.492
27.436
0.1796
0.3591
0.5746
0.9337
1.6520
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
231
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Velocity Droop
The velocity droop function can be useful when some level of compliance is required due to rigid
mechanical coupling between two motors. The feature is supported when the axis is configured for
Frequency Control, Velocity Control, or Position Control.
Closed Loop Control
The closed-loop velocity droop function is supported when configured for either Velocity or
Position control. The velocity error input to the integral term is reduced by a fraction of the velocity
regulator's output, as controlled by the VelocityDroop attribute. Therefore, as torque loading on the
motor increases, actual motor speed is reduced in proportion to the droop gain. This is helpful
when some level of compliance is required due to rigid mechanical coupling between two motors.
IMPORTANT
The closed-loop velocity droop function acts to reduce the velocity error
input to the integral term, but never changes the polarity of the velocity
error.
IMPORTANT
When configured for closed-loop control, the units of the VelocityDroop
attribute are Velocity Control Units / Sec / % Rated Torque.
Frequency Control
The velocity droop function is also supported when configured for Frequency Control. As the
estimated Iq current within the motor increases, the velocity reference is reduced in proportion to
the VelocityDroop attribute. Therefore, as torque loading on the motor increases, actual motor
speed is reduced in proportion to the droop gain. This is helpful when some level of compliance is
required due to rigid mechanical coupling between two motors.
IMPORTANT
The frequency-control velocity droop function acts to reduce the velocity
reference, but never changes the direction of the velocity reference.
IMPORTANT
When configured for frequency control, the units of the VelocityDroop
attribute are Velocity Control Units / Sec / % Rated Iq Current.
Table 97 - Velocity Droop Attribute
ID
464/321
232
Access
SSV
Attribute
Velocity Droop
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Conditional Implementation
Velocity Units / Sec / % Rated
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Velocity Droop Configuration
Follow these steps to configure the velocity droop attribute.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to VelocityDroop.
3. Enter a value in the Velocity Droop attribute appropriate for your application.
4. Click OK.
Commutation Self-sensing
Startup
The commutation self-sensing feature is used to determine the initial electrical angle for
permanent magnet (PM) motors with an incremental encoder that do not have Hall effect sensors.
For PM motors that use encoders with Hall sensors, the drive can still be configured to use this
feature, however, the Hall effect signals are ignored. When enabled, this feature is executed
automatically at powerup and when the system is enabled.
IMPORTANT
Following a connection loss to the controller after the initial power-up, the
commutation self-sense feature is run again when connection is
re-established and motion is commanded.
The self-sense feature takes approximately 5 seconds to execute. Five seconds is the default
amount time assuming no retries are required. The axis stays in the Starting state while self-sense
executes.
The sequencing of events is as follows.
1. One-second current ramp time
2. One second delay
3. One-second move time
4. One second delay
5. One-second current ramp time
IMPORTANT
Self-sensing startup is not commutation diagnostics. You can perform
commutation diagnostics on Hall effect or self-sensing motors at any time.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
233
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
To use the self-sense feature, select the Motor Feedback category and from the Commutation
Alignment dropdown menu, choose Self-Sense.
Table 98 - Self-sense Feature Attributes
CIP™ Attribute
Number
CIP Attribute Name
Data Type
562
Commutation Self-Sensing
Current
REAL
3102
Self-Sense Direction
USINT
3103
Self-Sense Lock Time
REAL
3104
Self-Sense Lock Delay
REAL
3105
Self-Sense Move Time
REAL
3106
Self-Sense Move Delay
REAL
234
Description
Semantics of Values
The percent of the motors rated peak current to use for self% Motor Rated Peak Current
sensing startup. This value can be adjusted when the motor is
[default = 100]
moving a high inertia load.
• Forward – indicates the motor moves in only the positive
0 = Forward - CW (rotary) or Positive
direction during self-sensing startup.
(linear) [default]
1 = Reverse - CCW (rotary) or
• Negative – indicates the motor moves in only the negative
Negative (linear)
direction during self-sensing startup.
The amount of time the drive uses to build up current to the Self- Seconds
Sensing Current level specified above.
[default = 1.0]
The amount of time the motor must be in the locked position after Seconds
reaching the full Self-Sensing Current.
[default = 1.0]
The amount of time the drive uses for the verification move during Seconds
self-sensing startup. Applies only to motors with self-sensing
[default = 1.0]
startup.
The amount of time the drive holds the final position after the
verification move during self-sensing startup.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Seconds
[default = 1.0]
Appendix D
Commutation Test
Motor Control Feature Support
The commutation test determines an unknown commutation offset and can also be used to
determine the unknown polarity of the start-up commutation wiring. You can also use the
commutation test to verify a known commutation offset and the polarity start-up commutation
wiring.
IMPORTANT
This test applies to third-party or custom permanent-magnet motors
equipped with (TTL with Hall and Sine/Cosine with Hall) incremental
encoders that are not available as a catalog number in the Motion Database.
IMPORTANT
When motors have an unknown commutation offset and are not listed in the
Motion Database by catalog number, you cannot enable the axis, unless you
enable the communication self-sensing feature.
Figure 128 - Hookup Tests - Commutation Tab
To run the commutation test, see Test the Axes on page 133.
Adaptive Tuning
The adaptive tuning feature is an algorithm inside the ArmorKinetix DSx modules. The algorithm
continuously monitors and, if necessary, adjusts or adapts various filter parameters and, in some
cases, control-loop gains to compensate for unknown and changing load conditions while the drive
is running. Its primary function is to:
• Automatically adjust torque-loop notch and low-pass filter parameters to suppress
resonances
• Automatically adjust control-loop gains to avoid instability when detected
See Motion System Tuning Application Techniques, publication MOTION-AT005, for more information
on the AdaptiveTuningConfiguration attribute.
Virtual Torque Sensor
The virtual torque sensor feature provides an estimate of the motor torque without having a
physical torque sensor. The virtual torque sensor can be leveraged to improve the commissioning
and maintenance experience with mechanical systems and to optimize production quality. Some
examples of how the feature can be applied include the following:
• Indication of shaft misalignment during commissioning
• Verification of appropriate mechanical belt tensioning during maintenance
• Detection of a material jam during operation
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
235
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
The feature provides an estimate of the motor air-gap torque under dynamic and steady state
operating conditions. The air-gap torque is the torque that includes the load torque, motor torque
losses, and rotor acceleration torque. The estimated torque does not affect motion control or drive
performance.
The virtual torque sensor is available with the following hardware and software:
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer® version 35 and later
• ArmorKinetix DSx modules with firmware revision 14.000 or later
For more information on how to apply the virtual torque sensor feature, see Virtual Torque Sensor
Application Technique, publication 2198-AT003.
Accelerometer Support
The ArmorKinetix DSx modules include a built-in 3-axis accelerometer and can provide real-time
vibration data. The X/Y/Z raw and RMS accelerometer feedback data are accessible in the Studio
5000 Logix Designer application via cyclic read attributes. For more information, see
Knowledgebase Technote ArmorKinetix DSD/DSM Frequently Asked Questions.
•
•
•
X - Direction: Axial direction
Y – Direction: Rotational direction
Z - Direction: Radial direction
Z
Y
236
X
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Slip-ring Support
Motor Control Feature Support
A slip-ring is an electromechanical device that allows the transmission of power and electrical
signals from a stationary to a rotating structure. You can use a slip-ring in any electromechanical
system that requires rotation while transmitting power, control circuits, or digital signals including
data. For more information, see Knowledgebase Technote ArmorKinetix DSD/DSM Frequently
Asked Questions.
There are two variants of the slip-ring, 24 and 48 axes. For 24 axes, one PIM module is required and
for 48 axes, two PIM modules are required. Each variant has two options for how the slip-ring is
mounted, see Table 100 and Table 101 for option specifications. The slip-ring is connected between
DSx modules. See Figure 129, Figure 130, Figure 131, and Figure 132.
Table 99 - Slip-ring Specifications
Slip-ring Connector
Description/Specification
Power Signal (3 wires). 800V, 75 A
1 Gigabit Ethernet Signal Wires (8 wires), 1 A
1 Gigabit Ethernet Signal Wires (8 wires), 1 A
See vendor specification
Hybrid (Brush/Ring Side)
Ethernet (Brush/Ring Side)
Aux (Brush/Ring Side)
24 Axes Support
IMPORTANT
Depending on your slip-ring connections (whether the brush side or the
ring side is connected to the DSx module), there are two options for the
connector type on the slip-ring module. The slip-ring module mounts
vertically with the rotational side on the top and the stationary side on the
bottom.
Table 100 - Slip-ring Module Options
Slip-ring Connector - 24 Axes
(Option 1)
Plug
Socket
—
Socket
Plug
—
Slip-ring Connector
Hybrid (brush side)
Ethernet (brush side)
Aux (brush side)
Hybrid (ring side)
Ethernet (ring side)
Aux (ring side)
Slip-ring Connector -24 Axes
(Option 2)
Socket
Plug
—
Plug
Socket
—
24 Axes Support - Option 1
For 24 axes support, option 1, the brush side is stationary.
1. Connect the PIM module (1) to the DSx module (3) by using the ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx
hybrid cable (6).
2. Connect the DSx module (3) to the slip-ring (10) hybrid connector (11) by using the
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (7).
IMPORTANT
The hybrid cable (7) connector that connects to the slip-ring stationary side
is always the socket side of the cable. Therefore, the slip-ring side
connecting to the DSx module must have a plug connector.
3. If DLR topology is required, connect an Ethernet cable (8) to the Ethernet connector (12) on
the brush side of the slip-ring to an Ethernet switch (5).
4. Connect the other side of the slip-ring (14) to a DSx module by using a ArmorKinetix hybrid
cable (7).
5. If DLR topology is required, connect the Ethernet connector (15) on the ring side of the slipring to an Ethernet patchcord (8) to connect the communication extension jumper cable (9).
6. Connect the communication extension cable to the last DSx module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
237
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 129 - One PIM Module with Slip-ring (24 axes support)
See Table 100 for Slip-ring options.
1
2
8 - Ethernet Patchcord
(plug)
8 - Ethernet Patchcord
(socket)
12- Slip-ring Ethernet
Cable Connector (socket)
15- Slip-ring Ethernet Cable
Connector (plug)
5
8
7 11
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
238
12
14
16 15
7
Ring Side
(rotational
side, top)
Option 1
3
6 or 7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid
Cable Connector (socket)
13
Brush Side
(stationary
side,
bottom) 10
6
9 - Communication extension (socket)
8 - Ethernet Patchcord (plug)
7
7
3
3
4
14 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable
Connector (socket)
11 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Description
ArmorKinetix PIM modules
Kinetix® 5700 power supply
ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM module
Kinetix VPL motor
Ethernet switch
ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx)
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx)
Ethernet patchcord, 1 Gigabit with hybrid connector to connect to
communication extension 85 m (278 ft) max.
(1585D-M8UGDM, 1585D-M8TGDE, or 1585D-E8TGDE)
7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Item
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Communication extension jumper cable (2090-CDET)
Slip-ring module
Slip-ring hybrid cable connector (plug connector) brush side
Ethernet connection (brush side)
Aux connection (brush side)
Slip-ring hybrid cable connector (socket connector) ring side
Ethernet connection (ring side)
16
Aux connection (ring side)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
3
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
24 Axes Support - Option 2
For 24 axes support, option 2, the ring side is stationary.
1. Connect the PIM module (1) to the DSx module (3) by using the ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx
hybrid cable (6).
2. Connect the DSx module (3) to the slip-ring (10) hybrid connector (11) by using the
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (7).
IMPORTANT
The hybrid cable (7) connector that connects to the slip-ring stationary side
is always the socket side of the cable. Therefore, the slip-ring side
connecting to the DSx module must have a plug connector.
3. If DLR topology is required, connect an Ethernet cable (8) to the Ethernet connector (12) on
the ring side of the slip-ring to an Ethernet switch (5).
4. Connect the other side of the slip-ring (14) to a DSx module by using a ArmorKinetix hybrid
cable (7).
5. If DLR topology is required, connect the Ethernet connector (15) on the brush side of the slipring to an Ethernet patchcord (8) to connect the communication extension jumper cable (9).
6. Connect the communication extension cable to the last DSx module.
Figure 130 - One PIM Module with Slip-ring (24 axes support)
See Table 100 for Slip-ring options.
1
2
5
8 - Ethernet Patchcord
(plug)
8 - Ethernet Patchcord
(socket)
12- Slip-ring Ethernet Cable
Connector (socket)
15- Slip-ring Ethernet Cable
Connector (plug)
8
7 11
8
12
14
16 15
Option 2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
9 - Communication extension (socket)
7
Ring Side
Brush Side
(stationary
(rotational
side,
side, top)
bottom) 10
6
6 or 7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid
Cable Connector (socket)
8 - Ethernet Patchcord (plug)
7
7
3
3
4
11 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Description
ArmorKinetix PIM modules
Kinetix 5700 power supply
ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM module
Kinetix VPL motor
Ethernet switch
ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx)
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx)
Ethernet patchcord, 1 Gigabit with hybrid connector to connect to
communication extension 85 m (278 ft) max.
(1585D-M8UGDM, 1585D-M8TGDE, or 1585D-E8TGDE)
14 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable
Connector (socket)
7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Item
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Communication extension jumper cable (2090-CDET)
Slip-ring module
Slip-ring hybrid connector (plug connector) ring side
Ethernet connection (ring side)
Aux connection (ring side)
Slip-ring hybrid connector (socket connector) brush side
Ethernet connection (brush side)
16
Aux connection (brush side)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
3
239
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
48 Axes Support
IMPORTANT
Depending on your slip-ring connections (whether the brush side or the
ring side is connected to the DSx module), there are two options for the
connector type on the slip-ring module. The slip-ring module mounts
vertically with the rotational side on the top and the stationary side on the
bottom.
Table 101 - Slip-ring Module Options
Slip-ring Connector - 48 Axes
(Option 1)
Plug
Plug
—
Socket
Socket
—
Slip-ring Connector
Hybrid B1 (brush side)
Hybrid B2 (brush side)
Aux B1 (brush side)
Hybrid R1 (ring side)
Hybrid R2 (ring side)
Aux B1 (ring side)
Slip-ring Connector - 48 Axes
(Option 2)
Socket
Socket
—
Plug
Plug
—
48 Axes Support - Option 1
For 48 axes support, option 1, the brush side is stationary.
1. Connect the PIM module (1) to the DSx module (3) by using the ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx
hybrid cable (6).
2. Connect the DSx module (3) to the slip-ring (10) hybrid connector (11) by using the
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (7).
IMPORTANT
The hybrid cable (7) connector that connects to the slip-ring stationary side
is always the socket side of the cable. Therefore, the slip-ring side
connecting to the DSx module must have a plug connector.
3. Connect the other side of the slip-ring (14) to a DSx module by using a ArmorKinetix hybrid
cable (7).
4. If DLR topology is required, use the communication extension cable (9) and an Ethernet
patchcord (8) to connect to the last DSx module.
240
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
Figure 131 - Two PIM Modules with Slip-ring (48 axes support)
See Table 101 for Slip-ring options.
5
2
7
7
9
1
7
11
6
13
3
6 or 7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (socket) from DSx Module
9
16
Option 1
11 - Slip-ring Hybrid Connector (plug)
Item Description
1
ArmorKinetix PIM modules
2
3
4
5
6
7
Kinetix 5700 power supply
ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM module
Kinetix VPL motor
Ethernet switch
ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx)
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx)
3
7
7
Brush Side
Ring Side
(stationary
(rotational
side,
side, top)
bottom) 10
6
4
14
7
7
8
3
3
7
3
3
4
14 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable Connector
(socket)
3
7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Item Description
Ethernet patchcord, 1 Gigabit with hybrid connector to connect to communication
8 extension 85 m (278 ft) max.
(1585D-M8UGDM, 1585D-M8TGDE, or 1585D-E8TGDE)
9 Communication extension jumper cable (2090-CDET)
10 Slip-ring module
11 Slip-ring hybrid connector (plug connector) brush side
13 Aux connection (brush side)
14 Slip-ring hybrid connector (socket connector) ring side
16 Aux connection (ring side)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
241
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
48 Axes Support - Option 2
For 48 axes support, option 2, the ring side is stationary.
1. Connect the PIM module (1) to the DSx module (3) by using the ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx
hybrid cable (6).
2. Connect the DSx module (3) to the slip-ring (10) hybrid connector (11) by using the
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (7).
IMPORTANT
The hybrid cable (7) connector that connects to the slip-ring stationary side
is always the socket side of the cable. Therefore, the slip-ring side
connecting to the DSx module must have a plug connector.
3. Connect the other side of the slip-ring (14) to a DSx module by using a ArmorKinetix hybrid
cable (7).
4. If DLR topology is required, use the communication extension cable (9) and an Ethernet
patchcord (8) to connect to the last DSx module.
Figure 132 - Two PIM Modules with Slip-ring (48 axes support)
See Table 101 for Slip-ring options.
5
2
7
7
9
1
7
11
6
13
3
6 or 7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (socket) from DSx Module
11 - Slip-ring Hybrid Connector (plug)
Item Description
1
ArmorKinetix PIM modules
2
3
4
5
6
7
Kinetix 5700 power supply
ArmorKinetix DSD or DSM module
Kinetix VPL motor
Ethernet switch
ArmorKinetix PIM to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHIFS-12AFxxxx)
ArmorKinetix DSx to DSx hybrid cable (2090-CDHP1S-12AFxxxx)
242
9
16
Option 2
3
7
7
Ring Side
Brush Side
(stationary
(rotational
side,
side, top)
bottom) 10
6
4
14
7
7
8
3
3
7
3
3
4
14 - Slip-ring Hybrid Cable Connector
(socket)
3
7 - ArmorKinetix Hybrid Cable
Connector (plug)
Item Description
Ethernet patchcord, 1 Gigabit with hybrid connector to connect to communication
8 extension 85 m (278 ft) max.
(1585D-M8UGDM, 1585D-M8TGDE, or 1585D-E8TGDE)
9 Communication extension jumper cable (2090-CDET)
10 Slip-ring module
11 Slip-ring hybrid connector (plug connector) ring side
13 Aux connection (ring side)
14 Slip-ring hybrid connector (socket connector) brush side
16 Aux connection (brush side)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Index
Numerics
1321 line reactors 9, 12
2198-BARCON-55DC200 11
2198-CAPMOD-2240 32
2198-CAPMOD-DCBUS-IO 32
2198-DBRxx-F 12, 27
2198-DCBUSCOND-RP312 32
2198-KITCON-ENDCAP200 11
24V input power connector
wiring 76
A
about this publication 9
absolute position feature 69
AC line filters
2198-DBRxx-F 12, 27
accelerometer 236
accessory modules 32, 41
capacitor 11, 32
DC-bus conditioner 11, 32
extension 11, 32
minimum modules required 33
actions category 115, 120
active shunt
interconnect diagram 177
adaptive tuning 235
alarm 142
AOP
PCDC download 85
application requirements 156
applying power 131
associated axes 90, 95
category 98
audience for this manual 9
axis properties 104, 106, 112, 117
axis unstable 140
B
basic volts/hertz 107, 201
behavior
DC-bus power supply 143
drive module 144
block diagrams
capacitor module 186
DC-bus conditioner module 187
DC-bus power supply 185
bonding
EMI (electromagnetic interference) 34
examples 35
high frequency energy 36
subpanels 36
bus-sharing
configuration 89, 96
group 89, 96
group example 128
groups 128
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
C
cable length
restrictions 29
cables
cable lengths, max 199
categories 38
Kinetix 2090 12
calculate model 216
capacitor module 11, 32, 186
interconnect diagram 172
catalog numbers
DC-bus power supply 24
PIM 24
shared-bus connection system 25
category 3
stop category definitions 154
CE compliance 27
certification
application requirements 156
PL and SIL 154
TÜV Rheinland 154
user responsibilities 154
website 154
cluster 189
commutation offset 134, 235
commutation self-sensing 233
configuration
24V DC voltage drop 194
DC-bus power supply 16
extended DC-bus 18
feedback examples 19
multiple DC-bus power supply 17
configuring
actions category 115, 120
axis properties
general category 102
basic volts/hertz 107
CIP axis states 84
controller 86
DC-bus power supply 88
download program 131
DSx 92
exceptions category 115, 120
fan/pump volts/hertz 110
feedback-only axis 99, 104
flux up 212
frequency control category 107, 108, 110
general category 104, 106, 112, 117
home screen 81
hookup test 133
induction-motor closed-loop axis properties
117
induction-motor frequency-control axis 106
IP address 84, 85
load category 114, 121
master feedback 105
MDS instruction 225
menu screens 82
module properties 89, 90, 91, 93, 95, 96, 98, 99,
100
motion
group 100
243
Index
safety 95
motor
analyzer category 110, 122
category 106, 113, 118, 213
feedback category 119, 123, 124, 125, 126
test 133
network parameters 84, 85
parameter list category 108, 109, 111, 116, 121
polarity category 118
power category
bus-sharing group example 128
bus-sharing groups 128
power interface module 88
safety
application 94
connection 94
scaling category 114, 119
sensorless vector 108
setup
menu 83
screens 82
SLAT 222
SPM motor closed-loop axis properties 112
startup sequence 84
torque proving 230
valid feedback types 123
velocity droop 233
Connected Drive mode 144
Connection mode 94
connector kit
2198-BARCON-55DC200 11
2198-KITCON-ENDCAP200 11
24V
drive system 11
control power
wiring 76
controller
and drive behavior 142
CompactLogix 86
configure 86
ControlLogix 86
properties
date/time tab 87
enable time synchronization 87
controller-based
monitoring functions 20
stopping functions 20
corner-grounded power configuration 73
CP connector
wiring 76
current limiting 204
current regulator loop 213
D
date/time tab 87
DC bus connector
pinouts 57
DC-bus conditioner module 11, 32, 187
DC-bus group 189
DC-bus power supply 11, 185
behavior 143
catalog numbers 24
configuring 88
minimum accessory modules 33
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
digital encoder
AqB TTL 123
AqB with UVW 124
digital inputs
category 90, 100
pinouts 57
specifications 62
wiring 77
disable 142
display 81
download program 131
drilling hole patterns 42
DC-bus power supply 43
system mounting toolkit 44
drive module
behavior 144
drive replacement
integrated safety 161
DSx 9
configuring 92
dynamic motor test 217
E
EMI (electromagnetic interference)
bonding 34
enable time synchronization 87
enclosure
selection 31
encoder
phasing 68
erratic operation 141
Ethernet connector
pinouts 58
EtherNet/IP
connections 58, 64
exception 142
action 142
exception actions 142
exceptions category 115, 120
extended
cluster 189
DC-bus 189, 190
extended DC-bus
interconnect diagram 173, 174
extension module 11, 32
F
FactoryTalk Motion Analyzer website 10
fan/pump 202
volts/hertz 110
fault
code overview 138
code summary 138
feedback
configurations 19
feedback-only axis 99, 104
specifications 66
flux up 210
attributes 211
frequency control category 107, 108, 110
Index
G
general
category 89, 93, 104, 106, 112, 117
grounded-wye power configuration 72
H
heat dissipation 31
HF bonding 34
high-frequency
energy 36
hole patterns 42, 44
DC-bus power supply 43
home screen
soft menu 81
hookup test 133, 235
I
I/O
digital inputs specifications 62
IEC 61508 154
EN/IEC 62061 154
ignore 142
impedance-grounded power configuration 73
induction motor control
closed-loop axis properties 117
configure flux up 212
control methods
basic volts/hertz 201
fan/pump 202
sensorless vector 203
flux up 210
attributes 211
frequency-control axis 106
motor
analyzer category 215
and inertia tests 215
data sheet 214
model category 214
multiple skip speed 209
open-loop frequency control 201, 204, 207
skip speed 208
SLAT 222
input power wiring
24V control 76
corner-grounded power configuration 73
determine input power 72
grounded-wye power configuration 72
impedance-grounded power configuration 73
ungrounded power configuration 74
installing your drive
bonding
examples 35
subpanels 36
cable categories 38
HF bonding 34
noise zones 37
installing your PIM system
enclosure selection 31
integrated safety
drive replacement 161
out-of-box state 159
protocol 163
integrated SS1 mode 23
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
integrated STO mode 21, 22
operation 156
STO state reset 157
interconnect diagrams
2198 drive with LDAT 181
2198 drive with LDC 183, 184
2198 drive with MPAR/MPAI 182
2198 drive with MPL/VPC-S/MPM/MPF/MPS 179
2198 drive with VPL/VPC-Q/VPF/VPH/VPS 178
active shunt 177
capacitor module 172
DSD with VPAR 180
extended system 173, 174
module status 175
multiple
converter 171
notes 169
passive shunt resistor 176
single
converter 170
inverters
single-axis 11
IOD connector
pinouts 57
wiring 77
IP address 84, 85
EN/ISO 13849-1 154
stop category definitions 154
K
Kinetix
LDAT linear thrusters 19
LDC linear motors 19
MPAR electric cylinders 19
L
LCD display 81
messages 137
link
link/activity status indicator 140
load category 114, 121
Logix Designer 85
M
major fault 142
MAS instruction 227
master feedback 105
MDS instruction
configure 225
decrease speed sample code 226
increase speed sample code 226
ramp attributes 227, 228
ramp attributes sample code 228
start sample code 226
torque mode sample code 227
menu screens 82
minor fault 142
module definition 94
motion safety 95
safety application 94
safety connection 94
245
Index
module properties
associated axes category 90, 98
digital input category 90, 100
general category 89, 93
module definition 94
new tag 91, 99
power category 89, 95
safety category 96
module status
DC-bus power supply 175
indicator 139
regenerative bus supply 175
monitored safe stop (SS1) 20
motion
drive start instruction 225
group 100
safety 95
motion direct commands
STO bypas 163
warning messages 164
motor
accel/decel problems 140
analyzer category 110, 122, 215
cable
length 27
length, max 199
category 106, 113, 118
data sheet 214
fan cooling attribute 219
feedback
category 119, 123, 124, 125, 126
interconnect diagram 178
model category 214
motor and inertia tests 215
overheating 141
overload retention 229
testing 133
thermal models 218
tuning 133
velocity 141
mounting your drive
attaching to the panel 44
drilling hole patterns 42
mounting order
accessory modules 32, 41
drive modules 39, 40
shared-bus connection system 45
system mounting toolkit 44
zero-stack tab and cutout 42
MPAR electric cylinders 19
MSF instruction 227
multi-cluster system 41
multiple
converter interconnect diagram 171
skip speed 209
N
navigation buttons 81
network
parameters 84, 85
status indicator 140
new tag
data type 91, 99
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
noise
abnormal 141
feedback 141
zones 37
O
open-loop frequency control 201
out-of-box state 159
overtravel fault code 138
P
parameter list category 108, 109, 111, 116, 121
passive shunt
interconnect diagram 176
PCDC download 85
PIM
catalog numbers 24
menu screen 82
setup menu 83
pinouts
DC bus connector 57
digital inputs connector 57
Ethernet connector 58
polarity category 118
power category
bus
configuration 89, 96
bus-sharing
group 89, 96, 128
group example 128
power structure 89, 95
power interface module
configure module properties 88
power supply
cluster 189
DC-bus power supply 11
power up 131
probability of failure (PFH) definition 155
R
ramp attributes 228
rated slip speed 216
regenerative bus supply
configure axis properties
general category 102
remove/replace
remove PIM 150
remove power 149
replace PIM module 151
startup and configure 151
Running Controller mode 145
S
safe direction (SDI) 20
safe operational stop (SOS) 20
safe stop 1
integrated configuration 23
safe torque-off
configurations
Index
integrated 21, 22
integrated STO mode
STO state reset 157
probability of failure (PFH) 155
safe torque-off (STO) 20
safely limited position (SLP) 20
safely limited speed (SLS) 20
safety
actions
connected drive 144
running controller 145
application 94
category 96
connection 94
safety feedback interface (SFX) 20
scaling category 114, 119
SDI 20
sensorless vector 108, 203
setup screens 82, 83
SFX 20
shared-bus
connection system 45
catalog numbers 25
shutdown 142
sine/cosine 125
with Hall 126
single
converter interconnect diagram 170
single-axis inverter 11
sizing
24V current 193
cluster 189
DC-bus group 189
extended cluster 189
extended DC-bus 189, 190
general guidelines 191
power supply cluster 189
shared-bus configurations 189
system sizing 191
example 196, 197
total system capacitance 191
skip speed 208
SLAT 220
attributes 222
configuring 222
slip test messaging 217
slip-ring 237
SLP 20
SLS 20
soft menu
home screen 81
software
overtravel 138
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application 86
SOS 20
specifications
auxiliary
feedback 66
digital inputs 62
encoder phasing 68
EtherNet/IP connections 58, 64
motor
feedback 66
motor feedback 66
absolute position 69
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
generic TTL incremental 67
Hiperface 67
sin/cos incremental 67
speed limited adjustable torque 220
SPM motor closed-loop axis properties 112
SS1 stopping function 20, 23
stability control 207
standard actions 144
startup sequence 84
CIP axis states 84
static motor test 216
status indicators
link/activity status 140
module status 139
network status 140
troubleshooting 139
STO
bypass 163
STO stopping function 20
stop
planner 142
stopping actions
configure 144
Studio 5000 Logix Designer 85, 86
system
block diagrams
capacitor module 186
DC-bus conditioner module 187
DC-bus power supply 185
components 11
mounting toolkit 44
overview
24V DC voltage drop 194
DC-bus power supply 16
EtherNet/IP 14, 15
extended DC-bus 18
multiple DC-bus power supplies 17
sizing
example 196, 197
system sizing 29, 191
T
testing axes
hookup test 133
time synchronization 87
timed safe stop (SS1) 20
torque proving 229
attributes 229
configuring 230
total system capacitance 191
troubleshooting
alarm 142
ArmorKinetix behavior 144
controller/drive fault behavior 142
DC-bus supply behavior 143
disable 142
exceptions 142
fault
code overview 138
code summary 138
general system problems
abnormal noise 141
axis unstable 140
erratic operation 141
247
Index
feedback noise 141
motor accel/decel 140
motor overheating 141
motor velocity 141
no rotation 141
ignore 142
LCD display messages 137
link/activity status indicator 140
major fault 142
minor fault 142
module status indicator 139
network status indicator 140
safety
actions 144
precautions 137
shutdown 142
standard actions 144
status indicators 139
status only 142
stop
planner 142
stopping actions 144
definitions 144
typical installation
24V DC voltage drop 194
DC-bus power supply 16
EtherNet/IP 14, 15
extended DC-bus 18
multiple DC-bus power supplies 17
U
UK compliance 27
ungrounded power configuration 74
V
valid feedback types 123
digital AqB TTL 123
digital AqB with UVW 124
sine/cosine 125
sine/cosine with Hall 126
velocity droop 232
attribute 232
configure 233
vibration data 236
virtual torque sensor 235
W
website
certifications 154
FactoryTalk Motion Analyzer 10
wiring
corner-grounded power configuration 73
CP connector 76
grounded-wye power configuration 72
impedance-grounded power configuration 73
input power type 72
IOD connector 77
requirements 71
ungrounded power configuration 74
Z
zero-stack tab and cutout 42
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers
Technical Documentation Center
Literature Library
Product Compatibility and Download Center
(PCDC)
Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product
notification updates.
Locate the telephone number for your country.
Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user
manuals.
Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications.
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product
release notes.
rok.auto/support
rok.auto/phonesupport
rok.auto/techdocs
rok.auto/literature
rok.auto/pcdc
Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.
Allen-Bradley, CompactLogix, ControlFLASH, ControlFLASH Plus, ControlLogix, Encompass, expanding human possibility, FactoryTalk, GuardLogix, iTRAK, Kinetix, Logix 5000,
PanelView, POINT Guard I/O, POINT I/O, PowerFlex, Rockwell Automation, RSLinx, RSLogix 5000, Stratix, Studio 5000, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CIP, CIP Motion, CIP Safety, CIP Security, CIP Sync, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Publication 2198-UM006A-EN-P - June 2023
Copyright © 2023 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
">